Home

Network II.5 User`s Manual

1. NAME SEEK TIME TYPE UNIFOR LOWER BOUND 200 UPPER BOUND 1200 ae ee ek SE APHORES SOFTWARE TYPE SEMAPHORE NAME TIME THE FLIGHT STRING INCLUDE IN PLOT FILE YES INCLUDE COUNT IN PLOT FILE YES INCLUDE RESPONSE IN PLOT FILE YES MEASURE RESPONSE YES MAXIMUM PENDING RESPONSES 999 NAME TIME THE MSG BUFFER STRING INCLUDE IN PLOT FILE YES INCLUDE COUNT IN PLOT FILE YES INCLUDE RESPONSE IN PLOT FILE YES EASURE RESPONSE YES AXIMUM PENDING RESPONSES 999 NAME TIME THE DATA STRING INCLUDE IN PLOT FILE YES INCLUDE COUNT IN PLOT FILE YES INCLUDE RESPONSE IN PLOT FILE YES EASURE RESPONSE YES AXIMUM PENDING RESPONSES 999 PROCESSING ELEMENTS HARDWARE TYPE PROCESSING NAME PE 1 LOCATION 15 254 1 699 ICON mac icn STYLE COLOR 1 3 1 00 Or 1 2 50 2 00 2 00 BASIC CYCLE TIME 1 MIC INPUT CONTROLLER YES QUEUE FLAG YES a a The Network Description File 307 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual y INSTRUCTION REPERTOIRE INSTRUCTION TYPE READ NAME GET RADAR DATA STORAGE DEVICE TO ACCESS RADAR DISH FILE ACCESSED GENERAL STORAGE UMBER OF BITS TO TRANSMIT 30000 BITS DESTROY FLAG NO RESUME FLAG NO ALLOWABLE BUSSES
2. TRANSFER DEVICE NAME OFFICE LINK LISION EPISODES 6 LIDED TRANSFERS 14 AVG TO RESOLVE 2 000 MAX TO RESOLVE 5 NUM RETRY LIMIT 0 RANSFER DEVICE DEFERRALS 49 AVG DEFERRAL DELAY 102 754 MAX DEFERRAL DELAY 242 800 STD DEV DEFERRAL DELAY 74 848 AVG DEFERRAL QUEUE 101 AX QUEUE SIZE 2 000 TD DEV QUEUE SIZE 336 LTIPLE COLLISIONS 2 AVG MULT COLLISIONS 3 000 AX MULT COLLISIONS 3 NTERRUPTED TRANSFERS 0 AVG INTERRUPT TIME 0 AX INTERRUPT TIME 0 D DEV INTERRUPT TIME 0 CCESSFUL TRANSFERS 160 AVG USAGE TIME 155 925 AX USAGE TIME 244 800 IN USAGE TIME 64 800 STD DEV USAGE TIME 89 993 ST TRANSFERS RANSMIT ERRORS 0 UEUE FLAG 0 UFFER OVERFLOW 0 HROUGHPUT DATA BITS PER SECOND 48360000 000 TRANSFERS SECOND 3200 000 ER CENT UTILIZATION 49 903 Collision Transfer Device Utilization Report 235 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Number of Successful Transfers The number of completed data transfer requests on this Transfer Device An interrupted transfer is not considered successful Average Minimum Maximum Standard Deviation Usage Time Statistics on the amount of time PEs used this TD from acquisition to release Usage time does not include the delay time encountered waiting for this TD Transmission Error Queue Flag Buffer Overflow Lost Transfers These statistics show the number of times that a transferred message or block wa
3. SEMAPHORE NAME OFFICE 1 TIMER OFFICE 2 TIMER OFFICE 3 TIMER NO TIMES SET 32 23 26 NO TIMES RESET 31 22 26 ms TIME SET 39 634 38 214 34 597 NUMBER RESPONSES 31 22 26 AVG RESPONSE TIME 1228 607 1911 001 1085 736 MAX RESPONSE TIME 6213 435 9319 518 6164 683 MIN RESPONSE TIME 309 850 309 850 309 850 STD DEV TIME 1684 114 2682 645 1492 061 MAXIMUM COUNT 5 5 4 AVG COUNT 798 865 565 MIN COUNT 0 0 0 Semaphore Report Minimum Maximum A verage Standard Deviation Response Time Statistics on the semaphore response times If the Inhibit Response Time Flag for this Semaphore is set to YES the response time statistics are not collected Maximum A verage Minimum Count These statistics monitor the semaphore count during the simulation as it is modified by Semaphore Instructions 5 6 10 Message Statistics Each column in a Message Report contains the following information Message Name Text up to 40 characters Name of Receiving PE Text up to 40 characters If an identical message is sent to different PEs separate statistics and columns appear for each receiving PE 243 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Number Queued The total of all messages with this name that have entered the received message list of the receiving PE STATISTICS 50 MILLISECONDS ED IN MICROSECONDS ESSAGE NAME E REQUEST OF
4. N STORAGE REQUESTS E F E REQUESTS QUESTS INTERRUPTED AVG FILE DELAY AX FILE DE STD DEV DELAY WH ACCESSES INTERRUPTED AVG a ERRUP IME MAX ERRUP IME STD a TIME COMPLETED ACCESSES AVG USAGE IME MAX USAGE IME STD DEV TIME AVG BITS USED AX BITS STD DEV USED a PER CENT LIZATION ORAGE REQUESTS GRANT RADAR DISH 20 20 20 1500 00 1500 00 60000 00 60000 3 00 0 0 0 0 69 1672 529 368 63 265 OGOOGO O GOOG 5028 11528 4261 850 468 783 72041 84000 6938 194 917 34 233 24 al OOO 298 Simulation Report File continued Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation AAA AAA A pes NETWORK 11 5 RELEASE 11 09 04 01 1996 14 35 41 PAGE 6 A SAMPLE PROBLEM FOR NETWORK II 5 COMPLETED MODULE STATISTICS FROM 0 TO 1 SECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS eee NAME CHECK MESSAG
5. x SOFTWARE TYPE MODULE NAME GATEWAY RETRANSMIT RIORITY 0 NTERRUPTIBILITY FLAG NO ONCURRENT LIMIT 32000 LOWED PROCESSORS G1 GATEWAY G2 GATEWAY G3 GATEWAY REQUIRED MESSAGES Gl gt QH g INSTRUCTION LIST EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 RETRANSMIT ANYTHING A Partial Listing of an Echo PE List and Gateway Model The Echo Processor List feature is useful when modeling devices like gateways Presume that you model a gateway between 3 TDs by using 3 PEs Each PE is dedicated to serve 50 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 as the output buffer for a single TD If a PE serving as an output buffer forwards a message it obviously wants that message if ECHOed to return back through the correct output buffer Since that output buffer is a different PE than the forwarding PE an EPL is required A sample gateway model using the EPL follows In the above example any message arriving from the Ethernet which is forwarded by any message instruction which references GATEWAY CLUSTER LIST will be returned via Gl GATEWAY if returned through the use of the ECHO feature Otherwise the message would be returned via the forwarding PE which would make dedicating a PE as an output buffer impossible 2 2 6 LANs The LAN building block is used to quickly specify common L
6. NAME FFT IME 365 CYCLES NAME SELF TEST IME 17 CYCLES INSTRUCTION TYPE SEMAPHORE NAME SET TIME THE DATA STRING SEMAPHORE TIME THE DATA STRING SET RESET FLAG SET ODIFY COUNT NO NAME RESET TIME THE DATA STRING SEMAPHORE TIME THE DATA STRING SET RESET FLAG RESET ODIFY COUNT NO TRANSFER DEVICES HARDWARE TYPE DATA TRANSFER NAME BUS 1 DRAW TYPE BUS NAME MSG LOCATION 1 000 9 500 62 000 9 500 STYLE WIDTH 0 60 1 60 SEGMENTS 2 10 000 10 000 58 000 10 000 PROTOCOL FIRST COME FIRST SERVED CYCLE TIME 13 MIC BITS PER CYCLE 1 CYCLES PER WORD 8 WORDS PER BLOCK 1 SEPARATE BLOCKS NO WORD OVERHEAD TIME 0 MIC BLOCK OVERHEAD TIME 0 MIC BLOCK RETRY TIME 0 MIC SCALE ERROR PROBABILITY NO BUS CONNECTIONS PE 2 SEGMENTS 16 252 10 000 16 252 17 495 0 EM 1 SEGMENTS 46 650 10 000 46 650 5 164 0 PE 1 SEGMENTS 12 147 10 000 12 147 5 209 0 NAME BUS 2 DRAW TYPE BUS NAME MSG LOCATION 1 000 11 500 62 000 11 500 STYLE WIDTH 4 60 4 60 SEGMENTS 2 10 000 12 000 58 000 12 000 PROTOCOL FIRST COME FIRST SERVED CYCLE TIME 1 MIC BITS PER CYCLE 8 CYCLES PER WORD 1 WORDS PER BLOCK 256 SEPARATE BLOCKS NO WORD OVERHEAD TIME 0 MIC BLOCK OVERHEAD TIME 15 MIC BLOCK RETRY TIME 0 MIC SCALE ERROR PROBABILITY NO 310 The N
7. 16 000 IMIT DELAY 1 00E 006 OFFSET O TREAM 11 FTWARE TYPE S OFFICE 1 TIMER BIT RESPONSE NO UM PENDING RESPONSES 999 EMAP HE O 2 zj zZ DZ HX DE RESET FLAG RESET F 0 OFFICE T BIT RESPO UM PENDI RESPONSES 999 ESET FLAG RESET QUN O E OFFICE HIBIT RESPO AXIMUM PENDI T RESET FLAG QUU O RESPONSES 999 ESET ll Ps RE TYPE PROCESSING OFFICE 1 IC CYCLE TIME 1 000 UT CONTROLLER YES RUPT OVERHE SLICE NR O SETUP TIME NR S UCTION RE INSTRUCTION NAME NO OP KU U E ll FU W O Q ESSING INSTRUCTION TYPE NAME SEND REQUEST 0 ESSAGE zi ll 3 0 FLAG NO AGE OFFICE 1 REQUEST I HUC ATION PROCESSOR CENTRAL OFFICE FLAG YE ES Hj Oc Oo gt w Ww 4 n v INST EMAPHORE APHORE 1 TIMER POUZwE AE j W KAGUN C Q 4 H O lt U Il j N n D U T O PS ll O Hj H H uv ba H S Ps E wn Ea J j E D Q un H O Ps ES zZ w K ys EMAPHOR
8. E Zz gt HEHEHHE NAME NAVIGATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT E 43 CYCLES NAME TACTICAL OPERATIONS IME 51 CYCLES AME TEST MESSAGE BUFFER IME 6 CYCLES NAME DISPLAY MESSAGE E 87 CYCLES The Network Description File continued H 308 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation NAME SELF TEST TIME 38 CYCLES INSTRUCTION TYPE SEMAPHORE NAME SET TIME THE FLIGHT STRING E HE FLIGHT STRING ET THE FLIGHT STRING SEMAPHORE TIME THE FLIGHT STRING RESET NAME SET TIME THE MSG BUFFER STRING THE MSG BUFFER STRING SET RESET FLAG SET ODIFY COUNT NAME RESET TIME THE MSG BUFFER STRING SEMAPHORE TIME THE MSG BUFFER STRING SET RESET FLAG RESET ODIFY COUNT NO NAME PE 2 LOCATION 14 945 BOT STYLE COLOR 1 4 1 00 0 1 4 00 2 30 2 00 ICON pc icn BASIC CYCL TIME 2 MIC INPUT CONTROLLER YES QUEUE FLAG YES INSTRUCTION REPERTOIRE INSTRUCTION TYPE READ NAME GET DATA ORAGE DEVICE TO ACCESS MEM 1 I
9. i ara MICS Eas a lin Pe Ceci hz T Separain Macks E ee Pawe ooo W Inciada in Mit Fia wots Pe ik ooo E atta Det bel ii HIE Shack NM werhaed in NIE Yanaed a Dsesrechas Lol Ras Eep Lalm a Defining Transfer Device Attributes 278 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation The first Transfer Device in the example model is named BUS 1 To change the name of the new TD default name TD 1 click directly on the text box labeled Name and enter BUS 1 Once you OK the form the TD will have its name changed and any other references to the name TD 1 in the model will also be changed Change the names of the two other TDs to the names used in the example model in the same way The default protocol for a TD is First Come First Served but you may change a TD s protocol by selecting the Protocol button on the TD Form The Three TDs in the example model are First Come First Served If the protocol of a TD is changed additional protocol attributes for some protocols can be accessed by selecting the Protocol Specific Attributes button of the Transfer Device Form When a TD is created from the palette it will be given several default values for its attributes including Cycle Time of 0 Bits Per Cycle of 1 Cycles Per Word of 1 Words Per Block of 1 and Block and Word Overhead Times of 0 These values are used to calculate the amount of time required to transfer bits on a particular TD A Cycle Time of zero will produ
10. ESS ED El hb OOOO O STATISTICS SECO REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS STRING COMPLETE OO OOO 14 35 41 ETWORK II 5 DS PAG STRING COMPL Oooooo0 11 ETE 304 Simulation Report File continued Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation AAA AAA A CACI NETWORK II 5 RELEASE 11 09 04 01 1996 14 35 41 PAGE 12 T A SAMPLE PROBL FOR NETWORK II 5 RECEIVED MESSAGE REPORT FRO 0 TO 1 SECONDS LOST BY QUEUED O FLAG OVRFLOW MESSAGE NAME SENDING PE les 1 20 0 0 RADAR DATA PROCESSED PE 2 28 0 0 STRING COMPLETE PE 1 lA 2 20 0 0 RADAR DATA AVAILABLE PE 1 20 0 0 STRING COMPLETE PE 2 CACI NETWORK II 5 RELEASE 11 09 04 01 1996 14 35 41 PAGE 13 A SAMPLE PROBLEM FOR NETWORK II 5 MESSAGE DELIVERY REPORT FRO 0 TO 1 SECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS besa AME RADAR DATA STRING COMPLETE STRING COMPLETE AVAILABLE dotada PE PE 1 PE 2 PE 1 pee ATION PE PE 2 PE 2 PE 1 NUMBER SENT 20 20 28 AVG D
11. _NETLOR NET14 The Echo PE List Form Echo PE List The Echo PE List Form consists of a single list box with control buttons to its right An Echo PE List is essentially a list of linked PE and TD LAN names The Add button will let you enter a new PE name in the Echo PE List The TD Name button will permit you to attach a TD LAN name to a PE name in the list Use the Cut and Move buttons to remove list entries or change their positions 155 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 3 5 10 Destination Mix Form Stream The stream is an integer value that must be in the range from 1 to 999 If you leave the stream in the NR state it will be selected by the simulation program The stream is used to control the random sequence in which destinations are chosen NETWORK II 5 vi Destination Mix Name DMIX STA NET1 Stream NR Veni Destination List Name Percent 1_STA NET1 20 52_STA NET1 30 53_STA NET1 50 East Move Pescent The Destination Mix Form Destination List The Add button is used to add destinations to a Destination Mix Valid destinations include Processing Elements other Destination Mixes Routes Global Message List Next and Self The Cut and Move buttons may be used to cut or move entries in the list The destination s percentage of selection can be set by highlighting the destination name in the list and selecting the Percent button The Destination List list box will display a
12. MO file RADAR DATA is ID and contains 16000 bits file CO DATA is IDLE and contains 8000 bits module CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER 9 instruction GET MESSAGE BUFFER iteration 1 of 1 start time 999634714 SEC host pe PE 1 A SAMPLE PROBLEM FOR NETWORK II 5 PAG Simulation Report File continued 306 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation WIRE AO O A SAMPLE PROBLEM FOR NETWORK II 5 Run for 1 second reset statistics at 1 second X X X NETWORK II 5 RELEASE 11 10 FILE SAVED 04 01 1996 14 23 45 X GLOBAL FLAGS GRAPH1 BUS 1 GRAPH2 PE 1 GRAPH3 PE 2 RUNTIME WARNINGS ANIMATION 3 0 1 GLOBAL FLAGS TEXT SCALE FACTOR 10 24 01111111 1 00 0 2 50 2 50 0 DIAGRAM BOUNDARIES 11 429 95 238 28 250 3 750 WINDOW 11 429 397 835 119 029 3 750 0 0 ANTITHETIC VARIATE NO RANDOMIZER 0 BATCH NO INPUT LISTING NO DEFAULT LISTING YES ENGTH 1 000000 SEC FINAL REPORTS ALL PLOT DATA FILE YES 1 1 1 115 9 1 BOTH l 500 0 0 1 STATISTICAL DISTRIBUTION FUNCTIONS STATISTICAL DISTRIBUTIONS
13. SEMAPHORE STATISTICS FROM 0 TO 1 SECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS SEMAPHORE NAME TIME THE FLIGHT TIME THE MSG TIME THE DATA STRING BUFFER STRING STRING NO TIMES SE NO TIMES RESET 20 8 20 PERCENT TIME SET 40 448 2 840 33 838 NUMBER RESPONSES 20 8 20 AVG RESPONS IME 20223 799 3504 202 16919 070 AX RESPONS IM 21245 338 11623 920 17969 833 IN RESPONSE TIME 16942 748 625 250 13258 040 STD DEV TIME 896 583 3761 010 889 337 MAXIMUM COUNT 0 0 0 AVG COUNT 0 0 0 MIN COUNT 0 0 0 OOO Simulation Report File continued 303 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual CACI NETWORK 11 5 MESSAGE NAME RECEIVING PE NUMBER QUEUED NUMBER USED AVG QUEUE IME EUE IME MIN QUEUE IME STD DEV TIME MESSAGE NAME RECEIVING PE NUMBER QUEUED NUMBER MAX QU MIN QU USED EUE TIME EUE TIME EUE TIME STD DEV TIME R EL EASE AS ALL 11 09 04 01 1996 AMP LE PROBLEM FOR N M FROM ESSAGE 0 TO il TIMES RADAR DATA ABLE AVAI El N OOO OO RADAR DATA PROC
14. BUS 3 NAME GET MESSAGE BUFFER TORAGE DEVICE TO ACCESS MEM 1 FILE ACCESSED GENERAL STORAG UMBER OF BITS TO TRANSMIT n F BITS E DESTROY FLAG NO RESUME FLAG NO ALLOWABLE BUSSES BUS 1 INSTRUCTION TYPE WRITE NAME STORE RADAR DATA STORAGE DEVICE TO ACCESS MEM 1 FILE ACCESSED RADAR DATA NUMBER OF BITS TO TRANSMIT 800 BITS REPLACE FLAG NO RESUME FLAG NO ALLOWABLE BUSSES BUS 3 INSTRUCTION TYPE MESSAGE NAME RADAR DATA AVAILABLE ESSAGE RADAR DATA AVAILABLE ENGTH 41 BITS GI N ESTINATION PROCESSOR Pl UEUE FLAG NO ESUME FLAG NO ONTINUE ESSAGE NO HIBI ESSAGE TO SELF NO BUSSES PHQHYOU 4 O gt w NAME STRING COMPLETE ENGTH O BITS DESTINATION PROCESSOR PE 1 QUEUE FLAG NO RESUME FLAG NO CONTINUE ESSAGE NO INHIBIT MESSAGE TO SELF NO INSTRUCTION TYPE PROCESSING NA FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT E 132 CYCLES CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER E 22 CYCLES RADAR PROCESSING 280 CYCLES
15. DATE FORMAT When set to US dates are printed in the Month Day Year format When set to a value other than US such as UK dates are given in the Day Month Year format The default date format is US ALPHA ORDER The ALPHA ORDER parameter determines if most of the lists presented in NETWORK and NETWORK will be displayed in alphabetical order ALPHA ORDER YES or if items in a list appear in the order that they are found ALPHA ORDER NO FORM PATH The FORM PATH parameter tells NETWORK II 5 programs where to look for internal form and graph files By default NETWORK II 5 forms and graphs are stored in the same directory as the executables ICON PATH The ICON PATH parameter tells NETWORK II 5 programs where to look for internal icon files Normally NETWORK II 5 icons are stored in the directory which contains the NETWORK II 5 executables USER DIRECTORY The USER DIRECTORY parameter tells NETWORK II 5 programs where to look for Network Description Files NET and where to write simulation output Simulation Plot Files PIN Simulation Report Files LIS For the OS 2 and Windows platforms the default value for the USER DIRECTORY is USER The default value for the UNIX platform is the null string LIBRARY DIRECTORY The LIBRARY DIRECTORY parameter tells NETWORK where to look for the library files PE LIB TD LIB SD LIB and MODULE LIB These files store libraries of user defined components The default value for the
16. Modules leave the queue when they are scheduled to execute by the PE Percent Utilization The percentage of time from the start of the simulation or reset time to the time of the report that the PE was not idle This includes the time a PE spent waiting for a resource Storage Device Transfer Device etc as well as the time it spent executing Modules 227 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual PROCESSING E E EMENT UTILIZATION STATISTICS FROM 0 TO 50 MILLISECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS PROCESSING ELEMENT NAME OFFICE 1 OFFIC STORAGE REQUESTS GRANTED 0 0 REQUESTS INTERRUPTED 0 0 AVG WAIT TIME 0 0 AX WAIT TIME 0 0 STD DEV TIM 0 0 GEN STORAGE REQUESTS 0 FILE REQUESTS GRANTED 0 REQUESTS INTERRUPTED 0 AVG WAIT TIME 0 AX WAIT TIME 0 STD DEV TIME 0 TRANSFER REQUESTS GRANTED 33 26 REQUESTS INTERRUPTED 0 0 AVG WAIT TIME T2162 48 AX WAIT TIME 314 505 316 STD DEV TIME 105 637 89 INPUT CONTROLLER REQUEST 32 2 DEST PE REQUESTS GRANTED 0 AVG WAIT TIME 0 AX WAIT TIME 0 STD DEV TIME 0 RESTARTED INTERRUPTS 0 0 AVG INTERRUPT TIME 0 0 AX INT
17. 323 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual In order to prevent endlessly circulating messages a message may only be echoed once This warning can be prevented by sending a new message with an explicit destination instead of using the reserved word ECHO to return a reply 18 Invalid use of Wild Card in Message Instruction Text WARNING At 240550000 SEC module RETRANSMIT called instruction RETRANSMIT ANYTHING which uses a message wild card of MESSAGE on pe GATEWAY No message matching this wild card started this module Instruction cancelled The use of a wild card in a Message Instruction s message text field allows a Message Instruction to retransmit an incoming message When a Module is executing a Message Instruction with a wild card message text a match must exist between the host PE s received message list and the Message Instruction s message text If there is no match a runtime warning is generated The Message Instruction will be cancelled 19 Message Block Retry Zero Microseconds WARNING At 7 623180 SEC module TRANSFER DATA called instruction SEND MESSAGE BLOCKS which sent a block in 0 mic and selected a block retry time of 0 mic Instruction in an infinite loop so instruction cancelled This error occurs after an attempt to add a message block to a PE s message list has failed and the TD s Block Retry Time is equal to zero If the instruction was not cancel
18. If the Message Text is a wild card the message text is determined by the following two cases In the first case a Message Text of 1 e an unqualified wild card will retransmit the text of the original message The original message is the message that satisfied the initial Message Requirement of the Module executing this Message Instruction or the predecessor to this Module For example consider a Module with this Message Status Requirement list PACKET ONE PACKET TWO PACKET THREE The original message is PACKET ONE since it is first in the list If a Module with the above Message Status Requirements list does not execute the Message Instruction but chains to that Module which does the original message remains the same because it is inherited by successor Modules A Module will also inherit all of the messages that match the Message Status Requirements list of its predecessors If you do not want a Module to pass inherited messages to successor Modules you may set the Inhibit Message Inheritance flag of the successor Module to NO In the second case of a wild card used for the Message Text the wild card will contain some text along with one or two asterisks The Message Text will be selected by matching the wild card to the inherited message set of the Module that is executing the 23 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Message Instruction The first name in this list to match the wild card will be used Me
19. NETWORK II 5 User s Manual S Set R Reset INT or I Integer a number Semaphore Count File Status Requirements A file name appears before the colon O On N Not On Hardware Status Requirements Hardware data structure name appears before the colon IDL Idle BSY Busy COL or COLLIS Collision OVR or OVRELW Overflow Module Outputs M Message the name of the message sent by the Module F File the name of the file written to by the Module A Module may affect the status and count of a Semaphore Thus a letter or symbol or both may appear before a Semaphore name e g S S Set increment Semaphore count R Reset decrement Semaphore count T Toggle set Semaphore count 116 Notepad N25 DGM File Edit Search Help IP KEKEE IE IE IE IE IE IE IEEE FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT FICTICIO TE IE IE TE IE IE IE IE IE IET l A l ANDED PREDECESSOR u BICI III IE IE IE IE IE IEEE RADAR PROCESSING BICI III II IE IE IEEE IE A l l AF RADAR DATA Chapter 3 NETWORK 56666 MIC PE 1 SET TIME THE FLIGHT STRING FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT S TIME THE FLIGHT STRING GET RADAR DATA RADAR PROCESSING STORE RADAR DATA RADAR DATA AVAILABLE H RADAR DATA AVAILABLE A Sample Module Diagram 117 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Analysis Start Simulation To run a simulation from NETWORK
20. Simulation Report File continued ie NETWORK II 5 RELEASE 11 09 04 01 1996 14 35 41 PAGE 2 A SAMPLE PROBLEM FOR NETWORK II 5 COMPLETED INSTRUCTION REPORT FROM 0 TO 1 SECONDS INSTRUCTION NAME COUNT INSTRUCTION NAME COUNT les 1 GET RADAR DATA 20 GET MESSAGE BUFFER 8 STORE RADAR DATA 20 RADAR DATA AVAILABLI 20 STRING COMPLETE 28 FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT 20 CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER 8 RADAR PROCESSING 20 AVIGATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT 20 TACTICAL OPERATIONS 20 TEST MESSAGE BUFFER O DISPLAY MESSAGE 1 SELF TEST 28 SE IME THE FLIGHT STRING 20 RESE IME THE FLIGHT STRING 20 SE IME THE MSG BUFFER STRING 9 RESE IME THE MSG BUFFER STRING 8 PE 2 GET DATA 20 REPLACE DATA 20 STRING COMPLETE 20 RADAR DATA PROCESSED 20 FFT 20 SELF TES 20 SET TIME THE DATA STRING 20 RESET TIME THE DATA STRING 20 NETWORK II 5 RELEASE 11 09 04 01 1996 14 35 41 PAGE 3 A SAMPLE PROBLEM FOR NETWORK II 5 GLOBAL TD QUEUE STATISTICS FROM 0 TO 1 SECONDS pe QUEUE SIZE 1 AVG QUEUE SIZE Dr STD DEV QUEUE SIZE 0 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation Weds pM at cones AM a oes a es cl ie NETW
21. simulation Plot File file type PIN The simulation Plot File is a binary file which is used by NETWORKS plotting and animation features The Plot Start Time and Plot Stop Time may be entered in the dialog box that appears after clicking on Set Plot Times The Plot Start Time must be greater than or equal to zero and less than the simulation Run Length The Plot Stop Time must be greater than the Plot Start Time and less than or equal to the simulation Run Length Final Reports The reports included in the final report at the end of the simulation may be selected by editing the Final Reports List To access this list click on the Select Final button in the on the Advanced form By default all of the available reports will be printed Processing Instruction Transfer Device Storage Device Module Semaphore Message Statistics Received Message Message Delivery and Snapshot The order that reports appear in this list is the order that they will be put in the simulation Report File This allows you to both choose which reports are presented and the order in which they are presented 4 2 3 Run Parameters Buttons Save The Save command saves the simulation run parameters in the Network Description File file type NET The next time you load the saved file into NETWORK these parameters will be used to initialize the NETWORK Run Parameters Form Because NETWORK performs a Save every time that you Run a simulation it is generally not
22. A A STRUCTION LIST EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 ANDED SUCCESSORS CHAIN TO FFT NAME MSG NOT AVAILABLE PRIORITY INTERRUPTIBILITY FLAG NO CONCURRENT LIMIT INSTRUCTION LIST EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 STRING COMPLETE F TIME THE DATA STRING DATA Qn t D ANDED PREDECESSOR LIST CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER NAME NAVIGATION SYSTEM MANAGEMEN PRIORITY 0 INTERRUPTIBILITY FLAG NO CONCURRENT LIMIT 1 REQUIRED MESSAGE STATUS WAIT FOR RADAR DATA PROCESSED STRUCTION LIST EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 NAVIGATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT ANDED PREDECESSOR LIST RADAR PROCESSING ANDED SUCCESSORS CHAIN TO TACTICAL OPERATIONS NAME RADAR PROCESSING en PRIORITY 0 INTERRUPTIBILITY FLAG NO CONCURRENT LIMIT 1 INSTRUCTION LIST EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 GET RADAR DATA EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 RADAR PROCESSING EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 STORE RADAR DATA EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 RADAR DATA AVAILABLE ANDED PREDECESSOR LIST FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT ANDED SUCCESSORS E HAIN TO NAVIGATION SYSTEM MANA
23. A Module will take its required messages 1f any before entering the Delay state and will not re check its preconditions When a Module s Delay has expired it then requests a host PE When a Module does not have a Delay specified 1t requests a host PE immediately after its preconditions are met To execute a Module must acquire a host PE For Modules with a predecessor the host PE will always be the host PE used by the predecessor Module This is why Modules with predecessors may not have an Allowed Processor List or Resident Processor List For Modules without a predecessor the host PE will be selected from the PEs available from among those in the Module s Allowed Resident Processor List Every Module which does not have a predecessor must have an Allowed Resident Processor List defined In the most common case the list contains a single name If an Allowed Processor List is specified the first available PE in the list is used If a Resident Processor List is specified one copy of the Module will automatically be created for each PE in the list at the start of simulation This allows you to define one Module and populate multiple PEs with independently running copies of that Module A Module queues up for a host PE only after all of its preconditions are met Every Module has a priority and an Interruptibility Flag The priority determines when it will execute relative to other Modules contending for the same Processing Element A M
24. Define a Plot List Plot All A plot will be developed for every Processing Element Transfer Device Storage Device Semaphore Module and message found in the simulation 260 Chapter 7 Plotting Simulation Results Specific Names You may pick specific items to be plotted by clicking the Plot Specific Names radio button To add a name to the list click on one of the Add buttons beside the name list After selecting an Add button a list of all items of that particular class will be displayed Click on the name of an item and click on OK to add the name to the Plot Names list Names in the plot list may be cut or moved Moving the name in the plot list will alter the order in which the graphs are displayed To edit the plot list select a name in the list and select the desired option from the buttons on the side of the list When the Plot Specific Names option is chosen the contents of the plot list may be loaded and saved in the Plot Names File file type PRO To load a Plot Names File click on the Plot List Form s LOAD NAMES button select a filename from the Load Form and click on OK Only files with a PRO extension may be loaded The names contained in the Plot Names File will be displayed in the plot list To save the contents of the plot list in a Plot Names File click on the Plot List form s SAVE NAMES button Enter the filename in the Save Form and click on OK Plot by Class All members of a specific class
25. E R E R Cc R 0846 60 WstDig8A1707 0000442DCF7 C Service queue 000200A7 R iC R E R Cc R E R A170 DCF7 A170 DCF7 Service queue 000200A7 Bindery error Service queue 000000CF Bindery error Service queue 000400E5 Bindery error Service queue 00010015 Bindery error 0009 06 0000442DCF7D WstDig8A170 0320 60 WstDig8A1707 0000442DCF7 0009 06 0000442DCF7D WstDig8A170 0320 60 WstDig8A1707 0000442DCF7 0009 06 0000442DCF7D WstDig8A170 0321 60 WstDig8A1707 0000442DCF7 0009 06 0000442DCF7D WstDig8A1707 ae Sa 64 WstDig8A1707 WstDigCECD1B 0012 630 WstDigCECD1B WstDig8A1707 Figure 10 12 Example LAN Traffic File PRN Bindery error Service queue 000000CF Bindery error Service queue 000400E5 Bindery error Service queue 00010015 j Bindery error F D21A Read 576 at 371136 OK 576 bytes read 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 11 12 13 14 ES 16 17 18 OG O Q 7 0040 Oo Oo OS 0 01 10 3 2 Traffic Format File PRO and TRAFLINK Layout Form This file contains the position length of all name and time fields in a capture Traffic File It may be loaded and saved from TRAFLINK s Traffic Form 345 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual gt TRAFLINK lll Traffic File Layout Start Length Ignore Lines Containing Destination o o Source o o Message COS jo fo Time jo jo Size o Hold Call o Delta Time Ov
26. ENDIF ENDIF PUTED DELAY is the value to be used as the DI F A B C returns a random integer value ween A and B C is the random number stream TO PE COLLISION COUNT COLLISION COUNT GT RETRY LIMIT the maximum number of retries PE COLLISION COUNT 0 COMPUTED DELAY LIMIT DELAY COMPUTED DELAY SLOT TIME RANDI F 0 2 MIN F 10 PE COLLISION COUNT ST STREAM OFFSET 37 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 2 2 2 6 Priority Protocol A Priority Transfer Device is allocated in the same way as in the FCFS protocol with the exception that the request queue is ordered by PE priority not by time of request The PE priority is assigned by the Key associated with its the PE name in the Transfer Device Connection List Because the priority definition is local to a particular Transfer Device a PE can have a different priority on each Transfer Device The Priority Protocol uses priority to resolve contention not to provide for interruption Therefore if a higher priority request is received while a lower priority PE was using the Transfer Device that new request would be served as soon as the lower priority PE completed its transfer As with the FCFS protocol if the Module executing on the PE which has the Transfer Device is interrupted the Transfer Device is released and updates its statistics reporting an interrupted tr
27. Move IX Include in Plot File linea lololalalmis lem lt EE The Processing Element Form Quantity The PE quantity determines if there is a single PE PE quantity is 1 or a group of identical PEs PE quantity is greater than 1 The PE quantity can be any integer value from 1 to 999 121 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Cycle Time The Cycle Time must be a real number greater than or equal to zero Time Slice The Time Slice may be a real number or may be chosen from a SDF To use a SDF either enter the name of a SDF in the text box or click on the double dots button next to the text box 122 Chapter 3 NETWORK Interrupt Overhead The Interrupt Overhead may be a real number or may be chosen from a SDF To use a SDF either enter the name of a SDF in the text box or click on the double dots button next to the text box T O Setup Time The I O Setup Time may be a real number or may be chosen from a SDF To use a SDF either enter the name of a SDF in the text box or click on the double dots button next to the text box Message List Size The Message List Size must be a real number or NR No Response If Message List Size NR it has an infinite capacity Queue Flag A PE s Queue Flag is set to YES when the check box is selected Lose Overflow Messages A PE s Lose Overflow Messages flag is set to YES when the check box is selected Keep Blocks Separate A PE s Keep Blocks Separate flag is set to YES whe
28. RADAR PROCESSING KKKKKKKKK KKK KKK ANDE ESSOR v KAKKKKKKK KK KKK D PR ED EC AVIGATION SYSTI ANAGE El ENT KKKKKKK KKK KKK KK ESSOR v ANDE D PR ED EC AKKKKKKAKKKXKKAKXk TACTICAL OPERATIONS KKKKKKKAKKKXKKAKXk The navigation module chain runs exclusively on PE 1 milliseconds The navigation module chain starts by executing the FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT module which first sets a semaphore to start a Response Time calculation and then performs internal processing Note that SETing a semaphore takes zero simulated time and is done here only for report purposes Upon completion FLIGHT CONTROL 272 50 MILLISECONDS PE 1 SET TIME RING FLIGHT CONT THE FLIGHT S ROL SUPPORT THE S TIME FLIGHT STRING GET RADAR DATA RADAR PROCESSING STORE RADAR DATA RADAR DATA AVAILABLE M RA F RA DAR DATA AVAILABLE DAR DATA WE M RADAR DATA PROCE SSE NAVIGATION SYSTEM MANAGE ENT TACTICAL OPERATIONS STRING COMPLETE RESET TIME THE LIGHT STRING E M STRING COMPLETE R TIME THE FLIGHT STRING It is initiated every 50 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation SUPPORT chains to the RADAR
29. SECONDS IGNORE 1 SNIFFER NETWORK ANALYZER IGNORE 2 SUMMARY DELTA T Figure 10 14 Example Layout Profile File PRO 10 3 3 Name Map File LNK This file contains the name map of external PE names with NETWORK PE names It may be loaded and saved from TRAFLINK s Name Match Form This file is not directly modified by you TRAFLINK III RELEASE 2 00 FILE SAVED 06 30 1995 11 02 54 OFFICE TOKEN RING WstDig8A1707 S1 OFFICE PC 0000442DCF7D S2 OFFICE PC WstDigCECD1B S3 OFFICE PC Broadcast lt Local Broadcast gt WstDig343A19 S4 OFFICE PC Novel1032CA8 S5 OFFICE PC WstDigF1DB1B S6 OFFICE PC OCOOCOD69E1C S7 OFFICE PC Figure 10 15 Example Linking Process File LNK 10 3 4 External Traffic File EXT 348 Chapter 10 TRAFLINK III The External Traffic File is the trace file which NETWORK will read to add captured LAN traffic to a simulation It is the output of TRAFLINK and is the input traffic file to NETWORK IL5 This file is not modified by the user 10 4 TRAFLINK III Interface with Networking Tools The steps described in this section in utilizing existing network management tools analyzers with TRAFLINK are to be used as guidelines only Different versions of software might behave differently 10 4 1 The Network General SNIFFER The following steps of collecting historical traffic files with Network General SNIFFER was tested using release 4 49w of the Expert SNIFFER software
30. The Import Form listbox labeled Links Selected displays the TDs LAN Segments found in the data file At this stage you can filter out any TDs which you might not be interested in 10 2 1 3 Filtering LAN Traffic TRAFLINK provides various filtering options to aid you in selecting the links you are interested in importing into NETWORK Hint select only the segments of your network which are relevant for your study With large networks the number of events generated would effect the speed performance of the simulation While TRAFLINK can import a network of 1 000 links and 20 000 nodes it would be too large to study Study of a model for a Backbone might be a more practicable solution TRAFLINK III Import Topology Links Selected aai q RER _ remove Using Filter _ 134 141 55 0 __ Add Using Fiter Figure 10 2 Import Topology Form The links selected can be filtered in three different ways a Explicit Selection The TDs can be added to the list by using the Add Link option This will display all the available TDs in the data file from which you select the appropriate TD s The listbox allows multiple links to be selected using the mouse To remove TDs from the list highlight those TDs and select the Remove Link option 335 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual b Using Filters You can create an entire new list of TDs in the Links Selected listbox by selecting the New Using Filter option The filter allows you
31. Transfer Device LAN TD LAN is allocated TD LAN is deallocated TD LAN passes a token TD LAN starts a new slot Storage Device SD is allocated SD is deallocated Module Module preconditions are met Module is called as a successor 219 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Module is interrupted resumed Module is canceled Module finishes execution Module reaches its Stop Time External Traffic external traffic is assigned to a PE PE is available to send external traffic PE starts to send external traffic PE finishes transmission of external traffic A Narrative Trace Report may be requested before starting a simulation from NETWORK and TEXTWORK When requesting the report you will need to identify the Trace Start Time Trace Stop Time and the model components to be traced To send the narrative trace report to the Simulation Report File select the Trace to File option You need to exercise caution in defining the Trace Start Time and Trace Stop Time Each simulation event generates approximately two to four lines of text in the trace As a result the Simulation Report File can grow quite large due to the Narrative Trace Report At 244800000 MIL message instruction SEND REQUEST from module REQUESTING USER 1 1 sending message OFFICE 1 REQUEST 1 2400 bits to pe CENTRAL OFFICE is completing execution on pe OFFICE 1 gt 244800000 L module CENTRAL REQUEST PROCESSING 1
32. is being activated for execution H v 244800000 MIL pe CENTRAL OFFICE has received an execution request from module CENTRAL REQUEST PROCESSING 1 v 244 execute a 00 Oo gt o o o H L module CENTRAL REQUEST PROCESSING 1 can now proceed to pe CENTRAL OFFICE is now available n v N ws NS 80000 pe CENTRAL OFFICE will attempt to execute instruction PROCESS USER REQUEST from module CENTRAL REQUEST PROCESSING 1 o H gt 244800000 MIL processing instruction PROCESS USER REQUEST from module CENTRAL REQUEST PROCESSING 1 is beginning to execute on pe CENTRAL OFFICE At 245050000 MIL processing instruction PROCESS USER REQUEST from module CENTRAL REQUEST PROCESSING 1 is completing execution on pe CENTRAL OFFICE gt 245050000 MIL pe CENTRAL OFFICE is completing execution of instruction PROCESS USER REQUEST from module CENTRAL REQUEST PROCESSING 1 G A Sample Narrative Trace 220 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File The sequence of events that occur when a module has its preconditions is represented in the above trace starting with the second trace message One of those messages may require some additional explanation Modules co
33. necessary to perform a Save unless you want to set up the run parameters without actually running a simulation Save As 193 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual The Save As button allows you to save your model under a new name The current name of your file will appear in this box as the default To save to a different name click in the text box and enter a new name Close The Close command terminates this simulation session returning you to NETWORK if simulation was invoked from NETWORK Run The simulation is started by selecting the Run button All Run Parameters are checked for errors at this time and you will not be allowed to start the simulation until any errors noted are corrected 4 2 4 The Simulation Runtime Menubar You may interrupt a running simulation by clicking on the Options field of the menubar present during the simulation The pulldown offers to generate a Report to Print what currently is on the screen or to Quit The simulation pauses while you make your selection If you select Report a dialog box will open up from which you can select which report s you would like to see The simulation will remain paused until you have finished viewing the requested reports aL The Run Time Menubar 194 Chapter 4 Running a Simulation Your choice of reports is the same as you have for Periodic and Final Reports with the addition of one other report Memory Utilization The Memory Utilization Report lists those
34. select the Analysis Start Simulation command which will display the Run Parameters form Once you have set the run parameters to your satisfaction select the Run button to actually start a simulation The Run Parameters form and running simulations are described in Chapter 5 Analysis Animation Click on the Analysis Animation command to start an animation To run an animation fill in the animation parameters as described in Chapter 6 Analysis Convert The Analysis Convert command converts the Simulation Plot File PIN between binary and text format For more information see Chapter 11 in this manual Notepad CASEA LIS bd EA File Edit Search Help paci NETWORK 11 5 RELEASE 11 63 12 21 1995 11 39 49 PAGE 1 Instructor s solution to Part 2 of Case 4 PROCESSING ELEMENT UTILIZATION STATISTICS FROM 6 TO 56 MILLISECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS PROCESSING ELEMENT NAME OFFICE 4 OFFICE 2 OFFICE 3 STORAGE REQUESTS GRANTED 8 8 15 REQUESTS INTERRUPTED 8 8 15 AUG WAIT TIME a a e MAX WAIT TIME 8 9 e STD DEV TIME B 8 e GEN STORAGE REQUESTS 8 8 15 FILE REQUESTS GRANTED 8 8 8 REQUESTS INTERRUPTED 8 8 8 AUG WAIT TIME B 8 e MAX WAIT TIME a a a STD DEV TIME a a a TRANSFER REQUESTS GRANTED 33 28 29 REQUESTS INTERRUPTED 8 8 15 A Simulation Report File Analysis Plot The Analysis Plot command is used to generate graphical utilization Plots When the Analysis Plot command is selected the Plot Menu is displ
35. wW a User Defined STANDARD BACKOFF MIC BI Collision Window e ME Mi Contention Interval 96 MIC Interframe Gap O00 MIC Jam Time R OME OFFICE 3 0 CENTRAL OFFICE 0 O HUL ief lolnla a mim lam l A Protocol Specific Attributes Form 141 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual First Come First Served The First Come First Served protocol has no protocol specific attributes Collision Retry Interval The Retry Interval must be specified as a Statistical Distribution Function Either enter a SDF name in the text box or click on the double dots button to select from a list of current SDFs Collision Window Contention Interval Jam Time These parameters may be a real number or may be chosen from a SDF To use a SDF either enter the name of a SDF in the text box or click on the double dots button next to the text box Interframe Gap The interframe gap must be specified as a real number Token Ring Token Passing Time This parameter may be a real number or may be chosen from a SDF To use a SDF either enter the name of a SDF in the text box or click on the double dots button next to the text box Slotted Token Ring Slot Time Token Passing Time These parameters may be a real number or may be chosen from a SDF To use a SDF either enter the name of a SDF in the text box or click on the double dots button next to the text box TD Connection Key Values If a key linear distribution i
36. window Because TEXTWORK does not incur the overhead of SIMWORK s graphical interface a TEXTWORK simulation may run faster than a SIMWORK simulation depending on your model 4 3 1 Simulation Setup The following paragraphs describe the steps necessary to load a file into TEXTWORK and run a simulation The prompts you will encounter during a TEXTWORK run appear in the bordered sections of the text Sample replies to the prompts are presented below these prompts and are indicated by gt 4 3 2 Loading a File Entering a File Name TEXTWORK will prompt you for the name of the input file The file name may include a path e g d net user casel net If you do not specify a path in the file name TEXTWORK assumes that the file is located in the default directory The default directory is established by the N25DEV CFG file CACI NETWORK II 5 Release 11 00 r the name of the NETWORK 11 5 input data file or ABORT CASE1 NET Listing File CASI Title CASE 1A A 2 COMPUTER 1 BUS ARCHIT TEXTWORK Setup Parameters Input Listing If the Input Listing option is selected a copy of the Network Description File NET used in the simulation will be inserted in the Simulation Report File LIS This allows you to preserve the model that produced the simulation results Do you want a copy of your input file in the listing file Y N ABORT gt y EA AAA TEXTWORK loads the Mode
37. you have shifted the display down one half screen To increase the available work space enter a larger number in the Percent Of Work Area Space box You have two options of increasing the size of the work area extra space may be added to the right and bottom of the display or extra space may be added to the top and left of the display 110 Chapter 3 NETWORK 3 4 5 The Verify Menu NETYORK II 5 Edit Define Display Baia Analysis Help Destination Mix Echo PE List Gateway Instruction Mix LAN Macro Instruction Module Processing Element Route Storage Device Statistical Distribution Function Transfer Device The Verify Menu Before executing a simulation you should verify your model to ensure that the model does not contain logic errors During the process of verifying the model NETWORK displays the Verify Progress Report The first column in the report Number Checked notes how many data structures of the given type have been verified The second column in the report Errors notes how many data structures of the given type contained errors The third column in the report Warnings notes how many data structures of the given type contained warnings The last row of the report presents the cumulative totals for number of data structures checked number of data structures with errors and number of data structures with warnings The counts for SDFs and Echo PE Lists are included in the Top Level counts If err
38. 12 Message Instruction Message Length set to NR WARNING At 24 000787 SEC module DO SOMETHING called instruction DATA which uses a message length of NR on pe CONTROLLER No message started this module Instruction cancelled This error is caused by leaving a Message Instruction s length attribute in the NR No Response state and calling it from a module that did not have a message requirement or decend from a module that had a message requirement The message length must be greater than or equal to zero when executed by a Module that does not have message preconditions 13 Invalid use of ECHO for Message Destination WARNING At 14 004500 SEC module INFO REQUEST called instruction RESPONSE which tries to echo a message from pe SERVER No message started this module so ECHO is impossible Instruction cancelled 322 Chapter 9 Debugging A Message Instruction with the reserved word ECHO as it s destination must be executed from a Module that has at least one Required Message to provide the destination for echoing the message 14 Wild Card Error Invalid Broadcast Message Destination WARNING At 545 867765 SEC module DO SOMETHING called instruction SEND MSGS on pe SERVER which sends to the wild card destination USER via td OFFICE LAN No pe connected to this td matched this wild card This runtime warning was caused by a broadcast message
39. 20 20 730 000 730 000 730 000 ISTICS SECONDS ED IN MICROSECONDS Q ET DATA oo G G O GG 10995 11528 10666 238 487 468 133 780 OOOO PAG 5 REPLACE OO 0 0 0 0 00 SS 6573 7 99 9 5 1014 3 oooo DATA 83 00 13 80 E o 300 Simulation Report File continued Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation AAA ARA A l CACI NETWORK II 5 RELEASE 11 09 04 01 1996 14 35 41 PAGE 8 A SAMPLE PROBLEM FOR NETWORK II 5 COMPLETED MODULE STATISTICS FROM O TO 1 SECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS MODULE NAME FLIGHT CONTROL RADAR PROCESSING NAVIGATION SUPPORT SYSTE MANAGEMENT leia PE PE 1 PE 1 PE 1 PE XECUTIONS 20 20 20 an DUE TO CONCURRENT LIMIT 0 0 0 RUN UNTIL SEMAPHORES 0 0 0 ir PRECONDITION TIME 20 20 20 AVG PRECONDITION IME 0 0 16919 070 MAX PRECONDITION IME 0 0 17969 833 MIN PRECONDITION IME 0 0 13258 040 STD DEV TIME 0 0 889 337 eo EXECUTION TIME 132 000 3078 729 43 000 AX EXECUTION TIME 132 000 3476 118 43 000 IN EXECUTION TIME 132 000 2576 977 43 000 STD DEV TIME 0 336 604 0 RESTARTED INTERRU
40. ARC LV_ARC in file FILE_ NAME These two errors are related to your NETWORK II 5 model file The model file is either corrupt or did not save properly Try saving your model again preferably in a different file and restart TRAFLINK e ERROR TEXT_VALUE cannot be used as a name in PROGRAM_NAME This word is reserved for system use Text name used TEXT_VALUE within you model is a reserved word Change the offending text variable Reserved words within TRAFLINK include ECHO NEXT GLOBAL MESSAGE LIST ANY ALL GENERAL STORAGE e Your input file PRN does not have an integer in the size field on line LINE_NUM Unable to finish traffic file A non integer size value on line LINE_NUM was found in the data file where an integer size value was expected A blank field a real number or a text field will 351 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual also fail this test Check the Traffic Layout profile PRO and make sure the columns are defined correctly e Your input file PRN has a negative size value on line LINE_NUM Size must be positive Unable to finish traffic file A negative size value in on line LINE_NUM was found in the data file Negative values are not allowed within TRAFLINK You should never get this error message e Your input file EXT has a size value that with overhead exceeds 1E 38 bits on line LINE_NUM Size will be reduced to 1E 38 This is just a warning message stating that the message s
41. Aloha TD do not check the TD status and never defer Average Maximum Standard Deviation Deferral Delay Statistics on the time spent by a PE deferring for a TD The statistics do not include delays from the Contention Interval Average Maximum Standard Deviation Deferral Queue Statistics on the number of Processing Elements in the deferral queue of this Transfer Device Multiple Collisions The total number of times that a collision episode included more than two PEs Average Maximum Multiple Collisions Statistics on the number of PEs involved in multiple collisions Number of Interrupted Transfers The number of times a Module was interrupted while using this Transfer Device Average Maximum Standard Deviation Interrupt Time Statistics on the amount of TD time consumed by interrupted message or data transfers If a Module that has acquired a Transfer Device is interrupted while sending a message or data these statistics reflect the time from when the Module PE acquired the Transfer Device to when the interruption occurred 234 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File TRANSFER DEVICE UTILIZATION STATISTICS FRO 0 TO 50 MILLISECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS
42. An Instruction Mix is a list of names of instructions Instruction Mixes and Macro Instructions with a percentage associated with each The percentages must sum to 100 Each time an Instruction Mix is referenced a new probability is randomly selected from a uniform distribution The corresponding instruction from the mix is then selected and executed The name of the Instruction Mix appears in a Module s Instruction List exactly like the name of an instruction NETWORK determines whether a name in an Instruction List specifies an actual instruction or an Instruction Mix at run time Should a PE have an instruction of the same name as an Instruction Mix the Instruction Mix will be executed An example of an Instruction Mix is NAME MIX 1 INSTRUCTIONS ARE 0 PROCESSING INSTRUCTION INSTRUCTIONS ARE 10 000 MESSAGE INSTRUCTION INSTRUCTIONS ARE 0 STREAM 22 The stream parameter is the number 1 through 999 of the random number stream to be used by the uniform distribution to pick the successor probability In the absence of any user specification unique streams will be automatically assigned to each Instruction Mix assuring statistical independence Further details on the use of random number streams are given in Section 2 3 8 Statistical Distributions Instruction Mixes are recursive Therefore the name of an Instruction Mix can be included as an instruction in an Instruction Mix exactly a
43. Cycle Time 1 000 MIC Time Slice CES MIC oo KK Pun PP Name PROCESS_INST R Time PROCESSING_DISTRIBUTION Cycles A PROCESS_INST S X Include in Plot File loldi la lmla limi ul The Processing Instruction Form Time The processing time may be a real number or chosen from a Statistical Distribution Function To use a SDF either enter the name of a SDF in the text box or click on the double dots button next to the text box for a list of SDFs 3 5 2 1 3 Read Instruction Form 129 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 hd Ed Processing Element ame PE 1 Quantity fi Read Instruction Name GET RADAR DATA SD to Access RADAR DISH ES File to Access GENERAL STORAGE ES File Count NR Ea Bits to Read 30000 a Allowed TD LAN C Erase File BUS 3 C Decrement File Do Not Modify File Resume Flag old laa as tom e tam S DISPLAY MESSAGE SELF TEST The Read Instruction Form SD to Access The Storage Device name may be up to 40 characters long To change the SD name either enter a name in the text box or click on the double dots button next to the text box to choose from the list of current SD names If the name of a nonexistent SD is entered a new one will be created when you OK the form File to Access The file name may be up to 40 characters long To change the file name either enter a name in the text box or click on the File to Access double dots button to choose a
44. E o o a o m A Hetsark 1 5 Pon Parameters Mun Ren length i n SE DOING Ta ima D Terr lo Beren Trace Tar Et Toe Fl a Set Graph i aus 1 Fale aiara i m The Run Parameters Form 4 2 1 Run Parameters Form Run Length The Run Length represents the amount of simulated time to run the simulation Run Length is a real number greater than zero Use the combo box to change the simulation time units to seconds milliseconds microseconds or nanoseconds If the Run Length time unit is changed all other time values will be scaled to the new unit In addition the trace and warning messages will be produced using the Run Length time units Trace to Screen Trace to File You can generate a narrative trace report of simulation by selecting either Trace to Screenor Trace to File or both When you select either or both of these the Traced Items List must also be specified The Trace Start Time will default to O and the Trace Stop time will default to the current Run Length Click on Trace Times to select a different interval Trace Times To display the Time Menu in order to set new trace start and stop times click on the Trace Times button The Trace Start Time must be greater than or equal to zero and less than the simulation Run Length The default Trace Start Time is zero The 190 Chapter 4 Running a Simulation Trace Stop Time must be greater than the Trace Start Time and less than or equal to the si
45. E a a A Fi Picking a Module FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT will have PE 1 as a Resident Processor because it was created from within the PE Form This Module is to iterate every 50 milliseconds so an Iteration Period should be defined for the Module Select the Preconditions Add button in the Module Form and then select Iteration Period from the Module Preconditions list presented In the next form that appears enter the value 50000 in the value box at the top of the form This represents the Iteration Period for the Module FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT The empty list below the value box contains every Statistical Distribution Function defined in the Simulation 77 I HE jap Te Uren hinns Medus Comtrotr Piedopesi n Ho Poeder ramer Fiaa h E E E FLI a i FUGHT CORT AOL SUFPOAT 1 ol lala lm la ml el 284 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation Defining a Module Although the Iteration Period was entered as microseconds the default time units you can change the time units by selecting the Time Units button appears on many forms Thus the time units could have been changed to milliseconds from within the Module Form and then the Iteration Period could have been entered as 50 milliseconds rather than 50 000 microseconds When the time units are changed any time values displayed will be scaled as well The Module FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT will execute two instructions each time it runs and then chain to a success
46. For Present Wait For Not Present Chain If Present and Chain If Not Present On Storage Device Enter the name of a Storage Device directly in this text box or use the double dots button to select from the list of current SD names This is used in conjunction with the File Status Requirement Type to determine when the Module may execute File Count 162 Chapter 3 NETWORK A File Status Requirement may additionally monitor the count of a File Enter an integer value in the File Count text box and then select one of the File Count conditions from the group of radio buttons next to the File Count text box 3 5 11 2 Message Status Requirement Form E Module L Name CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER Le d Tima linite MICROSECOAMNS el Message Status Requirement Message Name NEW DATA AVAILABLE a Global Message Wait For C Global Block C Chain If Queued 4 pp Ed C Local Message C Chain If Not Queued C Local Block 4 Message Count jo a Ignore Count C Greater Than C Equal To 4 C Less Than C Not Equal To View Outputs 2 Statistical Successors The Message Status Requirement Form Message Type Select one of these radio buttons to determine if the message that meets this Message Status Requirement may be a global message or must be a local message and if a message block is satisfactory or the complete message is required Message Status Requirement Type A Message Status Requirement may be
47. Form The Module Controls form contains seven control parameters for a Module Priority and Concurrent Limit can be set to an integer value The Delay attribute may be set to a real value or given the name of a SDF Use the Delay double dots button to select the name of a current SDF The remaining four attributes Interruptibility Flag Inhibit Message Inheritance Inhibit File Inheritance and One Message at a Time are check boxes which can be set to YES or NO 159 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Module Name CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER Time Units MICROSECONDS 2 Module Controls Predecessors No Predecessors Module Controls IP 120000 MI Priority jo Concurrent Limit 1 Delay NR MIC E Interruptibility Flag Set Host Inhibit Message Inheritance Inst Inhibit File Inheritance SET TIME THE GET MESSAGI One Message at a Time CHECK MESSA SET TIME THE FLIGHT STRING 1 RADAR DATA AVAILABLE 1 lololalalmislml ul LL 2 Statistical Successors The Module Controls Form al Preconditions The Preconditions list box is used to display create and edit a Module s preconditions The Add Cut Move and Edit buttons to the right of the list box will allow you to work with the Preconditions list Use the Add button to enter a new precondition for a Module You will then be asked to select a precondition type Preconditions that you may specify include Start Time Stop Time Iteration
48. II 5 bd Ed IMBRIDGE2 DMIX STA NET2 NETSA The Route Form Route List The Route List describes the order of hardware elements along which a message using this route will be passed To add items to the list use the Add PE Add Gateway and Add DMIX Destination Mix buttons The final item in the list must be a PE or Destination Mix You may cut move or edit individual items in the Route List by using the Cut Move and Edit buttons Each intermediate hop in the route may have an Allowed TD LAN list If a processing element or Gateway is connected to multiple TDs and or LANs the Allowed TD LAN list determines which Transfer Device or LAN may be used to pass a message If the Allowed TD LAN list is empty any valid TD or LAN connected to origin and 153 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual destination may be used at runtime The Edit button will allow you to set up the Allowed TD LAN list for an entry in the Route List NETWORK II 5 gt Route a 1 Mama 1T CTA NET now 1 Route List Item il Name MBRIDGE1 w EX Bl ah B Allowed TDs LANs Pal a Add TD Add Lan NETSA Eni Move _NETLOR NET18 The Allowed TD LAN Form 3 5 9 Echo PE List Form 154 Chapter 3 NETWORK NETWORK II 5 gt A ME T D gt lt Echo PE List 51_STA NET2 FDDI2 S1_STA NET4 NETS q S1_STA NET5 NETS r TD Name AEE ont _NETBTOLO
49. NAME COUNT OFFICE 1 NO OP O SEND REQUEST 32 SET TIMER SEMAPHORE 32 RESET TIMER SEMAPHORE 31 OFFICE 2 NO OP O SEND REQUEST 23 SET TIMER SEMAPHORE 23 RESET TIMER SEMAPHORE 22 OFFICE 3 NO OP 0 SEND REQUEST 26 SET TIMER SEMAPHORE 26 RESET TIMER SEMAPHORE 26 CENTRAL OFFICE PROCESS USER REQUEST 80 PROCESS STATE REPLY 2 REPLY 79 PASS MESSAGE ON 2 ACK 2 STATE OFFICE STATE REQUEST 2 STATE REPLY 2 Instruction Execution Report 5 5 3 Global TD Queue Statistics The Global TD Queue is used in situations when a message instruction has more than one allowed TD LAN and all are busy A Message Instruction is stored in the Global TD Queue while waiting for one of its allowed TD LANs to become available The Global TD Queue Statistics report contains information on the maximum average and standard deviation of this queue s size 229 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual GLOBAL TD QUEUE STATISTICS FROM 0 TO 1 SECONDS Global TD Queue Statistics 5 5 4 Standard Transfer Device Utilization Statistics A simulation may produce Transfer Device reports in two different formats The standard report is generated for non collision Transfer Devices and LANs and contains the following information Transfer Device Name Text up to 40 characters Number of Transfer Requests Granted The number of requests made by Processing Elements to either send a messag
50. NERAL STORAGI NUMBER READ O I OF BITS LY FLAG ITIAL RESIDEN NA RADAR NA DISH 60 NO GY z 000 BITS ME GE N T UMBER EAD O OF BITS LY FLAG HIZ E ITIAL RESIDEN MEM 1 RAL STORAGI 60 NO CYS a 000 BITS 314 The Network Description File continued Chapter 9 Debugging CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGING A NETWORK II 5 MODEL 9 0 INTRODUCTION NETWORK IL5 contains several mechanisms which aid the process of debugging a model These include Interactive Input Check Verify Pass One Pass Two Runtime Warnings 9 1 INTERACTIVE INPUT CHECK The first line of defense against errors is a syntax check performed on every entered value For example if the value MEM is entered for a Processing Element s Basic Cycle Time you will be required to enter a new value This will be signified by a ding if you have sound and a lt pointing to the offending field when you OK the form This is because a non numeric entry is invalid for the Basic Cycle Time When you OK a form in addition to type checking boundary checks are performed on all numeric responses With few exceptions numeric responses must be greater than or equal to zero Any attempt to respond with a negative number will be flagged as an error There may also be some logical upper boundary For example a percentage would have to be 10
51. NETWORK II 5 data structures currently in memory giving the number and size of each type This report is provided to allow a user to estimate the amount of memory a simulation is using All of the other summary reports are described in chapter 5 If you select Print a dialog will open up that allows you to direct what is on the screen out to a printer or a file The exact dialog depends on the host system running NETWORK If you select Quit the simulation will be halted and final reports written to the Listing file as of the current simulation time 4 2 5 Simulation Progress Graph The Simulation Progress Graph measures the percentage of the simulation which has been completed and is displayed along the bottom of the screen The Simulation Progress Graph is updated at an interval of 1 50th of the simulation run length The runtime menubar picture shows a progress graph 4 2 6 Trace Reports The runtime trace report allows you to monitor simulation events The menubar commands are the same when a runtime trace report is displayed as when it is not The menubar commands were described in the preceding paragraphs kls i mame MBA EIA HT Ti 1 EMAL SE parra pm Ur ke mudar HAYA TOA VAT AA A H ou pale alert PEMA CATS POLLICE ieee cerdas PRL PLA ee LGE reri enimi AD TE Fem mnir Ba FTE jb bme pr A e i ips E Pi 195 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual A Sample Runtime Trace Trace Report Button Halt The Halt comm
52. PE s drawing information and to Modules that may run on the PE will be retained Verify A data structure may be verified individually by clicking on the Verify button 120 Chapter 3 NETWORK The Library button will display the Library Form which has a variety of functions related to the creation use and maintenance of data structure library files The Library command 1s available for Modules Processing Elements Storage Devices and Transfer Devices only The last section of this chapter describes how to use the Library command To make changes to the drawing information of a hardware data structure PE Gateway SD TD or LAN select the Graphics button from within the initial attributes form The Graphics form will then be displayed from which you can change the graphics characteristics of an object such as changing color or selecting a new display icon Processing Element Form The Processing Element form lists a PE s current attributes To modify the attributes enter new parameters and select OK NETWORK II 5 viz Processing Element A Name CG Quantity 1 Time Units MICROSECONDS 3 Verify Cycle Time 1 000 MIC aa Time Slice NRO MIC Interrupt Overhead NRO MIC 170 Setup Time R MIC Message List Size NRO Instruction List SEND REQUEST NO OP al X Queue Flag Lose Overflow Messages SET TIMER SEMAPHORE Pak RESET TIMER SEMAPHORE Keep Blocks Separate X Input Controller
53. Period Message Status Requirement Semaphore Status Requirement Hardware Status Requirement File Status Requirement Once a Start Time Stop Time or Iteration Period is added to the precondition list 1t will no longer appear in the list of precondition types when you add a new precondition because a Module has only one Start Time Stop Time or Iteration Period but may have 160 Chapter 3 NETWORK several of the other precondition types Preconditions may be removed from the list Cut button or repositioned in the list Move button The Preconditions list is actually several lists combined into a single list Preconditions selected for a Module will be displayed in the Preconditions list in the following order Start Time Stop Time Iteration Period Message Status Requirements Semaphore Status Requirements Hardware Status Requirements and File Status Requirements The first three preconditions cannot be moved in the list but will always appear at the top The remaining preconditions Message Semaphore Hardware and File Status Requirements can only be moved if two or more of a particular type exist The movement will be confined to that portion of the Preconditions list that held the selected type of precondition to be moved For example if you wish to move a File Status Requirement in the Preconditions list it may only be moved to the top bottom or another part of the sublist that contains only File Status Requirements To chang
54. Reports describe the components of the simulated network It is produced before the simulation starts based on the Network Description File that was loaded The Runtime Trace Reports allow you to trace specific simulation events determine the status of a system and record simulation run time warnings The Summary Reports lists statistics for each component of your model during the simulation Each of these reports 1s described in further detail in the following sections You may examine the report files using a text editing program or via NETWORK s Analysis Browse Listing command The report file is an ASCII text file which is located in the same directory as its corresponding Network Description File file type NET 5 2 PLAYBACK REPORTS Two types of playback reports are available These are the Input Playback Report and the Default Playback Report Both playback reports result from an analysis of the input Network Description File They are optional and are generated before the start of the simulation You may request either of these reports at the beginning of a simulation by setting the proper flags in the Advanced Form of NETWORK 5 2 1 The Input Playback Report The Input Playback report is a line by line copy of the Network Description File used in the simulation with line numbers added Any errors in the Network Description file are detected and reported directly below the line containing the error 215 NETWORK II 5 User s Manu
55. Semaphore is created for each of the Semaphores specific to the PE and the Semaphore Instructions of the cloned copies of the PE will have the new Semaphore names This will allow you to retain PE Semaphore groupings so that statistics gathered for Semaphores will relate to one PE only Edit Cut The Edit Cut command removes objects TD LAN PE SD Gateway which have been selected highlighted from the model Cutting a PE SD or Gateway will also delete any TD LAN connections The Edit Cut command is only available when one or more objects have been selected on the display Edit Hide After selecting highlighting an object or a group of objects PEs TDs LANs SDs and Gateways use the Edit Hide command to hide these objects from the display Once hidden an object is not visible but it is still present in the model and will be included in 100 Chapter 3 NETWORK your NET file if a save is requested To redisplay a hidden object you must use the Edit Select command to access the hidden object by its name and set the Hide check box of the object to NO in the appropriate Draw Options Form The Edit Hide command is only available if at least one object on the display has been highlighted NETWORK II 5 vi HARDWARE UNCUT LIST Please select a list item olp lee mim a The Uncut Form Edit Uncut The Edit Uncut command allows you to restore objects which have been previously cut from the model After selecting this
56. THE DATA STRING The radar data processing module chain operates exclusively on PE 2 The receipt of the RADAR DATA AVAILABLE message by PE 2 initiates the GET DATA module GET DATA reads the file RADAR DATA from MEM 1 and chains to the FFT module FFT 273 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual performs internal processing within PE 2 and starts the REPLACE DATA module REPLACE DATA performs internal processing sends a RADAR DATA PROCESSED message to PE 1 and a STRING COMPLETE message to PE 2 The STRING COMPLETE message initiates the SELF TEST module on PE 2 Communications function IP 120 MIL KKKKKXKXKKKKXKXKXkXXkXXk PE 1 CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER SET TIME THE MSG STRING GET MESSAGE BUFFER CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER KKK KKKKKK KK KKK S TIME THE MSG 190 E ANDED PRED v ANDED PRED v KKK KK KKK KK KKK KK KKK KKKKKKK KK KKK MSG NOT DISPLAY AVAILABLE STRING COMPLET MESSAGE DISPLAY MESSAGE RESET TIME THE STRING COMPLETE RESET TIME THE MS KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK M STRING COMPLETE R TIME THE MSG H M STRING COMPLETE R TIME THE MSG The communications module chain b
57. TRAFLINK III text inserted by a network analyzer in the Traffic File prn Up to six separate text strings may be entered directly in these text boxes TRAFLINK Traffic Parameter Overhead Per Messag The Overhead Per Message field allows you to add an additional overhead in bits to each packet in the captured traffic file This is useful for restoring data which has been stripped from the captured packets by a LAN interface card For an IEEE 802 3 LAN an overhead of 96 bits should be specified to account for the Preamble and Frame Checksum fields which have been stripped from the packet Please review your network analyzer documentation for further information on your LAN implementation The application of message overhead is another area in which external captured traffic and internal message traffic are treated differently in a simulation Prior to transmission an internal message is formatted with the specified LAN overhead and packetization parameters However no formatting is applied to external traffic External traffic is transferred as specified in the External Traffic File EXT TRAFLINK Traffic Parameter First Traffic Arrives At This parameter allows you to synchronize the incoming traffic with the model traffic By default the incoming Traffic is set to start at 0 00 seconds This can be modified such that it can start after some delay in simulated time which allows for the boot up delay of the nodes such as hubs r
58. The navigation radar data processing and communications functions are each implemented through module chains The standard Completed Module Statistics report covers each module individually Since we are implementing these functions as a chain of modules we will need to set up our own timers to time the function from start to finish You can do this by setting a semaphore at the beginning of each module chain and resetting it at the end We will use a different semaphore for each string to keep the reports separate The standard Semaphore Report will then list a Response Time that will represent the timing for each chain of module chain This Response Time may also be presented graphically as a plot The TIME THE FLIGHT STRING semaphore keeps timing information for the navigation function The TIME THE MSG BUFFER STRING semaphore keeps timing 270 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation information for the communications function The TIME THE DATA STRING semaphore keeps the timing information for the radar data processing function Because the self test function consists of only 1 module no semaphores were required to time its duration The timing information is available in the Completed Module Statistics report 271 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual The Navigation function EPs KKKKKKKKK KKK KKK ia FLIGHT je CONTROL ia SUPPORT x KOK I IO I OI I ECESSOR v KAKKKKKKKK KKK KKK ANDE D PR ED
59. Upper Bound Table of Statistical Distributions The parameters for these distributions are in accordance with standard mathematical usage The optional upper and lower bounds are extensions which allow bounding many of the distributions by truncation The Random Linear and Random Step Distributions allow defining a table of values selected based on a percentage from a Distribution In the case of a Random Step Distribution only those values given in the table will be returned A Random Linear Distribution will perform a linear interpolation between the two nearest data points to determine a value A Pattern Distribution is a table of values Every time a reference is made to this distribution the next element in the table is returned When the end of the table is 71 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual reached the pattern is restarted at the first table element Pattern Distributions may consist of one to 32000 elements A Pattern From File Distribution is a table of values with the table contained in a file external to the system description This SDF behaves much like the Pattern SDF Values are taken sequentially from the table of values contained in a file The Constant Distribution is obviously not a random distribution This distribution type allows you to define named constants through the standard statistical distribution syntax The Key Linear Message Linear Semaphore Linear File Linear Distribution File Count and Message Count
60. a Storage Device can hold It should not include any overhead bits Even though bits are usually integers capacity is a real number to allow capacities greater than an integer s upper bound of slightly more than two billion The upper bound of a real number depends on the word size of the host computer but is generally at least 1 7 E 32 The Number of Ports is the number of simultaneous accesses that can be made to the Storage Device The value is independent of the actual number of Transfer Devices that connect to this Storage Device If for example four TDs are connected to a Storage Device which had the Number of Ports 2 the Storage Device would serve up to 2 Transfer Devices simultaneously All other requests would be queued on a first come first served basis In addition no more than one PE can access a given user named file at any given time However multiple users may access General Storage simultaneously Read Word Access Time and Write Word Access Time are real numbers or references to a Statistical distribution They reflect the amount of time to read write one word of data Read Word Overhead Time and Write Word Overhead Time are real numbers or references to statistical distributions specifying an additional amount of time to add per word accessed Bits Per Word is an integer specifying the number of bits in a word not including overhead bits Words Per Block is an integer specifying the number of words in one block Read Bloc
61. any external references such as reading or writing They are commonly used to model arithmetic and logic instructions Every Processing Instruction has a name and a Number of Cycles Names in NETWORK II 5 can be almost any combination of characters up to 40 characters in length Embedded spaces are allowed however certain special characters are not allowed on some systems The following characters are not permitted in names entered in NETWORK 7 Y If you attempt to enter a name using any of these characters or if for any reason a name you entered is considered invalid you will be prompted to enter a new name The execution time for Processing Instructions is expressed in terms of a multiplier of the Basic Cycle Time Therefore a change in a PE s Basic Cycle Time automatically changes the execution time of all Processing Instructions in the Instruction Repertoire of that PE The amount of PE time it takes to execute a Processing Instruction is simply the Number of Cycles of the instruction multiplied by the Basic Cycle Time of this PE 19 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual The Number of Cycles for a Processing Instruction is always an integer When a statistical distribution is used for a Number of Cycles calculation the result is always rounded to an integer Processing Instructions may use one of the Linear Distributions to compute a Number of Cycles based on the size of a received message the size of a file that has
62. be used to limit the number of transmissions occurring on the TD at any given time If Number of Circuits is NR the default the number of transmissions is limited only by the number of devices that are connected to the Transfer Device If Number of Circuits is set to a number then that number represents the maximum number of transmissions that can occur on the TD at any given time A PE attempting to send a message or a file when the number of transmissions 42 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 equals the Number of Circuits will delay until the number of transmissions is less than the Number of Circuits 2 2 3 Storage Devices As mentioned in the Storage Device Overview section Storage Devices contain both user named files and unstructured storage called General Storage They have a capacity measured in bits They are used to model anything that stores data either temporarily or permanently This includes buffers disk drives tape drives and random access memory Files are read or written analogous to the way real storage devices work 2 2 3 1 Words and Blocks Storage Devices automatically decompose all file reads and writes into words and blocks Words are the smallest segment and usually correspond directly to the actual word size of the Storage Device being modelled but they need not be A word overhead time may also be specified Blocks are the largest segment of data storage and are made up of groups of words Blocks are
63. below TEXTWORK runtime warning options are also described in Chapter 5 The following is a complete list of the NETWORK II 5 runtime warnings along with an explanation of their possible causes Transfer Device LAN Runtime Warnings 1 Token Passing Time equal Zero WARNING At 34 555500 SEC Token Passing Time TPT for td RING BUS returned a zero TPT must be either NR or a number or a distribution that never returns a zero TPT set to NR 318 Chapter 9 Debugging The Token Passing Time for a Transfer Device which uses a Token Passing protocol must be greater than zero If a zero value is returned the Token Passing Time will not be modelled for the remainder of the simulation Make sure that any distribution used for the Token Passing Time cannot return a zero value Processing Element Runtime Warnings 2 PE Message List Overflow Message Transfer WARNING At 456455500 SEC there was insufficient room in the message list of pe PE A to add message EMAIL An attempt to add a message to a Processing Element s message list failed because of insufficient space in the PE s message list If the PE s Lose Overflow Messages Flag is set to YES the message will be lost If the PE s Lose Overflow Messages Flag is set to NO the message will be stored Setting the Lose Overflow Messages Flag to NO is a way of ensuring that messages will not be lost due to a low message list size If Lose Overflow Messages
64. bins not just the current one This creates a moving window averaging capability The interval can be no less than the size of one time bin and no greater than the simulation end time Intervals less than one time bin are not allowed so that no gaps of unmonitored activity exist in the utilization plot The default value for the plot interval is the difference of the plot end time and the plot start time divided by ten So by default each plotted point would represent the average of the previous 10 time bins The end time for the bin plotted by a point is the time of the point The start time for the bin plotted by a point is computed by subtracting the user specifed interval from the time of the point If the resulting value for a start time is less than zero then the start time of the time bin will be set to zero So if you specify an interval of 10 seconds for a plot from 0 to 100 seconds the point plotted at time 50 represents from time 40 to time 50 However the point at 5 seconds represents from time O to time 3 seconds because there 1s no plot data for the time before time zero 263 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual KE TWeCGHK 11 5 OFFICE 1 TIER Ba A Select Plot Interval Utilization Plot The value assigned to each plotted point represents the percentage of time the device was busy during the time span defined by the time bin For example if the plot start 0 milliseconds and the plot end 50 milliseconds
65. conditions that must be met before a Module can start executing These Module preconditions include time hardware message and Semaphore based conditions Time based preconditions include starting a Module at a specific time during the simulation and or automatically iterating at a rate specified by the user Hardware based preconditions include waiting until a particular set of Processing Element s Transfer Device s and or Storage Device s are available at the same time Message and Semaphore based preconditions include waiting until a given message or set of messages Chapter 1 Introduction are received or a given Semaphore is set Semaphores can also be used to interrupt or cancel the execution of Modules Messages and Semaphores have count values which can also be used in specifying preconditions NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 1 4 NETWORK II 5 REPORTS NETWORK II 5 offers a variety of different reports on system activity These reports are Graphical Reports Automatic Hardware Layout Software Module Diagram Status Plot Utilization Plot Verify Report Tabular Reports Processing Element Statistics Instruction Execution Transfer Device Statistics Storage Device Statistics Module Summary Semaphore Report Message Statistics Received Message Message Delivery Snapshot Report Interactive Simulation Runtime Narrative Trace Snapshot Report The Automatic Hardware Layout feature shows each device in the system and h
66. destination name followed by its percentage of selection The sum of the percentages in the list must be 100 156 Chapter 3 NETWORK 3 5 11 Module Form Owing to the large number of attributes a Module possesses the Module Form is one of the more complex NETWORK forms All of the attributes of a Module are accessed from within this form or from subforms emanating from the Module Form ll i 4 Name Time Units MICROSECONDS s Predecessors No Predecessors 8 Preconditions IP 120000 MIC Ezi Move Eii vi E E T g E Set Host Processing Element s 1 Allowed PE PE 1 Instruction List Name Execution Count SET TIME THE MSG BUFFER STRING 1 GET MESSAGE BUFFER 1 CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER 1 Put SET TIME THE FLIGHT STRING 1 RADAR DATA AVAILABLE 1 Move ola lala lm e lm S ml LE Penk aL 2 Statistical Successors The Module Form Instruction List The Instruction List of a Module is displayed in the large list box on the bottom of the Module Form This list holds the names of Module instructions and the number of times each is to be executed If more than one instruction is listed the instructions will be executed in the order they appear in the list The Add Cut and Move buttons are used to create remove and reposition instructions in this list The Count button is used to change the number of executions attribute of a Module instruction To change the execution count of a Module in
67. different area of the current graphical layout The use of these scrollbars is described in section 3 3 1 3 1 3 Working With NETWORK s Forms 78 Chapter 3 NETWORK NETWORK II 5 hd E Processing Element A Name PE 1 Quantity fi Time Units MICROSECONDS Verify Cycle Time 0 000 MIC Library Time Slice MIC NR Interrupt Overhead NR MIC NR 170 Setup Time MIC Message List Size NR Instruction List ml X Queue Flag Lose Overflow Messages 2 Keep Blocks Separate X Input Controller Move IX Include in Plot File ESB linea E al E A ha A q The PE Form Many of the tasks involved in model building are performed in NETWORK by the presentation of various forms in which data may be entered or edited and other options may be selected These forms range from the very simple requiring a single choice to more complex forms with multiple fields for data entry check boxes list boxes and radio buttons The forms displayed by NETWORK share common features which are to be manipulated according to the same conventions for all of the forms Dialog Boxes Dialog boxes define the background and borders of the forms used in describing the model and controlling NETWORK operations A dialog box appears as a solid colored rectangular area on the screen upon which the options of a form are arrayed When a dialog box is displayed fill in the parameters contained in the dialog box and click on a cont
68. for each of the NETWORK II 5 data structures and how to edit these attributes The hardware data structures also have a set of graphics attributes which defines the appearance of an object on the display The attributes and controls of these forms will be described after the section detailing all of the attributes forms of the various data structures 3 5 1 Common Attributes and Controls Name A name identifies a data structure within a model To change a name enter a new name in the name text box The name may be up to 40 characters long and must be unique within the model If a name is changed any occurrences of the name will automatically be changed For example if you change the name of a PE any Message Instructions which had the old PE name as a Destination will be changed so that they use the new name 119 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Comment Each data structure may have a comment that describes it in further detail or holds any type of note you may wish to include To enter or change a comment select the Comment button and then make your changes in the Comment form A comment may be as many lines long as you wish If a data structure is given a comment the first line of the comment will be displayed on the attributes form as a label to the left of the Comment button Time Units Many of the attributes of data structures are related to time You may change the time units used in a form by selecting new time units from the Ti
69. forms have the three Name Offset fields that were described above in the Controls Form Setting the X Y and Name Space attributes will allow you to reposition an icon s name in relation to the center of the icon Style You may change the fill style of any of the basic shape icons rectangle hexagon octagon by selecting the down arrow of the Style combo box and choosing a style from the available choices solid diagonal small diagonal dash diagonal cross hatch large hatch and dash hatch 3 6 2 Processing Element Graphics Form In addition to the graphics forms attributes mentioned above you will find attributes related to the Quantity field of a PE 181 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 gt Name PE 1 Hide PE Color green Style solid w E Bl ih Al icon pcicn El gt Ad al Scale 1 00 Rotate degrees 0 0 Drawing Mode PE Group Offset PE Name Offset a Individual X Horizontal 40 X Horizontal C Grouped Y Vertical 20 Y Vertical C Single Icon Line Spacing Max Group Members Displayed fis The PE Graphics Form Drawing Mode There are three PE Drawing Mode options you may select in the PE Draw Options Form Individual mode will create a PE icon for each copy of the PE group Each of these copies can be positioned independently Grouped mode will also create a PE icon for each copy of a PE group but each PE icon will be positioned relative to the group Single Icon
70. going 2 2 8 Destination Mixes A Destination Mix is a list of names of Processing Elements Routes and Destination Mixes with a percentage associated with each The percentages must sum to 100 Each time a Destination Mix is referenced as a destination for a message instruction a new probability is randomly selected from a uniform distribution The corresponding destination from the mix is the selected and executed You use a Destination Mix by giving its name as the destination for a Message Instruction Because the names of Destination Mixes PEs and routes must be unique there will be no confusion xxxx x DESTINATION MIXES HARDWARE TYPE DESTINATION MIX NAME WORKSTATION MIX DESTINATIONS ARE 40 ADMIN DESTINATIONS ARE 17 FINANCE DESTINATIONS ARE 10 GATEWAY TO WAN DESTINATIONS ARE 33 PRINT SERVER A Sample Destination Mix 53 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Destination Mixes are recursive Therefore the name of a Destination Mix can be included as a destination in a Destination Mix exactly as it could be inserted for a destination of a Message Instruction To catch infinite loops a limit of 100 levels of recursion for Destination Mixes has been built into NETWORK II 5 A message instruction attempting to find a destination from a Destination Mix that reaches the 100 level limit will be cancelled and a
71. have fixed parameters which can be viewed but not altered 2 2 7 Gateways A Gateway is a device for multidirectional interconnection between two or more TDs and or LANs A NETWORK II 5 Gateway is the generic term for a repeater router bridge gateway or any type of hardware connecting two or more TDs and or LANs Gateways cannot generate traffic they only forward messages sent to them by Processing Elements or other Gateways A Gateway is made up of a number of output units equal to the number of TDs LANs that the Gateway connects These output units are modeled by standard NETWORK II 5 PEs and Modules automatically written for you when you save your model Each output unit is dedicated to serve a single TD LAN It is responsible for properly requesting the TD LAN and queueing the messages for that LAN You may specify a Buffer Capacity for each of the output units of a Gateway When a Gateway receives a message the output unit performs any required reformatting of the message If the processing component of the output buffer is busy with another message a message queue builds If the size of the message queue exceeds the Buffer Capacity of the output unit a runtime warning will be issued However the message will not be lost but will always be forwarded If the message arrives over a TD or LAN which has Separate Blocks NO the message will not be considered for processing and or retransmission until the entire message is received at the G
72. host PE COMPLETED MODULE STATISTICS FROM 0 TO 50 MILLISECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS FOR STATI EQUE REPLY HOST Pl RAL OFFICI COMPLETED EXECUTIONS 2 CANCELLATIONS DUE TO CONCURRENT LIMIT RUN UNTIL SEMAPHORES NUM PRECONDITION TI AVG PRECONDITION TI MAX PRECONDITION TIM MIN PRECONDITION TIM STD DEV TIME AVG EXECUTION TIME AX EXECUTION TI IN EXECUTION TI STD DEV TIME RESTARTED IN AVG INTERRU AX INTERRU STD DEV TIME Completed Module Execution Report 240 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File Cancellations Due To Concurrent Limit The total number of Module cancellations that occurred when the Module Concurrent Limit was exceeded due to Iteration Period Wait For Required Messages or successor activation Cancellations Due To Run Until Semaphores The total number of Module cancellations due to the failure of a semaphore Run Until condition Number of Precondition Times The number of times a Module s precondition requirements were met or the number of times a Module having no preconditions executes Average Maximum Minimum Standard Deviation Precondition Time This statistic measures the interval between the first attempt to activate a Module copy an
73. individual hardware icons on the display Icons may be hidden individually or as a group Single click on one or more hardware icons to select highlight the items to be hidden Then use the Edit Hide command on the 92 Chapter 3 NETWORK menubar to remove the selected icons from the display Although a hidden item is not found on the display the data structure still exists in the model and it can still de accessed with the Define command on the menubar NETWORK II 5 gt PE List olp lee mom a The PE List Individual icons may also be hidden by selecting the GRAPHICS button from within the attributes form of the hardware entity The Hide check box on the form is used to control the hiding of icons Marking this box with a check mark will hide the item if the OK button is selected in the Graphics form To redisplay a hardware icon it is necessary to enter the Graphics form of the hidden hardware element The Define command will be required because there is no display icon to highlight Once in the Graphics form click on the Hide check box to remove the check mark and OK the form The hardware icon will then be restored to its previous position Thus to redisplay a PE that is hidden you must select Define PE from the menubar select the PE name from the list select the EDIT button to get to the PE attributes form select the GRAPHICS button and finally remove the check mark from the Hide check box and OK the from 93 N
74. is incomplete default values are assumed The printer width may be set to either 80 the default or 130 columns The default printer width is 80 247 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual CHAPTER 6 MODEL ANIMATION 6 1 INTRODUCTION 6 1 1 Overview NETWORK s animation capability enables you to see your modeled network in operation During an animation your model s hardware elements Processing Element Transfer Device LAN Storage Device Gateway are highlighted as they become active Icons are displayed at the beginning and end of data transmissions moving first from source to Transfer Device and then from Transfer Device to destination The hardware element s descriptive text tells you what is happening Prior to running an animation you must have successfully run a simulation of your model Select Analysis Start Simulation to run the simulation The simulation produces a plot file file type PIN which is used by the animation An animation may be advanced either continuously or a single step at a time Trace messages which describe simulation activity may be displayed concurrent with the animation In order to display trace messages during an animation you must create a simulation Report File file type LIS which contains simulation trace messages You do this by turning tracing on before you start a simulation and directing the trace messages to the Report File 6 1 2 Chapter Organization Section 6 2 describes how to ru
75. is greater than zero the simulation program will generate the specified number of summary reports evenly spaced over the course of the simulation The number of reports does not include the final report at the end of the simulation The Periodic Reports generated cover from start of simulation or time of statistics reset if applicable until the time of the report The same reports offered at the end of simulation are offered as Periodic Reports The Periodic Reports List may be edited by clicking on the Select Periodic button located on the Advanced Options Form For example if the simulation run length is one second and you would like reports every quarter second request three periodic reports Periodic Reports will be produced at 0 25 seconds 0 50 seconds and 0 75 seconds The final report will be produced at 1 0 second Reset Time Simulation statistics can be reset by specifying a Reset Time greater than zero Ifa reset time is specified all simulation activity that occurred prior to the reset time is not included in the summary reports This feature is valuable to warm up a simulation whose start up activities are different from its steady state activities If a Periodic Report is generated before the reset time is reached it will include statistics from the start of simulation to the time of the report Runtime Warnings The Warnings to Screen and Warnings to File check boxes determine how runtime warnings are handled Runtime warni
76. item added is a PE you may also save all Modules associated with the PE to the PE library If the item added to the library name list is to be saved in a library file you must use the library Save command before leaving the library form You can remove items from the list by highlighting a name and then selecting the Cut button However if the file is not saved after this is done the item will still reside in the library file because Cut merely removes the name from the list but the Save button saves the current library list You may position items in the library name list by highlighting a name and then selecting the Move button A new list position is then given by selecting one of the numbers inserted between the names If you wish to examine or edit a library item use the Edit button after you have highlighted the name of the item The attribute form for the data structure type of the library item selected will be shown with the current attributes of the library item Most of the attributes of the library item may be changed including the name Again these changes are not retained unless you use the Save button to save the new attributes in a file You may copy the attributes of a library element into the data structure of your current model that is being edited by using the Insert button To do this highlight a name in the name list of library items and then select Insert The attributes of the data structure will then be the same as
77. its parameters predefined to match industry standards The advantage of the LAN building block is that the parameters for industry standard LANs are built in The built in LANs types include Ethernet 10BASE2 1OBASET 4 Mb Token Ring 16 Mb Token Ring FDDI and others 13 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Additional information about the operation of the TD building block will be covered in the Transfer Device Details section which appears later in this chapter 2 1 4 Storage Device Overview Storage Devices contain both user named files and unstructured storage called General Storage Every Storage Device has a capacity measured in bits When a Read Instruction references a Storage Device it checks to see 1f the requested file is available If it is not a warning message is printed and the simulation continues as if the file were available If it is available the file is read into the PE You have the option of reading in the entire file or a specified portion You may also specify if the Read Instruction will destroy the entire user named file just read or decrease the file size by the amount read or leave the file size unchanged When a Write Instruction attempts to put a file in a Storage Device it checks to see if there is enough space available If there is it accepts the file If adequate space is not available a warning message is issued to the user and the simulation continues as if there is enough room to transfer the entire fil
78. listed on a line but several events may also appear on the same line The same simulation time may appear in multiple lines if the listing of events that occurred for that time does not fit on a single line Each simulation event is described by the index numbers of simulation entities Also the number of simulation entities involved in an event varies For example if the item identified is a PE only the next number will be part of the event but 1f the item is a TD identified as a Bus in the index two or more numbers may be part of the same event A new event starts with the next number following the listing of the previous event 357 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Events in the simulation Plot File may be interpreted as follows The entities and events in the examples correspond to the Example simulation Plot File shown above Processing Element 2 numbers x y x index number of the Processing Element y index number of the Module beginning execution on this PE or will be O if the PE becomes idle or 1 if this PE does not have an input controller and is receiving a message Example listing of a PE becoming active 1348 363 412 9 110 420 8 8 420 1 At 1348 363 microseconds the Processing Element COMPUTER Al index number 4 begins executing module DATA RETRIEVAL index number 12 Example listing of a PE going idle 1448 363 10 4 2010051310518 1671040 At 1448 363 microseconds the PE COMPUTER A1 index number 4 is idle as not
79. match click on a PE name in the scrolling list box beneath the column labeled External Name Model Name TRAFLINK will present the PE Name Menu see figure 10 10 which lists all the PEs connected to the LAN Link segment that you have selected Choose a PE name from this list to be matched with the selected network node Name Repeat this process until all of the PE names have a match 341 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual TRAFLINK III lt Local Broadcast gt butterfly buttonfly deadfly Figure 10 10 The Node Name Matching Option By default all PE names in the model will appear when you click on an external name If you select the name of a particular link using Set Link then only the names of PEs in that link segment will be shown TRAFLINK will not generate an External Traffic File ext if the Name Match List is incomplete The names can be mapped as a one to one function using the Default Name Match button if the names in the LAN Traffic File matches the names in the model The Automatic Match could be useful when dealing with large models where the PE names in the model are matched randomly to the external PE names The list range of PE names selected for automatic match is governed by the links in Set Link option By default all links in the model are selected hence resulting in all PEs in the model to be used for random pairing of unpaired names in the node list 342 Chapter 10 TRAFLINK III TRAF
80. match for these names External file will not be created until all the names in the external traffic file have been matched with the model names This message shows how many names NUM_LINKS have not yet been matched Use the Match Names button in the Setup Form to match the names either explicitly or use automatic name matching option Hint the Match Names button is active only when the traffic file in the External Traffic file list box is selected Use the mouse to select the external traffic file and then select the Match Names button to get the Name Match Form 10 5 3 Topology File Related Error Messages 353 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual e ERROR Non hex character found in HEX VALUE During topology import applies to Cabletron SPECTRUM topology exports only non hex characters were found for devices names within the file Make sure the topology file was saved correctly e ERROR No devices found in file TOP_FILE File may be corrupted empty or from a different NMS than the one selected NMS_TYPE Error while reading the input topology file TOP_FILE Check whether the file is corrupted or empty The most common cause of this error is selecting a NMS type SPECTRUM OpenView NetView etc that does not match the source of the topology file Currently supported NMS software and exporting of network topology from them is covered in the next section 354 Chapter 11 File Conversion CHAPTER 11
81. may be plotted by clicking the P1ot by Class radio button Classes may be selected by clicking on the check box next to the class name More than one class may be selected for plotting 7 2 Timeline Status Plots The Timeline Status Plot displays each device s pattern of activity during the most recently completed simulation Several individual plots are displayed at one time to allow for comparison between model elements 261 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NE TSH 11 5 OFFICE 1 TEP ak m a m ede mal FINE o nam ss a lan o waf PRA wove cence Y hd uda O FEIE 116 e mann L e it la a recio MERE TO ee a ad 7 main de eae ln i i a 18 8 24 7A 48 0 lim in HILLTSECOAOS r remeria of 15 0 A Status Plot In order to create a Timeline Status Plot the plotted time span is divided into a series of 50 equal frames or time bins For all devices the percent utilization during each time bin is calculated and displayed For a semaphore being SET is considered utilized being RESET is considered idle For a message being transmitted over a TD or LAN is considered utilized not being sent is considered idle For example if the plot start is 0 and the plot end is 100 seconds then the plotting time span is 100 seconds Time bin 1 represents the utilization from 0 to 2 seconds time bin 2 represents the utilization from 2 to 4 seconds and so on for the remainder of the 50 time bins Only a Status plot has a Threshold The threshold
82. message being claimed by the wrong Module 28 Invalid Route List Entry 326 Chapter 9 Debugging a WARNING At 70 786520 SEC pe PE ONE called instruction RETRANSMIT which called ROUTE ONE which itself called route ROUTE TWO Routes may not call other routes Instruction execution aborted b WARNING At 45 123312 SEC pe PE A called instruction RETRANSMIT which called ROUTE A which used NEXT to forward message MESSAGE A along a route which itself called route ROUTE B Routes may not call other routes Instruction execution aborted To limit a message circulating forever NETWORK does not allow Routes to be referenced by other routes Semaphore Runtime Warnings 29 Semaphore Maximum Pending Responses exceeded WARNING At 240550000 SEC pe TIMER executing instruction SET SEMAPHORE 1 tried to start a new response for semaphore MEASURE DELIVERY TIME when it already was at its limit of 999 pending responses When this runtime warning occurs the Semaphore will be set However the response time statistics will not be kept for instances when the maximum number of pending responses has been exceeded A default value of 999 is provided for the maximum number of pending responses This default was chosen to catch models which losei memory during simulation runtime Statistical Distribution Function Runtime Warnings 3
83. model it can dramatically increase model execution time Even a TD which is never requested will be 100 busy passing the token Use the Key Linear distribution to get a different Token Passing Time from each PE on the ring 2 2 2 9 Priority Token Ring Protocol The Priority Token Ring Protocol offers a generic capability that can be used to model both the 802 4 Token Bus and the Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI Token Ring It is defined by a token rotation sequence allocations for synchronous traffic and target token rotation times for asynchronous traffic An unlimited number of priority classes may be specified for asynchronous traffic When a simulation starts the first PE in the TD Connection List is given the token When the token is released it is passed to the next PE in the Connection List After the token has been passed to each PE in the Connection List it is once again passed to the first PE in the Connection List and this cycle will continue for the duration of the run Both synchronous and asynchronous timers may be specified which will determine how long an individual PE will retain the token When a PE receives the token it will first transmit using its synchronous allocation A PE s synchronous allocation is a guaranteed amount of time that the PE may use the TD every time that PE receives the token Each Connection within the TD Connection List that represents a PE will have its own synchronous allocation defined Syn
84. model and reduce the clutter in the Semaphore Report The Maximum Pending Responses value allows you to define boundaries for a Semaphore response computation Every time you start a response by SETing a Semaphore a few words of storage are allocated to store the attributes of this pending response Every time you complete a response by RESETing the Semaphore that storage is released If you start thousands of responses without completing them you will lose valuable memory 68 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 A default of 999 maximum pending responses is presumed to warn users of potentially memory wasting Semaphores If the specified maximum count is exceeded a run time warning is issued and the new response is not started All other features of a Semaphore instruction SET RESET TOGGLE and INCREMENT DECREMENT ASSIGN COUNT will work normally even in the event of a maximum pending response error Semaphore counts can be assigned from a statistical distribution This will permit you to assign a value to a Semaphore count from a random distribution Then you can use that selected value multiple times through the use of the Semaphore linear distribution 2 3 7 Wild Cards Wild cards are used to allow one text string to match more than one name Wild cards can be used in Message Status Requirements and as Destinations for Message Instructions For example using a Wait For Message Status Requirement of NEW DATA would all
85. name from the list of current files If you enter the name of a nonexistent file a new one will be created when you OK the form File Count The File Count can be an integer value or the name of a Statistical Distribution Function Select the File Count double dots button to choose a current SDF name Bits to Read 130 Chapter 3 NETWORK The number of bits read may be an integer number or may be chosen from a SDF To use a SDF either enter the name of a SDF in the text box or click on the double dots button next to the text box 131 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual File Modification Method One of three file modification methods may be chosen from the group of radio buttons These are Erase File Decrement File and Do Not Modify File Resume Flag A Read Instruction s Resume Flag will be set to YES when this check box is selected Allowed TD LAN You may use the Allowed TD LAN List to add and delete allowed TDs LANSs for the Read Instruction The creation deletion and positioning of entries in the Allowed TD LAN List is controlled by the Add Cut and Move buttons to the right of the list 3 5 2 1 4 Write Instruction Form NETWORK II 5 bd E Processing Element Quantity 1 Write Instruction Name STORE RADAR DATA SD to Access MEM 1 EN e to Access RADAR DATA E File Count NR Ea Bits to Write 800 BITS 3 o m a Append to File Allowed TD LAN C Replace
86. name as a Wait For Message 66 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 Status Requirement will contend for that message The highest priority Module that has all of its preconditions met will be assigned the message In the event of a tie the Module that waited the longest will get the message 1f there is a time tie a random assignment will be made There are two exceptions to the above message scenario When a PE sends a message to itself it does not use a Transfer Device and the transfer is completed in zero simulated time The message sent still goes into the PE s Received Message List just like any other message The other exception occurs when a message is sent to the Global Message List The Global Message List is essentially a system wide Received Message List from which any PE can take a message Because it is a modeling convenience not a real PE no Transfer Device is required and the transfer takes zero simulated time A message can be viewed as a token One message token can satisfy no more than one Module s Wait For Message Status Requirement precondition Multiple copies of the same message token may reside in the same Received Message List or different ones until taken by a Module A message is defined implicitly through the definition of Message Instructions In the instruction a message is described by the Message Text which defaults to the name of the issuing instruction and a length in bits The length is used i
87. network analyzer network management tools with TRAFLINK 333 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 10 2 RUNNING TRAFLINK 10 2 1 Importing Network Topology into NETWORK IL 5 The basic steps in creating a NETWORK II 5 model file net are as follows 1 Capture a Network Topology top file Ze Import file using NETWORK II 5 3 Filter TDs LAN Segment to be imported 4 Import PEs and TDs to build a NETWORK II 5 model file net 10 2 1 1 Capturing a Network Topology File The Network Topology File top is a text file representing your network It is generated by putting the data stored in network management software into a file The exact procedure to export the top file depends on the Network Management Software you are using Please refer to section 10 4 for further details on how to capture and save network topologies from your particular NMS system 10 2 1 2 Importing TOP into NETWORK II 5 Invoke NETWORK II 5 and select File Import menu option Select the appropriate network management software used for capturing the topology information NETWORK I1 5 MES Edit Define Display Verify Analysis Help New Ctrl N Open Ctrl 0 Save Ctrl4 S Save As Import Print Ctrl P Cabletron Spectrum Topology Quit HP OpenView Topology IBM NetView Topology Figure 10 1 Importing Network Topology 334 Chapter 10 TRAFLINK III Once TRAFLINK has scanned the file for PEs and TDs it will display the Import Form
88. number of times a Module operating on this PE was interrupted while it had a pending Transfer Device request Average Maximum Standard Deviation TD Wait Time Statistics on the time a PE spent waiting to access a TD LAN not including pending requests Input Controller Requests The number of times this PE sent a message to a PE with an Input Controller Separate statistics are kept for the no Input Controller case because there is no chance for a delay waiting for a PE that has an Input Controller although there is the possibility for delay when requesting a TD to contact a destination PE Destination PE Requests Granted The number of times a message was sent from this PE to a PE that does not have an Input Controller It does not include pending requests Average Maximum Standard Deviation Destination PE Wait Time The time the PE spent waiting for another PE to become available to receive a message This statistic applies only to cases where the destination PE does not have an Input 226 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File Controller Neither pending requests nor delays in acquiring a TD LAN to access the destination PE are included Number of PE Restarted Interrupts This is the number of times interrupted Modules were restarted on this PE It does not include Modules that were interrupted and not yet resumed See the snapshot report to identify those Modules that have not been restarted Average Maximum Standard Deviation Interr
89. number specifying the amount of time to add to each word transferred to account for parity bits start stop bits and so on This attribute should be set to zero if no overhead is desired Block Overhead Time is a real number specifying 32 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 the amount of time to add to each block transferred to account for destination addresses checksums and so on It should also be set to zero if no overhead is desired A Minimum Bits to Send may be specified to pad the data to a minimum size This is especially useful for various LAN protocols that require a minimum frame size This padding will apply only to the transfer The number of bits received will always equal the number of bits sent The Separate Blocks Flag will determine if the transmission of a message or file will be handled as one transmission or as several transmissions of the component blocks of the message or file If the flag is set to YES messages or files will be transmitted one block at a time with the controlling Processing Element releasing the Transfer Device and destination Processing Element Storage Device between frame transmissions If the flag 1s set to NO the Transfer Device will be held by the Processing Element for the entire message or file NOTE setting the flag to YES may significantly increase the model simulation time due to the increased number of TD requests relinquishes required to send every message or file The Connec
90. of the percentages in the list must be to 100 NETWORK 11 5 hd E PE 1 Instruction Mix Name MESSAGE_MIX Stream NR Verily Instruction List Name Percent BROADCAST1 20 a Ea a eh B MESSAGE TO WO 60 2 Aa al The Instruction Mix Form 3 5 14 Statistical Distribution Function Form The SDF Form is used to display and manipulate the attributes of Statistical Distribution Functions 169 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Type To select a SDF type click on the down arrow of the Type combo box and then select a type from the list Attributes The attributes of a SDF are determined by the SDF type that has been selected After a choice of SDF type is made clicking on the Attributes button will display the SDF attributes form SDF parameters are displayed and edited within this form 170 Chapter 3 NETWORK NETWORK II 5 gt w A al a B Name SEEK TIME ss sS e E Aa al SDF Type UNIFORM The SDF Form 171 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 gt SDF Values w El Bl hl o TT Ad Aj Comn LOWER BOUND 200 UPPER BOUND 1200 SDF Ty Example SDF Attributes Form The following types of SDF parameters may be found on the Set Attributes forms of various SDF types Stream The stream is an integer value that must be in the range from 1 to 999 If you leave the stream in the NR state a value will be chosen b
91. on the Destination double dots button If the destination does not exist in the model a new destination will be created You will be asked to select the destination type PE Route or Destination Mix when you click on the OK button 127 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Echo PE List You may enter the name of an echo PE list directly or choose from the list of available destinations by clicking on the Echo PE List double dots button Resume Flag A Message Instruction s Resume Flag will be set to YES when this check box is selected Queue Flag A Message Instruction s Queue Flag will be set to YES when this check box is selected Continue Message Flag A Message Instruction s Continue Message Flag will be set to YES when this check box 1s selected Inhibit Msg to Self A Message Instructions Inhibit Message to Self Flag will be set to YES when this check box is selected Inhibit Msg Delivery A Message Instruction s Inhibit Message Delivery Flag will be set to YES when this check box is selected Allowed TD LAN You may use the Allowed TD LAN List to add and delete allowed TDs LANs for the Message Instruction The creation deletion and positioning of entries in the Allowed TD LAN List is controlled by the Add Cut and Move buttons to the right of the list 3 5 2 1 2 Processing Instruction Form 128 Chapter 3 NETWORK Processing Element Name OFFICE 1 Quantity f Time Units MICROSECONDS 3
92. one Processing Element representing the microprocessor one Transfer Device modeling the internal bus and one Storage Device modeling the disk drive 11 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual The software components of a system are characterized in NETWORK II 5 as modules instruction mixes macro instructions and files Modules direct a NETWORK II 5 simulation by using hardware components as required to process read write and send information through a network Instruction mixes and macro instructions support modules by making random and or repetitive simulation tasks easier to control and maintain 2 1 2 Processing Element Overview A Processing Element abbreviated PE is used to model anything in your simulation that executes instructions or makes decisions A PE might be used to simulate a bus controller a display a sensor or an entire arithmetic logic unit A Processing Element is characterized by its Basic Cycle Time Instruction Repertoire Message List Size I O Setup Time Time Slice Interrupt Overhead and Input Controller The Instructions listed in the PE s Instruction Repertoire define what a Processing Element can do Each instruction in the Instruction Repertoire is defined by using a generalized instruction building block The defined instruction may be as detailed as desired There are four kinds of generalized instruction building blocks they are 1 Processing Instructions 2 Read Write Instructions 3 Message Instruc
93. per Word The cycles per word must be an integer value Words per Block The words per block must be an integer value Word Overhead The word overhead parameter must be specified as a real value Block Overhead The block overhead parameter must be specified as a real value Min Bits to Send The minimum bits per transfer min bits to send parameter must be specified as an integer value Separate Blocks A TD s Separate Blocks flag is set to YES when this check box is selected Connection List The Connection List displays all of the hardware data structures Pes Gateways and Storage Devices that are connected to the TD Use the Add Cut and Move buttons to add connections cut names from the Connection List and to position names in the Connection List The Edit button is only selectable if the TD protocol is Priority Token Ring because connections of a TD having this protocol are given additional attributes The Key button will let you change the Key values of the connections 3 5 4 1 Protocol Specific Attributes Select the Protocol Attributes button to edit protocol specific attributes A protocol must have been selected for the TD before attempting to edit the attributes 140 Chapter 3 NETWORK l Transfer Device ie Name OFFICE LINK e COLLISION B Protocol Values Verify Time Units acos CONUS SECONDS _ Block Error Cyto Mi Library Collision Protocol Bi Cy Retry Interval C Standard kad
94. set to YES The Interruptibility flag takes precedence over Time Slicing Statistics on the interruption will be reported in both the Module and the Processing Element reports see Section 2 2 1 for a full description of what happens during an interrupt A Module may monitor the value of a Semaphore during its operation by using a Semaphore Status Requirement based on a Semaphore s state SET or RESET a Semaphore s count or both The Module will interrupt itself whenever the Semaphore does not have the required setting When the Semaphore regains the required setting the Module will resume according to standard interrupt resume rules The Run Until condition is similar to the Run When condition except that if a Module fails any of its Run Until conditions the Module is first interrupted to give up its resources and then 61 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual this copy of the Module is deleted from the simulation Statistics on this action will be found in the reports Run When and Run Until Semaphore conditions differ from Wait For and Chain If Semaphore conditions in that they are checked after a Module has its preconditions met Wait For and Chain If conditions are only checked before a Module preconditions are met A Module may have any desired combination of these run wait and chain conditions including none A Run Until Semaphore condition has an additional attribute Completed If Run Cancelled This attribute if set to YES means
95. standard SIMSCRIPT II 5 error report called a traceback If this happens load the input description into NETWORK verify the model and correct any noted problems If the execution attempt still produces a traceback please contact CACI Products Company customer support 331 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual CHAPTER 10 TRAFLINK III 10 1 INTRODUCTION 10 1 1 Overview TRAFLINK III provides the link between NETWORK II 5 and other software packages It allows you to import network topology information and traffic traces into NETWORK II 5 and use the developed model as a foundation for what if scenarios TRAFLINK formats and filters the data gathered from network management tools and network analyzers into information which can reduce the development time of your NETWORK II 5 model TRAFLINK III enables you to represent your existing network topology as a NETWORK I 5 model Existing Network topology can be captured by network management tools such as SPECTRUM NetView 6000 OpenView and PolyCenter TRAFLINK extracts Processing Element PE and Transmission Device TD information from this and generates a NETWORK II 5 model automatically The PE and TD parameters can be modified once they are in the NETWORK II 5 environment To represent your network further you can also use TRAFLINK to add real traffic to your network model This is achieved by converting traffic captured by network analyzers and or network analysis software into a f
96. that a cancelled Module is complete and therefore chains to its successors if any and updates the completed Module statistics If Completed If Run Cancelled NO this Module will not chain to successors if cancelled and will not update the completed Module statistics A Module may be defined such that more than one copy of it exists in the simulation at the same time For example more than one copy of the Module might be queued up for the same PE or different copies of the same Module might be simultaneously running on different PEs The number of copies specification is called the Concurrent Limit The default Concurrent Limit is one This limit includes all copies of this Module whether executing queued or interrupted When a Module is scheduled the Concurrent Limit is compared to the current number of copies of a particular Module to see whether the limit is exceeded If the limit is exceeded the new copy of the Module fails the concurrent limit test The failed copy of the Module is removed from the simulation a warning message is issued and failure statistics are updated The preconditions of a Module determine when this test is made For a Module with an Iteration Period the test is made at the scheduled iteration time regardless of any other preconditions For a Module with Message Requirements but without an Iteration Period the test is performed when all of its Message Requirements are met regardless of any other
97. the Connection List of a TD LAN To edit the Gateway speed parameters select a name in the list Gateway Speed The Gateway speed determines how the processing overhead message reformatting overhead and buffer capacity are applied to each TD LAN connection If the Gateway is single speed the overhead and buffer parameters are the same for all TD LAN connections If the Gateway is multiple speed the overhead and buffer parameters may be specified individually for each LAN connection To edit the Gateway speed 136 Chapter 3 NETWORK parameters click on a name in the TD LAN Connection List Alternatively for a single speed Gateway you may edit the Gateway speed parameters by clicking on the double dots button next to the Single Speed radio button 137 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 3 5 3 1 Gateway Speed Parameters Form NETWORK II 5 v e Gateway 4 Name GW 1 IX Include in Plot File di Comm _ mm Gateway Speed TD LAN Connection ALL CONNECTIONS Cancel Pi ae Buffer Capacity 30000000 000000 BITS EE Processing Multiplier 0 000000 MICZBIT Processing Additive 1 000000 MIC Message Multiplier 1 000000 Message Additive 0 000000 BITS b b k Select TD LAN name in list to change Gateway speed parameters The Gateway Speed Parameters Form Buffer Capacity The Buffer Capacity must be a real number The unit of the Buffer Capacity is bits Processing Multiplier The Processing Multipli
98. the scale below 1 decreases the vertical TD icon size Rotate The rotation controls the angle at which a TD icon is displayed The rotation value may range from 359 9 degrees to 359 9 degrees The default rotation is 0 degrees 185 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Add Segments By selecting the Add Segments button you may add line segments to the TD icon After selecting this command a ribbon cursor that is attached to the last TD segment point appears Move the cursor to a new position and click once to anchor a new segment You may create as many segments as you need To return control to the TD LAN Draw Options Form double click the mouse at the same location The Automatic Draw Type of the Transfer Device LAN will be changed to user when you add a segment Delete Options To remove all or part of the graphical description of a TD LAN select the Delete Options button Options are available using this command to delete the Entire TD LAN the Name label the MSG File label connections and the last segment of the TD LAN icon 3 7 LIBRARY NETWORK provides a library command for PEs TDs SDs and Modules Each of the attribute forms of these data types will permit access to the library command by selecting the Library button You may save data elements to a library file examine and edit the attributes of items saved in library files and load the attributes of library items into your current model When the library command is called NET
99. to work on a model called casel net type network casel net at the command prompt Refer to the appropriate chapter in this manual for further details on each program At program startup the NETWORK II 5 programs reference the n25dev cfg file to obtain program operating environment information default user directory icon directory date format etc This file is located in the same directory as the executables for NETWORK II 5 s Please read the N25DEV CFG appendix for further information A simulation may be submitted as a batch run To do this set the simulation run parameters for your model using network Make sure you set the Batch Flag to YES in the Define Controls menu Then at your command line prompt type network input file gt dialog file Your simulation will then run as a batch job The Input file does not require a file suffix The dialog file will contain the standard output and progress dialog from a network simulation run Omit the gt dialog file if you would like to see a simulation progress report in the window from which the program was invoked 361 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual APPENDIX B N25DEV CFG The file N25DEV CFG is a text file which establishes the operating environment for each NETWORK II 5 program The N25DEV CFG file may be modified using a text editor When a NETWORK II 5 program begins execution it attempts to read this file from the same directory where the executable was found
100. to a Storage Device the SD is displayed with the color of the PE The file name is displayed in place of the SD name during a read or write During an animation an icon may also be displayed to indicate data being carried over a Transfer Device When a PE begins a Message Instruction or a Read Write Instruction a solid sphere in the highlight color travels along the connection from the PE to the TD A similar icon is next displayed traveling from the TD along the connection to the destination PE or to a Storage Device When the Message or Read Write Instruction completes a hollow sphere is then displayed along the same paths as the solid icon You may select if one both or neither of these icons are to be displayed during the animation The Animation Menu form also has a speed control to allow you to adjust the speed of these icons NETWORK adds a display box at the bottom of your screen during an animation If you choose to display trace messages the trace messages are shown in this box If no trace messages are available or you choose not to display any NETWORK updates the current animation time in this box Animation parameters may be changed during the animation by selecting the Animation Options menu Options button When this is done the Animation Menu form will be displayed After you are satisfied with the values on the form select OK to resume the animation Selecting the CANCEL button will resume the animation without changing a
101. which did not have a valid destination As a result the Message Instruction was cancelled Check that at least one PE connected to the TD has a name that is matched by the wild card destination 15 Destination Mix exceeds Maximum Recursion Level WARNING At 12 4564500 SEC module MOD A called instruction SEND MSG on pe PE A which called a destination mix that did not resolve to a pe name in 100 levels Instruction execution aborted If a Message Instruction searches through a Destination Mix 100 times before finding a destination PE a runtime warning is generated It is likely that an infinite loop has been encountered The Message Instruction is then skipped 16 Invalid Message ECHO WARNING At 65 093303 SEC TRANSMIT MESSAGE tried to echo a message from pe MY PE to pe YOUR PE but no td connects these devices Instruction aborted A Message Instruction attempted to echo a received message However no Transfer Device provided a connection between the source PE and the destination PE This error only occurs if the original message arrived via the Global Message List 17 Echoing a previously echoed Message WARNING At 240550000 SEC module REPLY called instruction SEND REPLY which echoes the message PROCESSED DATA on pe SERVER This message has already been echoed Echoing an echoed message is not allowed Instruction cancelled
102. will resume with the next instruction in its Instruction List 2 2 1 1 Input Controller Every PE may have an Input Controller If a PE has an Input Controller then it may accept messages and execute instructions simultaneously Otherwise the PE must be in a non busy state to accept messages Messages may be received in parallel if more than one Transfer Device is sending a message to this PE After a message has been received it is put on the PE s Received Message List where it may trigger the execution of a Module A PE with an Input Controller which is receiving a message and is not executing a Module will be listed as idle A PE without an Input Controller must work the entire amount of time it takes to receive the message from the Transfer Device The PE cannot execute a Module in parallel with the receipt of a message A PE without an Input Controller that is executing a Module when another PE attempts to send a message to it over a Transfer Device will block the incoming message thereby blocking the sending PE and the connecting Transfer Device The sending PE and Transfer Device will remain blocked until the receiving PE becomes idle having finished executing its scheduled Modules A PE without an Input Controller will be listed as busy while receiving a message 2 2 1 2 Keep Blocks Separate The Keep Blocks Separate flag of a Processing Element is used to control the way in which messages are received and assembled by a PE When a P
103. 0 TERRUPTIBILITY FLAG NO ONCURRENT LIMIT 1 STRUCTION LIST EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 DISPLAY MESSAGE EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 STRING COMPLETE EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 RESET TIME THE MSG BUFFER STRING ANDED PREDECESSOR LIST CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER ME FE see ree 0 INTERRUPTIBILITY FLAG NO CONCURRENT LIMIT 1 INSTRUCTION LIST MSG NOT AVAILABLE DISPLAY MESSAGE xj 0 0 HAHU UTE A TOTAL OF 1 FFT PREDECESSOR LIST ET DATA F SUCCESSORS HAI O REPLACE DATA E FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT ees 0 INTERRUPTIBILITY FLAG NO CONCURRENT LIMIT 1 ITERATION PERIOD 50000 MIC ALLOWED PROCESSORS PE 1 U E INSTRUCTION LIST EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 SET TIME THE FLIGHT STRING EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT ANDED SUCCESSORS CHAIN TO RADAR PROCESSING E G DATA Stony T 0 INTERRUPTIBILITY FLAG NO CONCURRENT LIMIT 1 ALLOWED PROCESSORS PE 2 REQUIRED MESSAGE STATUS WAIT FOR RADAR DATA AVAILABL El The Network Description File continued 312 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation
104. 0 Invalid use of Message Linear SDF WARNING At 000985098 SEC Message Linear distribution LIN DIST 2 is not used in a module or by an instruction called by a module which received a message An instruction which used a type SDF was called by a Module that did not have either a Required Message or a predecessor with Required Messages A value of zero will be returned by the SDF and this runtime warning will be generated 31 Invalid use of Key Linear SDF 327 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual WARNING At 087500000 SEC Key Linear distribution LAN DIST 3 used by a TD without a proper connection A Key Linear type SDF was referenced by a parameter other than a Transfer Device attribute The Key Linear SDF uses the key values associated with a TD s connection list for the x parameter in an Ax B calculation A value of zero will be returned by the SDF 32 Invalid use of File Linear SDF WARNING At 000356877 SEC File Linear Distribution SDF Bl not used by a module or an instruction called by a module after it read a file An instruction which used a File Linear SDF was called by a Module that neither executed a Read Instruction previously nor was chained to by a predecessor which executed a Read Instruction As a result a runtime warning was generated A File Linear distribution uses a file length for the x parameter in an Ax B calculation A value of zero wil
105. 0 or less For all numeric responses there is an absolute maximum value that the host computer can represent For an integer value the maximum is generally slightly more than 2 billion For a double precision value the maximum is approximately 1 3e 38 Any value above the absolute maximum will be rejected 9 2 VERIFY The second line of defense against model errors is the verify command The Verify command checks the model for completeness consistency and logic errors Before attempting to simulate a model the model should be verified to ensure that it does not contain errors If you do not run verify it will be run automatically when you select Analysis Start Simulation 315 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual The output of the Verify command is a listing which describes the types of errors encountered in your model Also verification of individual classes of model components 1s available The Verify command s error messages are self explanatory They are built phrase by phrase based on the error found not selected from a table Therefore a discussion of them will not be presented here A discussion of the Verify command s options is presented in Chapter 3 Aoinmpad THE I GEH TT ie Cdi Search Help PROCESSION ELEMENT UERTFECETION HES MICE TESTA TIO AAN PATA mL LIE i There is no TE or LAH conrected be both Enda PE and to Ch WESTIHaTIGH F 3 ami HEMMER 11 5 ls mable te construct a RATE liradeq these Deo PADEES MO E
106. 070 OOO O OO OOO OF O O O OO 0 00 OO OGOGO O 0 0 0 0 0 10 NA ANN NILO M 000T10N00S1L wo Zz E a E L op E Q 0 a AG O aa O Of e1 A uN ne S GH amp O O O oo Oo Hd Ay 1 HI O O CO Oo Oso HH zZH Oo E ME To AE Oro O H HH Dp OO O OO El A ANAM TY O BH H amp B mw OO CO moO OC Oo CO CO OC So H AAB aaa wn A Graph Data File Done The Done button removes the plot display and returns control to the Plot Menu form 268 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation CHAPTER 8 A COMPLETE SIMULATION 8 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides a complete example of building a model and running a simulation using NETWORK II 5 From a description of an example system you are shown how to create a Network Description using and then how to run a simulation The Network Description file for this problem is included with the standard distribution package as CHAPTER8 NET 8 1 1 Overview Section 8 2 describes the system to be modeled and describes how the NETWORK II 5 data entities were selected for the system components Section 8 3 gives step by step instructions on how to construct some of the major components of the model Section 8 4 explains how to run a simulation using the newly constructed model Section 8 5 lists the resulting output reports 8 2 PROBLEM STATEMENT This example measures the time allocated to each function navigation radar data processing communications and self test in a simple flig
107. 1 SEC the number of Message Delivery Report combinations of message source and destination are greater than the maximum of 999 Maximum is a Global Flag which can be set to a higher number Additional combinations ignored To limit the length of output reports and minimize statistics that might not be of value the NETWORK limits the number of unique Message Text Source PE and Destination 330 Chapter 9 Debugging PE combinations used in the Message Delivery Report A Destination PE can be an intermediate PE or the final destination PE 43 Max Module Messages Global Flag exceeded WARNING At 3 021290 SEC Module PROCESS DATA REQUESTS has inherited more than 100 messages It is probably is in a loop of modules Increase the global flag MAX MODULE MESSAGES or set the predecessor module s INHIBIT MESSAGE NHERITANCE to YES to avoid this condition The number of messages which a module may inherit from a predecessor is established by the Max Module Messages Flag Messages in excess of the limit will be lost In other words the ones most recently received will be lost The maximum number of messages that a module may inherit is set by selecting Define Controls from the menubar System Runtime Warnings 44 Traceback Under rare circumstances bad input may cause an execution problem too severe for NETWORK to handle As a result the simulation will abort and produce a
108. 244069 000 3900106 000 STD DEV TIME 0 0 RESTARTED INTERRUPTS 0 0 AVG INTERRUPTED TIME 0 0 MAX INTERRUPTED TIME 0 0 STD DEV TIME 0 0 Stop the Simulation A The simulation may be terminated by issuing the Abort command TEXTWORK will confirm that you really wish to end the program before terminating The Simulation Report File LIS and the Simulation Plot File PIN are produced and will contains statistics and events from the start of the simulation or the Reset Time up to the time the simulation was canceled 209 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Continue Resume Halt trace Snapshot Other report Abort C R H S O A gt a Do you really want to Abort now Y N 2y 4 3 5 Runtime Warnings Runtime Warnings notify you that a potential error has occurred in the simulation If a runtime warning occurs and you have elected to send runtime warnings to your screen the warning message will be displayed immediately You will then have the opportunity to generate reports and to direct the destination of future runtime warnings A complete list of runtime warnings is included in Chapter 9 WARNING At 0 00308989 SEC module TEST has failed the iteration concurrent limit test a runtime warning has been encountered Would you like to stop at every runtime message for a chance to interact with NETWORK II 5 Y N ABORT E Future Messages TEXTWORK will allow you to direct Run
109. 3 The Display After a TD LAN Move 3 3 4 Scaling the Display The Scale command allows you to change the diagram magnification and is invoked by selecting the Scale button on the toolbar which will display the Scale Form The Scale form has a set of radio buttons which will allow you to change the diagram scale in increments of 10 The diagram scale ranges from the platform minimum Windows and UNIX 1 OS 2 DOS 10 to 100 A value box is also provided for fine tuning of the diagram scale The default scale is 40 percent To choose the diagram scale click on the appropriate radio button and click on OK 91 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 gt Scale Menu Scale Factor C 10 i 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Percent CIS II IN IA a a I e gt o The Scale Selection Form 3 3 5 User Created Icons You may create your own hardware icons using the SIMGRAPHICS II editor After you create an icon it must be included in the proper NETWORK II 5 graphics library file to be available for your models Refer to Appendix G for details on running the SIMGRAPHICS Il editor and saving your new icons 3 3 6 Managing Complex Displays Large models may become quite cluttered and confusing on the display especially if the diagram is scaled to view all model components For highly meshed networks the topology may also become quite messy To produce a more coherent network layout it is often helpful to hide
110. 3 1 1 Module Preconditions for further details on the use of Semaphore counters Scheduling a task by a Semaphore differs from scheduling by message in that 1 Scheduling is instantaneous no transfer time 2 All Modules monitoring the Semaphore will immediately take action messages start only one Module 3 Run When and Run Until Semaphore conditions may stop an executing Module messages are strictly preconditions 4 Semaphore actions may be timed Simulations which require message and Semaphore capabilities can easily use both Sending a message to properly load a Transfer Device and then setting a Semaphore to schedule many Modules is very reasonable Also setting a Semaphore when a message is sent and resetting it when it is received is a common way to gather statistics on message traffic see Section 6 4 6 for an explanation of how Semaphores are used to measure response time From the top level of NETWORK you can select a semaphore using the Define Semaphore command to edit its parameters in the Semaphore form On this form you can give the semaphore a comment and set the initial status initial count Maximum Pending Responses and the Inhibit Response Time flag Every semaphore has an initial status and an initial count The default is an initial status of RESET and an initial count of zero Setting Inhibit Response Time to YES for Semaphores which are not used to measure response times will speed the execution of your
111. 5 User s Manual HE TYSQHE 115 fae da Delos Display Vert ee Mela Dispioy Madulca Bieri Era ld IWORK IL5 Plat Presse Report En AE iia A mT ILE WFC EFIE i E OFIC Selecting Animation from the Menubar 6 3 1 The Animation Menu Form The Animation Menu Form is used to control your animation display All of the fields found on this form are described in this section in the order that they appear on the form from top to bottom fsimalien bios c D Dinga Siap Dparaian Siep Er Time C E lag Tias 0 EE Tisi Tima 0 E HIL E kiras Dooma a Gl ol Taia E kios loa ot End od Drain The Animation Menu form 254 Chapter 6 Model Animation Display Trace Messages If Display Trace Messages is checked any Trace Messages found in the simulation Report File will be displayed during the animation at the time that the corresponding event is displayed These Trace Messages will be displayed in the box added to the bottom of your screen for the animation If Display Trace Messages is not checked or no Trace Messages are available NETWORK will update the animation time in a the box at the bottom of your screen Single Step Operation If Single Step Operation is checked the animation will pause until you click on the Step option of the Animation Options dialog box If Single Step Operation is not checked the Delay Time is the time interval used between updat
112. 5 User s Manual percent since only 1 2 of a block is being sent If Scale Error NO the probability of error would be fixed at 02 per cent per block The Block Retry Time specifies how long a PE is to wait before retransmitting a block lost due to a transmission error or message buffer overflow It is only used if this TD s Separate Blocks flag is set to YES By default this attribute is zero and the PE will retransmit the lost block immediately 2 2 2 3 Transfer Time Example An example computation of the time needed to transfer bits over a Transfer Device follows To transfer 56 bits over a Transfer Device with 9600 baud transfer rate Basic Cycle Time 104 mic serial bus Bits Per Cycle 1 7 bits word Cycles Per Word 7 5 words block Words Per Block 5 1 bit per word overhead Word Overhead Time 104 mic 1 word per block overhead Block Overhead Time 8 x 104 832 mic Number of cycles bits to transmit bits per cycle 56 1 56 cycles Number of words number of cycles cycles per word 56 7 8 words Number of blocks number of words words per block 8 5 1 6 which rounds up to 2 blocks Transmission time number of blocks x block overhead time number of words x word overhead time number of cycles x bus cycle time 2x 8 x 104 34 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 8 x 104 56 x 104 1 664 832 5 824 8 320 microseconds 2 2 2 4 FCFS First Come First Served P
113. AD OVERHEAD TIME PER WORD ACCESS 0 MIC WRITE OVERHEAD TIME PER WORD ACCESS 0 MIC BITS PER WORD 8 BITS WORDS PER BLOCK 256 OVERHEAD TIME PER BLOCK ACCESS 0 MIC READ ACCESS DELAY 0 MIC WRITE ACCESS DELAY 0 MIC CAPACITY 1 0000000000 032 NUMBER OF PORTS 1 AME ME T LOCATION 44 053 2 978 STYLE COLOR 1 8 1 00 0 1 2 50 2 20 1 00 ICON tapeunit icn READ WORD ACCESS TIME 2 MIC WRITE WORD ACCESS TIME 2 MIC READ OVERHEAD TIME PER WORD ACCESS 0 MIC WRITE OVERHEAD TIME PER WORD ACCESS 0 MIC BITS PER WORD 8 BITS WORDS PER BLOCK 1024 OVERHEAD TIME PER BLOCK ACCESS SEEK TIME READ ACCESS DELAY 0 MIC WRITE ACCESS DELAY 0 MIC AE The Network Description File continued 311 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual ite ll A CAPACITY 1000000 NUMBER OF PORTS 1 MODULES rea TYPE MODULE E CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER ee 0 INTERRUPTIBILITY FLAG NO CONCURRENT LIMIT 1 ITERATION PERIOD 120000 MIC ALLOWED PROCESSORS PE 1 INSTRUCTION LIST EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 SE TIME THE MSG BUFFER STRING EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 GET MESSAGE BUFFER EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER STATISTICAL SUCCESSORS CHOOSE AS SUCCESSOR 90 0 CHOOSE AS SUCCESSOR 10 0 ME DISPLAY MESSAGE RIORITY
114. AN implementations in NETWORK II 5 A LAN is really just a standard Transfer Device with its parameters automatically filled in to match industry standard LAN implementations A LAN connects as many Processing Elements Storage Devices or Gateways as desired Traffic on the LAN is in the form of messages or files A LAN operates identically to a TD when the TD is specified with the same parameters as the LAN Therefore refer to the relevant TD section for the details on how a LAN operates Every LAN has a Name Implementation Connection List To specify a LAN all you need to do is give it a name select an implementation from the list of implementations presented and draw the connections The following implementations are included in this release Collision LAN Implementations Ethernet IEEE 802 3 CSMA CD 1OBASE5 IEEE 802 3 CSMA CD 10BASE2 IEEE 802 3 CSMA CD 10BASET IEEE 802 3 CSMA CD 1BASES STAR IEEE 802 3 TOP 51 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Token Ring LAN Implementations IEEE 802 5 4Mb IEEE 802 5 16Mb FDDI Token Bus LAN Implementations IEEE 802 4 1Mb IEEE 802 4 5Mb IEEE 802 4 MAP 10Mb In addition to the above LAN implementations three other LAN implementations are available User Defined Collision User Defined Token Bus and User Defined Token Ring Although these three LAN implementations have predefined parameters they can also be customized by changing any of the basic LAN parameters The other LAN implementations
115. CON PC CEL 5 981 E COLOR 14 6 ICN BASIC CYCLE TIME 1 0 MIC INPUT CON ROLLER YES INSTRUCTION REPERTOIRE INSTRUC NAME NO OP 2 269 ION TYPE PROCESSING 30 970 0 216 Sample Input Playback Report Chapter 5 Simulation Report File The Input Playback Report is not normally needed but it does give you the opportunity to view your model exactly as it has been saved Also when SIMWORK or TEXTWORK find any Pass One errors error messages will be placed in the Input Playback Report beneath the lines containing the errors 5 2 2 The Default Playback Report The Default Playback Report displays the information contained in the internal model database after the model has been loaded Any parameters added or default terms such as ALL and ANY replaced will have their new values displayed in this listing This listing is also not normally needed It is useful if you want to inspect the defaults inserted by the simulation program into the model Default values are in some cases inserted at input time and in others signified by the omission of a field in the Network Description File For example in NETWORK if you leave a stream parameter in the NR No Response state the Network Description file will not contain an entry and the simulation program will automatically assign a default value As another example in older versions of NETWO
116. D a timer is started As long as the PE continually uses except for Semaphore instructions the allotted TD with an unbroken sequence of instructions it maintains exclusive use of the TD so long as it is still within its allowed slot If a PE s Slot Time expires and it is still using the TD it will finish its current instruction before control passes to the next PE along the ring Slot Time may be either a real number or a statistical distribution If a Key Linear type statistical distribution is used the key value associated with each PE in the Connection list will be used as x in the Ax B computation This allows giving a different Slot Time to each PE on a Transfer Device The Token Passing Time may be NR No Response a real number or a reference to a statistical distribution If set to NR when a PE relinquishes a TD it is immediately allocated to the next PE on the ring with a request If there are no pending requests the TD will be idle If a PE has many items to send but its Slot Time expires it will 39 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual immediately continue with a new Slot Time if there are no other PEs with a pending request If a Token Passing Time is specified it will give the delay in passing the token from PE to PE If there are no pending requests the token will still circulate around the ring at the stated rate When a PE requests a TD it must wait until the token arrives While Token Passing Time adds realism to a
117. D Connection T oK Comment Processing Element Gateway Connection Name Protocol OFFICE 1 Time Units Time Units MICROSECONDS I Cycle Time Bits Per Cycle Synchronous Allocation 12 000 MIC i Cycles Per Wi Minimum Synchronous Priority 2 E Words Per Blo X Set All Connections Word Overhe lt 4 143 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Priority Token Ring TD Connection Form 144 Chapter 3 NETWORK Aloha Retry Interval The retry interval must be specified as a statistical distribution function Either enter a SDF name in the text box or click on the double dots button to select from a list of existing SDFs Automatic Retry An Aloha TD s Automatic Retry Flag will be set to YES when this check box is selected 3 5 4 2 Block Error Form You may set several values related to transmission errors for the TD To do this select the Block Error button and then make changes on the Block Error Form Transfer Device Name LINK comment PRIORITY TOKEN RING 2 Protocol Yalues Error i i CENTRAL OFFICE 0 Time Units a M I Cycle Time o1 00 Library Bits Per Corte fi T_Senarate Blocks Graphics Cycles Pe LC E Words Pet Time Units MICROSECONDS 3 Word Ove Block Retry Time fas mic 4 Block Ove Block Error Probability jo22 Min Bits tc Error Stream NR cose A The Block Error Form Block Retry Time The block retry time para
118. DIT CUT and MOVE buttons These buttons will allow you to edit a list item EDIT display an attributes form for a list item or edit the list itself MOVE change an items position in the list or do both CUT remove an item from the list and from the model To deselect a list item that has been highlighted simply click on it again and it is no longer selected highlighted To retrieve an entry which had been previously cut click on the UNCUT button that appears next to the list box If no items appropriate to the list had been deleted the UNCUT button will remain deactivated it cannot be selected and appears grayed out 80 Chapter 3 NETWORK Buttons Buttons are primarily used to transfer control from one form to another or to initiate an operation Examples of buttons include the OK CANCEL and RETURN buttons or the Set Button double dots Selecting OK means that all of the values appearing on the form have been accepted If CANCEL is selected any changes made to values on the form will be rejected The primary function of the Set Button is to enter the name of a Statistical Distribution Function SDF in an attribute field e g to enter a distribution for the Iteration Period of a Module The Set Button may also be used to display an additional form in which values may be presented and edited Text Boxes Value Boxes Text and value boxes display current text and numeric attributes and allow the entry of new text or val
119. Delivery Flag YES the Processing Element will execute the Message Instruction but no message will actually be delivered to the Destination s upon completion of the instruction When this flag NO a message is delivered to the Destination s as controlled by the Queue Flag The time required to execute a Message Instruction is not affected by the Inhibit Message Delivery Flag A Destination indicates where to send the Message Text A Destination may be the name of a PE the name of a Route the name of a Destination Mix the reserved phrase GLOBAL MESSAGE LIST the reserved word ECHO the reserved word NEXT a name using a wild card 27 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Most Message Instructions will send a message to a Destination using a Transfer Device This device must connect the sender and receiver either directly or indirectly To transfer a message over more than one Transfer Device from source to destination requires use of a Route A Route defines a path from source to destination The path consists of a list of PE names with an optional allowed TD list for each PE Routes are covered as a separate topic in Section Routes Sending a message to the Destination GLOBAL MESSAGE LIST does not send it to any PE at all Instead it sends the message to a phantom list that all PEs have access to Since it is not sending a message to an actual PE this instruction does not use a Transfer Device and therefore executes
120. Do Not Modify File selection to model updating records in a database If you write more bits to a File than it currently contains and you selected Do Not Modify File the File size is set to the actual number of bits written If a Read Instruction attempts to access a file which is not currently resident in the Storage Device a runtime warning message is generated and the instruction continues as if the file exists General Storage is a special type of file It has special characteristics and was intended to be used for modeling a Storage Device where explicitly defined files are not used General Storage can best be considered a bit bucket from which anyone may pour or draw bits up to the number of bits the bucket contains The special characteristic of General Storage is that more than one user may access it at one time Other than this special characteristic General Storage is treated like any other file It may be created by NETWORK or a Write Instruction and will be deleted from a Storage Device whenever its size becomes zero General Storage may coexist with other named files within the same Storage Device 2 3 5 Messages Messages are commonly used to schedule and coordinate tasks A message is sent from one Processing Element to another over a Transfer Device as the result of a Message Instruction When a message is received it is always filed in the receiving PE s Received Message List Once in that list Modules with that message
121. E Zz D Il o n Y H A Gs n Sample Default Listing 218 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File 5 3 1 Narrative Trace Reports The Narrative Trace Reports allow you to trace the flow of events for the Processing Elements Instructions Transfer Devices Storage Devices Modules and external traffic in your simulation Model components may be selected for tracing individually by entity class or you may trace every event Select ALL The narrative trace is a description of the events that occur during the simulation These messages will first list the time at which the event occurred during the simulation The first trace message written at a given time during the simulation will begin with At and then the time of the event Subsequent messages listed for the same time begin with gt followed by the time of the event Because these messages are self explanatory a complete list is not presented In fact because these messages are dynamically generated based on the current simulation state a complete list is probably impossible A narrative trace message will be generated under the following conditions Processing Element PE starts a module PE starts an instruction PE considers a module for execution PE is interrupted PE finishes a module PE finishes an instruction Instruction Instruction begins execution Instruction is interrupted resumed Instruction finishes execution
122. E MSG NOT DISPLAY MESSAGE BUFFER AVAILABLE ee PE PE 1 PE 1 PE 1 2 ETED EXECUTIONS 8 7 1 e ATIONS DUE TO CONCURRENT LIMIT 0 0 0 RUN UNTIL SEMAPHORES 0 0 0 ir PRECONDITION TIME 9 7 1 AVG PRECONDITION TIME 0 0 0 MAX PRECONDITION TIME 0 0 0 MIN PRECONDITION TIME 0 0 0 STD DEV TIME 0 0 0 eo EXECUTION TIME 3493 327 0 87 000 AX EXECUTIO IME T1623 920 0 87 000 IN EXECUTIO IME 625 250 0 87 000 STD DEV TIME 3768 855 0 0 RESTARTED INTERRUPTS 0 0 0 AVG INTERRUPTED TIME 0 0 0 AX INTERRUPTED TIME 0 Or 0 STD DEV TIME 0 0 0 Simulation Report File continued 299 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual CACI NETWORK 11 5 R EL EASE opat NAM H PE kea EXECUTIONS CANCELLATIONS DUE TO CONCURRENT LIMIT RUN UNTIL SEMAPHORES NUM PRECONDITION TIME AVG PRECONDITION TIME AX PRECONDITION TIME IN PRECONDITION TIME STD DEV TIME AVG EXECUTION TIME AX EXECUTION TIME IN EXECUTION TIME STD DEV TIME eee INTERRUPTS AVG INTERRUPTED TIME AX INTERRUPTED TIME STD DEV TIME A SAMPL 11 09 04 0 1 1996 PROBLEM COMPL FROM D MOD FOR NI E 14 35 41 WORK II 5 ULE STA 0 TO 1 ALL TIMES REPORT FET PE 2
123. E with Keep Blocks Separate NO receives a message that arrives in blocks the blocks will be combined as they are received to form a single message If Keep Blocks Separate YES the blocks 18 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 will not be combined but remain available as distinct blocks in the received message list of the PE Keep Blocks Separate YES will guarantee that a Module with a Wait For Block Message Status Requirement will respond to each individual block that is received for a message 2 2 1 3 Queue Flag The Queue Flag of a Processing Element is used to control the saving of messages in the Received Message List If Queue Flag NO whenever a message arrives at the PE if a message of the same name already is stored in the Received Message List the new message is discarded If Queue Flag Yes duplicate messages will be stored in the Received Message List if room is available Message Instructions also have a Queue Flag to control saving messages in a destination PE but the Queue Flag of the receiving PE takes precedence over the Queue Flag of the Message Instruction that originates the message Thus if a Message Instruction with Queue Flag YES sends a copy of a message currently queued in a PE with Queue Flag NO the incoming message will not be stored in the Received Message List 2 2 1 4 Processing Instructions Processing Instructions are used to model instructions which execute on a Processing Element without
124. ELIVERY TIME 533 000 0 0 AX DELIVERY TIME 533 000 0 0 IN DELIVERY TIME 533 000 0 0 STD DEV TIME 0 0 0 MESSAGE NAME RADAR DATA PROCESSED a PE PE 2 kara ATION PE PE 1 A SENT 20 AVG DELIVERY TIME 208 805 AX DELIVERY TIME 1373 700 IN DELIVERY TIME 104 000 STD DEV TIME 322 132 Simulation Report File continued 305 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual AN A a a e a A CACI NETWORK II 5 RELEASE 11 09 04 01 1996 14 35 41 A SAMPLE PROBLEM FOR NETWORK II 5 SNAPSHOT REPORT AT 1 SECONDS pe PE 1 is BUSY executing instruction GET MESSAGE BUFFER resident module is CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER 9 it holds transfer device BUS 1 and storage device MEM 1 and file GENERAL STORAGE E 2 is IDLE oO FU Pp les BUS 1 is BUSY assigned to pe PE 1 td BUS 2 is IDLI td BUS 3 is IDLI 3 El semaphore TIME HE FLIGHT STRING is RESET count is 0 semaphore TIME HE MSG BUFFER STRING is SET count is 0 semaphore TIME HE DATA STRING is RESET count is 0 sd RADAR DISH is IDLE and has 1 000000E 032 bits available file GENERAL STORAGE is IDLE and contains 60000 bits sd MEM 1 is BUSY and has 916000 bits available and is now serving pe PE 1 file GENERAL STORAGE is BUSY and contains 60000 bits
125. ERE HEAD PHSTAUCTISH GEE HESSAGE BUFF EB ss FREIRS There are mo walid ALLIER Tis LAs aut pf the Ehat conprise s fhe ALLOWED TDFLAR List The elherga are invalid Getauie either Che IAAHSIERA PEMICEALEM does not exist ar else it lacks me far bath of the reguisite comectians bo this PE and tr STOREGE DEVICE TO ACCESS HEH 8 This t sheen Ge Lie fellauing able TOALAH COSHECTED CUMHECTED ALLO 101 AM ENTITE Th THIS FE Th SOTA pie i Ho Verify Messages 9 3 PASS ONE The when you start a simulation the Network Description file is saved and the simulation program then scans it twice in the process of loading a model Pass one checks the model for syntax and completeness errors For example a pass one error will be generated if a model s Plot Start Time is greater than the Plot Stop Time When a error occurs a warning message is displayed at the terminal a description of the error is written in the simulation Report File file type LIS and the simulation is stopped If an input listing is requested in the simulation setup the error message s will be written above the line which caused them The pass one error messages are intentionally brief If a pass one error message is insufficient to determine the source of a problem run Verify on the model and correct all noted errors A model which has been successfully verified should not encounter any 316 Chapter 9 Debugging pass one errors Pass one error ge
126. ERRUPT TIME 0 0 STD DEV TIME 0 0 AX INTERRUPT QUEUE 0 0 AVG INTERRUPT QUEUE 0 Or STD DEV QUEUE 0 0 MAX MESSAGE BITS 600 600 AVG MESSAGE BITS 0 0 STD DEV BITS 0 0 MAX MODULE QUEUE 1 BN AVG MODULE QUEUE 0 0 STD DEV QUEUE 0 0 PER CENT UTILIZATION 20 430 13 E 2 OFFICE 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 33 0 819 78 794 450 563 200 794 144 906 31 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 600 0 0 1 023 150 199 17 930 228 Processing Element Utilization Statistics Chapter 5 Simulation Report File 5 5 2 Completed Instruction Report The Completed Instruction Report displays the number of times each instruction was executed by each Processing Element This report is useful in determining if the simulation fully exercised the model It is also useful in checking the instructions selected from an Instruction Mix If an exact log of the Instruction Mix selections is required trace the Module under study and send the trace output to the simulation Report File To log the instructions executed by a PE simply trace the PE COMPLETED INSTRUCTION REPORT ACK 2 FROM 0 TO 50 MILLISECONDS INSTRUCTION NAME COUNT INSTRUCTION
127. ETWORK II 5 User s Manual 3 4 NETWORK MENUBAR COMMANDS This section describes the commands available through the NETWORK menubar The items on each of the pulldown menus are listed from top to bottom 3 4 1 The File Menu NETWORK II 5 MA Edit Define Display Verify Analysis Help New Ctrl N Open Ctrl 0 4 gt Import gt Print Ctrl P E le bel pa The File Menu File New The File New command clears the current model from NETWORK By using this command you do not need to leave and restart NETWORK to begin building a new model File Open The File Open command retrieves a previously saved Network Description File NET If an existing model has already been loaded in NETWORK or data structures have already been created you have the option to either merge the data from the file to be 94 Chapter 3 NETWORK opened with the current description or to replace the current data with the file to be opened NETWORK II 5 x File Edit Define Display Verify Analysis Help K gt Data File to Open File Name Directories Enel e n25_16 D List Files of Type Drives The Open Form After the File Open command has been entered a form is presented to permit you to enter the name of a Network Description File NET A file name may be entered directly into the File Name box or selected from the list of names below this box The list of file names displayed is based on the current dir
128. FICE 2 REQUEST OFFICE 2 REQUE EIVING PE E RAL OFFICE CENTRAL OFFICE STATE OFFICE EUE 2 ED E TIME E TIME Message Report Number Used The number of messages that have entered the received message list of the receiving PE and subsequently satisfied a Wait For Message Requirement of a Module executing on the receiving PE Average Maximum Minimum Standard Deviation Queue Time The statistics on the time spent by messages in the received message list of a receiving PE 5 5 12 Received Message Report The Received Message Report displays the number of times a specific message was received by a PE Each PE that receives messages during the simulation will appear in this report The statistics are grouped for each receiving PE with a separate line for every message name and sending PE combination Thus if a receiving PE receives the same message from two different PEs separate statistics are displayed for both combinations of message and sending PE on two lines The Received Message report contains the following information 244 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File Name of Receiving PE Text up to 40 characters Number Queued The total number of messages entering the receiving PE s received message list for the given combination of message name and sending PE Number Lost The total number of mess
129. FILE CONVERSION 11 1 INTRODUCTION Overview NETWORK s file conversion capability allows you to convert the simulation Plot File between binary format file type PIN and text format file type ASC and back again Converting the simulation Plot File between binary format and text format allows you to move the file between different hardware platforms e g PC and UNIX and to access to the simulation Plot File 1f custom simulation results analysis is desired The Simulation Plot File must be in binary format to be used by the plotting and animation capabilities 11 2 CONVERTING A FILE Assuming that you have a plot file to convert select Analysis Convert from the menubar Prior to starting the file conversion you must set the translation method to either binary to text or text to binary The File Conversion binary to text translation method converts a simulation Plot File currently in binary format to an ASCII text format When the space compression option 1s selected excess blank spaces are removed from the resulting text file Simulation Plot File ASC If the translation progress option is selected the translation status is displayed and updated during the file conversion The File Conversion text to binary translation method converts a simulation Plot File currently in text format to binary format 355 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual KE TWeOHE 11 5 HEF I o a A arado hem ir do la E Traralale lea om a Biner Inga
130. File BUS 3 C Update File Lol gt lala Im a lem ul Resume Flag SELF TEST The Write Instruction Form 132 Chapter 3 NETWORK The attributes on the Write Instruction form are nearly identical to the attributes of the Read Instruction see directly above with one exception the options for modifying files are different All other attributes are the same File Modification Method One of three file modification methods may be chosen These are Replace File Update File and Append to File 133 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 3 5 2 1 5 Semaphore Instruction Form NETWORK II 5 hd Ed Processing Element Name PE 1 Quantity 1 Time linite MICROSECFNNDS Semaphore Instruction Name SET TIME THE FLIGHT STRING Semaphore TIME THE FLIGHT STRING Semaphore Status Semaphore Count NR LJ a ds a SET C Increment By C RESET C Decrement By C Toggle C Equal To Do Not Modify Status Do Not Modify Count lol Dlalalmis tom S ul SET TIME THE FLIGHT STRING RESET TIME THE FLIGHT STRING SET TIME THE MSG BUFFER STRING RESET TIME THE MSG BUFFER STRING The Semaphore Instruction Form Semaphore The name of the Semaphore to be accessed by this instruction may be up to 40 characters long To change the Semaphore name either enter a name in the text box or click on the double dots button next to the text box If the name of a nonexistent Semaphore is entered a new o
131. Fis Hans EACHAPTERA PIM e Dupi Fis Hamar EACHAFTENILADC Plot File Conversion Options To start the file conversion click on the File Conversion Form s OK button When the file conversion is complete the File Conversion Form is erased and control is returned to the top level 11 3 The Simulation Plot File The simulation Plot File file type PIN is a binary file which lists simulation events It is generated as the events occur during a simulation You must run a simulation to create this file Do not try to view this file with an editor Itis in a compressed binary format that may break a standard text editor The ASCII simulation Plot File file type ASC is a text file which lists simulation events This file contains the same information as the binary Simulation Plot File file type PIN It can be easily viewed with any standard text editor or used as input to a user written program The Module INTERRUPT OVERHEAD and the Messages COLLISION JAMMED UNSETTLED and TOKEN PASSING are not actual names appearing in a simulation They are names created to trace special events when running an animation The simulation Plot File contains the following information a the title of the model used in the simulation b the NETWORK version number 356 Chapter 11 File Conversion c the simulation time span Plot Start and Plot End Times d the date and time of the simulation run e an ind
132. GEMENT NAME REPLACE DATA TERRUPTIBILITY FLAG NO LIMIT T STRUCTION LIST E A TOTAL OF E HOH YD O Zt el a Da YU 15 Z H REPLACE DATA RADAR DATA PROCESSED S R TRING COMPLETE ESET TIME THE DATA STRING A EXECUTE A TOTAL OF ANDED PREDECESSOR LIST FFT NAME SELF TEST PRIORITY 0 INTERRUPTIBILITY FLAG NO RENT LIMIT 32000 D PROCESSORS REQUIRED MESSAGE STATUS WAIT FOR STRING COMPLETE EXECUTE A TOTAL OF 1 RESET TIME THE MSG BUFFER STRING The Network Description File continued 313 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual A H STRUC TION LIS he XECU E A TO NAME TA RIORIT CTICAL O AL OF 1 SELF TEST PERATIONS Ye TERRU STRUC E I CONCURRI I PTIBILI ENT LIMI TION LIS Y FLAG NO 0 XECU E A TO AL OF 1 TACTICAL OPERATIONS EXECU E A TO AL OF 1 STRING COMPLETE XECU E A TO ANDED P REDECESS AL OF 1 RESET TIME THE FLIGHT STRING OR L FILES AVIGATION SYSTEM SOFTWARE TY PE ELL IST MANAGEMENT ME G
133. Gl td BUS is IDLI Gl module REQUEST DATA FILE 1 instruction ASK FOR DATA FILE iteration 1 of 1 start time 23 142163 SEC host pe COMPUTER A EJ 208 Chapter 4 Running a Simulation Summary Report O A summary report containing simulation statistics may be generated by entering the Summary Report command The available reports include Processing Instruction Transfer Device Storage Device Module Semaphore Message Statistics Received Message Message Delivery and Snapshot A sample of a summary report is given below Chapter 5 provides a full description of the report contents COMPLETED MODULE STATISTICS FROM 10 TO 500 SECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS MODULE NAME REQUEST DATA TRANSMIT DATA FILE FILE HOST PE COMPUTER A COMPUTER B i PLETED EXECUTIONS 16 16 CANCELLATIONS DUE TO CONCURRENT LIMIT 0 0 RUN UNTIL SEMAPHORES 0 0 NUM PRECONDITION TIME 16 16 AVG PRECONDITION TIME 0 0 MAX PRECONDITION TIME 0 De MIN PRECONDITION TIME 0 0 STD DEV TIME oh Ox AVG EXECUTION TIME 244069 000 3900106 000 MAX EXECUTION TIME 244069 000 3900106 000 MIN EXECUTION TIME
134. II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 y PE List Ena Eee New PE name PROCESSOR_C4 inte nies i Adding a New Data Structure 3 4 4 The Display Menu 104 Chapter 3 NETWORK NETWORK II 5 Edit Define REEVE Verify Analysis Help AutoDraw Background Icon Text Font Title Setup Refresh Screen Scale Diagram Work Area Size The Display Menu Display AutoDraw The Display AutoDraw command is used to automatically draw the components of your model on the display After selecting this command you may choose one of the five options from the AutoDraw Options form Three of the options CONNECT BALANCED CONNECT and LAN are used to reconfigure the layout of objects on the display The COLORS option allows you to decide which colors will used in the display Click on the desired option and click on the OK button If CONNECT BALANCED CONNECT or LAN is chosen NETWORK requests confirmation since all current drawing information will be lost when the auto draw begins The CONNECT option draws all Processing Elements in a row from left to right across the top of the diagram All of the TDs and LANs are drawn as straight lines underneath the Processing Elements All the Storage Devices are drawn in a row from left to right below the Transfer Devices Gateways are drawn to the right of any Processing Elements This results in a hardware sandwich 105 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual The BALANCED CONNECT optio
135. INK Utilization 46 58 6 CENTRAL OFFICE 28 48 SA EA 78 Ba 98 104 Percent of 184 MIL Complete Running a Simulation The computer system to be simulated is described in a data structure consisting of Processing Elements Gateways Transfer Devices LANs Storage Devices Modules and Files Each of these building blocks has a series of attributes whose values are supplied by the user For example each Processing Element has a Basic Cycle Time attribute to represent its clock speed The powerful NETWORK II 5 icon oriented graphic user interface allows a user to build and maintain the requisite data structure by means of simple but powerful graphical operations For example a new Processing Element can be brought into existence by clicking on the Processing Element icon on the palette and dragging the icon to the display NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 stores the system description created graphically in a text network description data file which describes the hardware and software of the system to be simulated This network description file is a concise English description of the system to be simulated that can serve as the definitive documentation of the system simulated The format of this file is documented under separate cover and may be used as an interface to other databases and programs After acquiring the runtime control parameters such as simulation length devices to graph from you NETWORK II 5 builds and executes th
136. INK will automatically generate a NETWORK II 5 model and place the PEs and TDs found in your topology file on the NETWORK II 5 canvas The configuration of the PEs and TDs are set to default and may be customized in NETWORK II 5 environment The next step in model building would be to add real traffic to the model Importing External Traffic TRAFLINK generates an external messages file which will be used to model real traffic in NETWORK II 5 When TRAFLINK begins execution an External Traffic Form is displayed This Form allows you to map external traffic patterns to your NETWORK II 5 model The main purpose of this mapping is to match names in your NETWORK II 5 model with the names in the Traffic file file type prn captured using Network Analyzers With the Traffic file coming from various sources you must define the layout of the file Configuration for HP NetMetrix and Network General SNIFFER are built in Other configurations may be user defined and saved for later use TRAFLINK formats the real traffic captured into an external Traffic File file type ext which NETWORK II 5 can use To create the external traffic file TRAFLINK will display various forms which are required to build over this initial External Traffic Form 10 1 3 Chapter Organization Section 10 2 explains how to use TRAFLINK with a reference for it s forms Section 10 3 describes files used with TRAFLINK Section 10 4 provides guidelines on how to use
137. If N25DEV CFG is not found the default values are assumed An example file is listed below File Name N25DEV CFG Platform Windows Date Created 1 12 1996 This file is defines NETWORK 11 5 s operating environment An asterisk in column 1 defines a comment If this file is not present or an item is not mentioned the following defaults apply date format us us mm dd yyyy uk dd mm yyyy form path user directory editor command palette start lt same directory as executable gt lt working directory gt USER NOTEPAD 22000 super vga 21250 win3 11 vga 19500 Win95 palette start value must be between 12000 and 25000 4 FFF FF FF FF FH F To make changes uncomment and update any of the following lines DATE FORMAT US FORM PATH USER DIRECTORY USER EDITOR COMMAND NOTEPAD PALETTE START 19000 end of file The parameters in the N23DEV CFG file may include TERM WIDTH The TERM WIDTH field determines the number of text columns per line for interactive output from TEXTWORK The default value for the TERM WIDTH is 80 columns per line TERM HEIGHT The TERM HEIGHT parameter is the number of rows of per page for interactive output from TEXTWORK The default value for the TERM HEIGHT is 24 PRINTER WIDTH 362 Appendix B N25DEV CFG The PRINTER WIDTH is the number of text columns per line to use for reports The default value is 80
138. Iterate By Priority X TD in Plot File L Minimize Random Seed Array IX SD in Plot File Antithetic Variate xX SEMAPHORE in Plot File Maximum Message Delivery Combinations 999 Maximum Module Messages 999 Global Message List List Size NR X Queue Flag Keep Blocks Separate Lose Overflow Messages lole hle m 5 m gt a TDZLAN Move Options Name Offset TD LAN Only X horizontal 25 C TD LAN and Local PEs SDs Y Vertical 25 C TD LAN and All Connected PEs SDs Line Spacing joo C TD LAN and All Connected PEs SDs Gateways The Controls Form Antithetic Variate Randomizer The Randomizer and Antithetic Variate parameters provide short cuts in defining the random number seeds For example if a model contained 100 different SDFs manually editing each SDF would be tedious The Randomizer is an integer between O and 9 It specifies the ordering of the random number seeds in the array generated when the simulation is being initialized The Antithetic Variate is a YES NO value It takes advantage of the principle that all distributions can be derived from a uniform distribution whose values range from 0 to 1 All distributions are derived in this manner 176 Chapter 3 NETWORK If the Antithetic Variate flag is set to YES the value picked from the uniform distribution 1s subtracted from 1 That value is used to calculate the value of the SDF in question Iterate by Priority If
139. K Module Name CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER me C None C Anded Statistical MSG NOT AVAILABLE 90 DISPLAY MESSAGE 10 Move ER Percent Statistical Successor Stream NR 2 Statistical Successors The Module Successors Form lel 3 5 12 Macro Instruction Form Instruction List Click on the Add button to add names of individual instructions Macro Instructions and Instruction Mixes to the Instruction List of a Macro Instruction To change the count of an individual item in the list highlight its name and then select the Count button 167 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 168 P e e MO 3 la al NETWORK II 5 PE 1 Macro Instruction Name DATA_PROCESS_MACRO Instruction List Name Count CHECK MESSAGE BUEFER IAA PROCESS NEW DATA 1 NOTIFICATION 1 Verify ilit The Macro Instruction Form Chapter 3 NETWORK 3 5 13 Instruction Mix Form Stream The stream is an integer value that must be in the range from 1 to 999 If you leave the stream in the NR state a value will be chosen by the simulation program The stream is used to control the random selection from the mix list Instruction List To add individual instructions Instruction Mixes or Macro Instructions to an Instruction Mix click on the Add button The percentage of selection of a list item can be changed by highlighting its name and selecting the Percent button The sum
140. LE ACCESSED RADAR DATA S E NUMBER OF BITS TO TRANSMIT 800 BITS DESTROY FLAG NO R R ESUME FLAG NO INSTRUCTION TYPE WRITE NAME REPLACE DATA TORAGE DEVICE TO ACCESS MEM 1 S FILE ACCESSED COMM DATA NUMBER OF BITS TO TRANSMIT 400 BITS R R EPLACE FLAG NO ESUME FLAG NO INSTRUCTION TYPE MESSAG NAME STRING COMPLETE ENGTH 0 BITS STINATION PROCESSOR PE 2 EUE FLAG NO E FLAG NO ONTINUE MESSAGE NO HIBIT MESSAGE TO SELF NO RADAR DATA PROCESSED NGTH 8 BITS 3 STINATION PROCESSOR Pl EUE FLAG NO SUME FLAG NO ONTINUE ESSAGE NO HIBIT MESSAGE TO SELF NO LLOWABLE BUSSES BUS 1 INSTRUCTION TYPE PROCESSING GI hb The Network Description File continued 309 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual
141. LIBRARY DIRECTORY is the path established for the USER DIRECTORY for all platforms EDITOR COMMAND 363 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 allows you to view files such as the simulation report file by invoking a text editor The exact command to start the editor varies from system to system For example under Microsoft Windows the editor Notepad is invoked with the command NOTEPAD If you wished to change the editor to WordPad under Windows 95 just remove the that makes EDITOR COMMAND a comment and replace NOTEPAD with C WINDOWS WORDPAD EXE A special note about Windows 95 You must put the full path to WordPad in this command If you do not the editor will not be found PALETTE START NETWORK tried to query the system to learn how large the window opened is and whether certain locations are visible or not However in some cases the reports from the system are inaccurate and NETWORK will put the palette in the wrong place This value 1s the Y coordinate for the Palette start position Try different values 1f your palette does not appear at the correct location 364 Appendix C Creating Icons Appendix C Creating Icons C 1 INTRODUCTION The SIMGRAPHICS II graphics editor is provided for creating hardware icons and background icons SIMGRAPHICS II has other graphics capabilities in addition to the icon editor However NETWORK II 5 users only need to be concerned with the icon editor The mechan
142. LINK III Please select a list item lt all Links in Model gt sun ether Segmentl Figure 10 11 The Set Link Form The Name Match List may be stored in a Name Map File 1nk refer to section 10 3 After creating the name map use the Save As button at the top of the Name Match Form to save a Name Map File with the name that you select Use the Load button to retrieve this file Other Name Match Form Options TRAFLINK Name Match Form Option Replace Selected Names If Replace Selected Names YES a mark is in the check box PE names will not be removed from the PE Name Menu after they have been matched with a external PE name This allows the same Processing Element to be matched to more than one external PE This feature would be useful when a single PE supports multiple protocol stack If Replace Selected Names NO a PE name can only be matched to one external PE name and it will be removed from the PE Name Menu if it is selected TRAFLINK Name Match Form Option Display Matched Names If Display Matched Names YES a mark in the check box PE names which have been matched will be removed from the PE Name List box By default Display Matched Names NO 10 2 2 6 Creating the External Traffic File 343 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual After you have finished matching names on the Name Match Form generate the External Traffic File ext by selecting the Create Ext File button at the top of the Setup Form With P
143. M 1 PE 2 and RADAR DISH Connect BUS 3 to PE 1 MEM 1 and RADAR DISH 8 3 5 Adding Files to Storage Devices A File named GENERAL STORAGE needs to be present on the Storage Devices MEM 1 and RADAR DISH at the start of the simulation To add these Files to your model click onthe Edit Files button on the SD form of both MEM 1 and RADAR DISH The File List Form will then be displayed and this form contains the list of those Files resident on this particular SD Initially the File List of MEM 1 and RADAR DISH will be empty To add the File GENERAL STORAGE to this list select the Add button at 281 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual the right of the File List form When the File Menu form is displayed select the name GENERAL STORAGE from the list box and then OK the form The File GENERAL STORAGE should now be displayed in the list box of the File List Form Defining a File Click directly on the name GENERAL STORAGE and then choose Edit to set the initial size of the File in the File Attribute form Click on the value box labeled Number of Bits and enter the value 60000 This should be done for both MEM 1 and RADAR DISH so that both Storage Devices have a resident file named GENERAL STORAGE with a size of 60000 bits Defining File Size 282 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation 8 3 6 Adding Modules Modules may be added to a model by selecting Define Module command from the menubar or by selecting the button labeled Modu
144. Message Requirements Chain If conditions are used to select a successor Module based on user defined conditions Chain If conditions determine whether a Module can be Chained to at the time they are checked The same Module may Chain If due to file 56 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 Semaphore and message conditions Chain If conditions are specified for a successor module and apply to all predecessor Modules which call this Module Modules without predecessors cannot have Chain If preconditions because this test is made only by a Module attempting to chain to a successor If a Module fails its Chain If test it remains waiting for its predecessor precondition as if the predecessor never completed execution The Chain If precondition is tested once by the predecessor when it is about to chain to a successor If all Chain If requirements are met the chaining occurs and the successor s predecessor condition for the Module that chained will be met The successor Module will then check its remaining preconditions to see if they are satisfied If any of the successor s Chain If requirements are not met the successor Module remains inactive A Chain If file precondition allows you to select a Module based on the availability or nonavailability of a file either on a particular device or on any device A Chain If Semaphore precondition allows you to select a successor based on whether the Semaphore is set or reset or the Semaphore s count is g
145. Metrix etc 5 Match names in the LAN traffic file with NETWORK II 5 model names 6 Create the External Traffic File ext Steps 4 and 5 may be repeated to create an External Traffic File that includes several LAN traffic files 10 2 2 1 Capturing a LAN Traffic File The LAN Traffic File prn is a text listing of captured LAN data It may be generated from packets captured with a network analyzer network management software or some other means of monitoring LAN traffic If the captured traffic is in binary format you must generate a report of the captured traffic in text format Save the LAN Traffic File with a prn file extension refer to section 10 3 Please consult your user s manual for further information on how to capture and save LAN traffic NETWORK I1 5 MIES Edit Define Display Verify Analysis Help New Ctrl N Open Ctril O0 Save Ctrl S Save As Import External Traffic Ctrl P Cabletron Spectrum Topology HP OpenView Topology IBM NetView Topology oe ss Pg ME ca 3 fff THESEUS NEFLY 14375 POPFLY BARFLY SOLAR a a E E E E Figure 10 6 Importing LAN Traffic 338 Chapter 10 TRAFLINK III 10 2 2 2 Building a Model with NETWORK II 5 TRAFLINK matches Network PE names in a captured Network Traffic File prn with NETWORK II 5 model You must first create possibly by TRAFLINK topology import and save a NETWORK II 5 model file before running TRAFLINK for Traffic import Make sure that each nod
146. NDS gt 100 v 100 When do you want the last report IN SECONDS gt 900 a interval do you want between reports IN SECONDS l Report List After the scheduling method for Periodic Reports has been determined TEXTWORK will prompt you for the specific list of Periodic Reports to print Which report do you want for choices LIST for current selections gt Choices Processing Element Storage Device Module M Transfer Device Instruction Execution E Semaphore SE Snapshot Message Statistics Message Delivery Received Messag All 203 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Which report do you gt p Do you want to add another report gt n want for choices LIST for current selections Y N ABORT TEXTWORK Run Parameters Final Reports You have the opportunity to choose those reports to be included in the Final Reports at the end of the simulation by specifying the Final Reports List If you do not specify the Final Reports List all of the available reports will be printed PE instruction TD SD module semaphore message and snapshot Do you want to specify the list of final reports gt Y which report do you gt LIST want gt No reports are selected which report do you gt 2 Choices Processing Element Transfer Device Snapshot Message Delivery which report do you want for choices LIST fo
147. NO for the PE an additional message is included Despite this the message will be stored becaus LOSE OVERFLOW MESSAGES NO for this pe If Lose Overflow Messages YES for the PE an additional message is included It won t be stored because LOSE OVERFLOW MESSAGES YES for this pe 3 PE Message List Overflow Message Block Transfer WARNING At 456455500 SEC there was insufficient room in the message list of pe PE A to add block 2 of 20 for message E MAIL An attempt to add a message block to a processing element s message list failed because of insufficient space in the PE s message list If Lose Overflow Messages NO for the PE an additional message is included Despite this the message will be stored because LOSE OVERFLOW MESSAGES NO for this pe 319 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual If Lose Overflow Messages YES for the PE an additional message is included It won t be stored because LOSE OVERFLOW MESSAGES YES for this pe If the destination PE s Lose Overflow Messages flag is set to YES the message block will be lost The source PE will retransmit the message block until 1t is successfully added to the destination PE s message list If the destination PE s Lose Overflow Messages flag is set to NO the message block will be added to the message list Setting the Lose Overflow Messages Flag to NO is a way of ensuring that message blocks will not be lost due to
148. NTS RUN WHEN AND RUN UNTIL SEMAPHORE REQUIREMENTS PREDECESSOR LINE gt ANDED ORED PRED INDICATOR v KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK E MODULE NAME REPEATED A MODULE oul INDICATOR gt SELF SUCCEEDING INDICATOR gt SUCCESSOR LINE gt KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK PERCENT OR SKIP CHAIN COUNT START TIME DELAY ITERATION PERIOD REQUIRED MESSAGES WAIT FOR PRECONDITION RESIDENT ALLOWED PE INSTRUCTION LIST FILES WRITTEN MESSAGES SENT SEMAPHORES MODIFIED S Software Module Diagram Organization Because of the limited space available for these text illustrations some abbreviations are used in the module diagrams and text is frequently truncated The Compress Display check box can be used to reduce the size of Module diagrams by eliminating unimportant diagram lines The following table of abbreviations and conventions can be consulted when examining your Module diagrams Module Activation ST Start Time CI Chain If IP Iteration Period A Semaphore message or file name may appear after CI RU Run Until RW Run When A Semaphore name follows either RU or RW Message Status Requirements The message name appears after the colon LM Local Message LB Local Block M Message B Block Semaphore Status Requirements A Semaphore name appears before the colon 115
149. Network I1 59 User s Manual Release 12 November 1997 CACI Products Company 3333 N Torrey Pines Ct La Jolla CA 92037 619 824 5200 Fax 619 457 1184 www caciasl com CACI Products Division 1600 Wilson Blvd Arlington VA 22209 703 875 2900 Fax 703 875 2904 CACI Products Company Coliseum Business Centre Riverside Way Camberley Surrey GU15 3YL UK 44 0 1276 671 671 Fax 44 0 1276 670 677 Copyright 1997 CACI Products Company Release 12 November 1997 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced by any means without written permission from CACI Products Company For product information contact CACTI Products Company CACTI Products Company 3333 North Torrey Pines Court Coliseum Business Centre Riverside Way La Jolla CA 92037 Camberley Surrey GUIS 3YL UK 619 824 5200 Telephone 44 0 1276 671 671 Fax 619 457 1184 Fax 44 0 1276 670 677 The information in this publication is believed to be accurate in all respects However CACI Products Company cannot assume the responsibility for any consequences resulting from the use thereof The infor mation contained herein is subject to change Revisions to this publication or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such change COMNET III COMNET Baseliner COMNET Predictor and Network II 5 are trademarks of CACI Products Company 1 INTRODUCTION TO NETWORK II 5 1 1 NETWORK II 5 OBJECTIVES NETWORK II 5 is a des
150. ORK II 5 RELEASE 11 09 04 01 1996 14 35 41 PAGE 4 A SAMPLE PROBLEM FOR NETWORK II 5 TRANSFER DEVICE UTILIZATION STATISTICS FROM 0 TO 1 SECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS coe ER DEVICE NAME BUS 1 BUS 2 BUS 3 TRANSFER REQUESTS GRANTED 88 ll 40 REQUESTS INTERRUPTED 0 0 0 AVG REQUEST DELAY 253 357 0 0 AX REQUES DELAY 10342 552 0 0 STD DEV DELAY 1315 136 0 0 ERRUPTED TRANSFERS 0 0 0 AVG INTERRUP IME 0 0 0 AX INTERRUP IME QO 0 0 STD DEV TIME 0 0 0 eye TED TRANSFERS 87 1 40 AVG USAGE TI 3896 793 895 573 1132 864 MAX USAGE TI 11528 468 895 573 1500 000 MIN USAGE TIME 104 000 895 573 263 977 STD DEV TIME 4322 384 0 437 538 e QUEUE SIZE 022 0 0 MAX QUEUE SIZE 1 000 0 1 000 STD DEV SIZE 148 0 0 re TRANSFERS TRANSMIT ERROR 0 0 0 QUEUE FLAG 0 0 0 BUFFER OVERFLOW 0 0 0 THROUGHPUT DATA BITS SECOND 24644 000 400 000 616000 000 TRANSFERS SECOND 87 000 1 000 40 000 ie CENT UTILIZATION 33 939 090 4 531 Simulation Report File continued 297 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual CACI NETWORK II 5 REL EAS STORAGE DEVICE NAME A SA 11 09 04 01 1996 14 35 41 PLE PROBL EM FOR N ETWORK II 5 AL STORAG E I E DEVICE U ROM TO iy TIM REPO ILIZATION STATISTICS SECONDS RTED IN MICROSECONDS S INTERRUPTED AVG REQUEST DELAY AX REQUEST DELAY STD DEV DELAY
151. Other releases should work similarly Traflink III can also be used with any other LAN analyzer or traffic monitoring tool that produces a historical traffic file in a similar format The main requirement is that the historical traffic file have one line per packet That line must include time size source destination and some description of the packet Sniffer Instructions 1 Start the appropriate analyzer such as the Ethernet IT Analyzer Select Capture then Expert Mode Let Capture proceed until you have enough data Press F 9 pause Press F5 menu Select Display then Summary Turn off all fields except Delta Time Bytes and DLC At menu select Display Print File Plain Text Format Then go back to Print andpress Enter Give a file name but no type prn is the default type 10 Your file now contains the trace in the format expected by Traflink III DURAN SO el 10 4 2 NETWORK II 5 Cabletron SPECTRUM Interface The Topology export command has to be installed within SPECTRUM The format of the file which will be installed is a tar file This file can be expanded using the Extensions Tool kit provided as part of the core SPECTRUM installation If the core SPECTRUM is not present the product will not be installed Move the tar file i e TopExport tar to the top level SPECTRUM area In order to invoke SpectroINSTALL perform the following steps 349 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual l Become root Ze Type the follow
152. PROCESSING module The RADAR PROCESSING module retrieves radar data from the radar disk preprocesses the data and stores the data in MEM 1 RADAR PROCESSING then sends a message to PE 2 to tell it that radar data is available The RADAR PROCESSING module then sets up the NAVIGATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT module to wait for the RADAR DATA PROCESSED message from PE2 Upon receiving this message the NAVIGATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT module performs internal processing and then chains to the TACTICAL OPERATIONS module TACTICAL OPERATIONS then performs additional internal processing sends a STRING COMPLETE message to PE 1 and resets a semaphore to end a Response Time calculation The STRING COMPLETE message initiates the SELF TEST module on PE 1 Radar Data Processing function WF M RADAR DATA AVAILABLE KKKKKKKKKK KKK KK de PE 2 E GET DATA SET TIME THE DATA STRING ES GET DATA KKKKKKKKKK KKK KK S TIME THE DATA STRING ANDED PREDECESSOR v KEKKKKKKK KKK KKK FFT FFT a a ae cake ORO OR oie KEKKKKKKK KKK KKK ANDED PREDECESSOR v KEKKKKKKK KKK KKK e ye REPLACE DATA REPLACE DATA RADAR DATA PROCESSED STRING COMPLETE RESET TIME THE DATA STRING KKKXKXKKKKKKKXKXXX M RADAR DATA PROCESSED M STRING COMPLETE R TIME
153. PTS 0 0 0 AVG I ERRUPTED IME 0 0 0 AX I ERRUPTED IME 0 Da 0 STD DEV TIME 0 0 0 Simulation Report File continued 301 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual A CACI NETWORK II 5 RELEASE 11 09 04 01 1996 14 35 41 PAGE 9 A SAMPLE PROBLEM FOR NETWORK II 5 COMPLETED MODULE STATISTICS FROM oO zo TO 1 SECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS PN NAM TACTICAL SELF TEST SELF TEST OPERATIONS PE PE PE 1 PE 1 PE 2 ee ETED EXECUTIONS 20 28 20 eee AATIONS DUE TO CONCURRENT LIMIT 0 0 0 RUN UNTIL SEMAPHORES 0 0 0 ea PRECONDITION TIME 20 28 20 AVG PRECONDITION TIME 0 0 0 MAX PRECONDITIO IME 0 0 0 MIN PRECONDITIO IME 0 0 0 STD DEV TIME 0 0 0 ee EXECUTION TIME 51 000 38 000 34 000 AX EXECUTIO IME 51 000 38 000 34 000 IN EXECUTIO IME 51 000 38 000 34 000 STD DEV TIME 0 0 0 RESTARTED INTERRUPTS 0 0 0 AVG INTERRUPTED TIME 0 O 0 AX INTERRUPTED TIME 0 O 0 STD DEV TIME 0 0 0 Simulation Report File continued 302 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation CACI NETWORK II 5 RELEASE 11 09 04 01 1996 14 35 41 PAGE 10 A SAMPLE PROBLEM FOR NETWORK II 5
154. RCE_NAME DEST_NAME or MSG_NAME in the external 352 Chapter 10 TRAFLINK III file was not matched with a model name Match the names either explicitly or use automatic name matching option To match the names use Name Match option in the Setup Form e ERROR found TEXT data where a INTEGER was expected on line LINE_NUM Column COL_NUM of file FILE_NAME Check the Traffic Layout Profile and make sure the columns are properly matched with the file format e Line LINE_NUM of file FILE_NAME does not begin with a time value PROGRAM_NAME cannot process this file All Traffic files begin with the time value as the first column of data Due to traffic file formatting some of these values might be out of place Make sure all the values in the file are properly lined up e ERROR found TEXT data where a NUMBER was expected on line LINE_NUM Column COL_NUM of file FILE_NAME Check the Layout Profile Settings and make sure the columns match with the file layout e You must have at least one link and two nodes in your model to run the traffic portion of PROGRAM_NAME This is the minimum size of model which is necessary to import external traffic This is required so a message call session can have a source link and a destination e LINK FILE does not match FNUM_LINKS External Names found in PRN_FILE to Model Names Select lt filename gt in the Traffic File list and then choose Match Names to define the
155. RK II 5 storage device files did not have a read only flag Now when a file specification does not mention the read only flag a default value of NO is assumed and reported in the Default Playback Report 5 3 RUNTIME TRACING REPORTS The Runtime Trace Reports will grant you insight into specific events which have taken place during a simulation They are beneficial in monitoring simulation progress and simulation troubleshooting Runtime Tracing Reports include the Narrative Trace Reports the Periodic Snapshot Report and the simulation Runtime Warning Reports The Runtime Trace Reports are requested when setting up a simulation run in NETWORK before the simulation starts All module and message names that appear in the reports are followed by a sequence number which is included in parentheses A separate sequence of identification numbers is maintained for every module and message starting with the number 1 217 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual CACI NETWORK II 5 RELEASE 11 00 06 24 1996 09 20 37 PAG El 00 Instructor s solution to Part 2 of Case 4 INPUT DATA PLAYBACK GLOBAL FLAGS GRAPH1 CENTRAL OFFICE GRAPH2 OFFICE LINK ANTITHETIC VARIATE NO RANDOMIZER 0 CLOCK YES UNIFORM DISTRIBUTIONS INTERARRIVAL TIME LOWER BOUND 350 000 UPPER BOUND STREAM 10 EEE BACKOFF DISTRIBUTIONS TANDARD BACKOFF SLOT TIME 51 200 RETRY LIMIT L S O 3500 000
156. T When you OK the Module Successors Form and then OK the Module Form you will be returned to the Module Menu form for PE 1 This form will now contain two Module names FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT and RADAR PROCESSING Select the name RADAR PROCESSING and then select Edit to enter the Module Form and complete the definition of RADAR PROCESSING Because RADAR PROCESSING is a successor to a Module a Predecessor type must be declared To do this click on the button located just to the right of a text box containing the words NO PREDECESSORS A form will appear in which you should select the radio button labeled ANDED You can now fill in the instruction list for this Module by adding the names GET RADAR DATA RADAR PROCESSING STORE RADAR and RADAR DATA AVAILABLE Once you have done this from within the Module Successors 286 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation Form selected the radio button labeled Anded and add the name NAVIGATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT to the successor list When you return to the Modules Menu the name NAVIGATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT should now be included Select this name and then Edit to enter the Module Form so that this new Module can be defined Although this Module has a predecessor Module it also has a Message Requirement of RADAR DATA PROCESSED as an additional precondition This Message Requirement forces the Module NAVIGATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT to wait until the message RADAR DATA PROCESSED is received by PE 1 before
157. TD has the following attributes A Collision Window An Interframe Gap A Contention Interval A Retry Interval A Jam Time A collision protocol Transfer Device has three states idle unsettled and busy If the Transfer Device is idle any PE on the Transfer Device may use it immediately The 35 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Transfer Device will then be considered unsettled from the time the PE starts using the Transfer Device until the user specified time the Collision Window has elapsed If any PE attempts to access a Transfer Device while it is unsettled a collision will be declared and the current user of the Transfer Device will be interrupted Both the former user and the requesting PE will send a jamming signal for the length of time given in the Jam Time attribute They will then each wait their randomly selected Retry Interval and then try to access the TD again The number of collisions which occurred during a simulation will be reported in the Transfer Device report If any PE attempts to access a Transfer Device while it is busy 1 e in use but after its Collision Window is over it will queue up for the Transfer Device When the Transfer Device becomes available the Interframe Gap if specified is imposed on all PEs waiting to use the TD The Interframe Gap and the Contention Interval timers run concurrently This means that a deferring PE waits the greater of the Contention Interval or the Interframe Gap befo
158. The number of bits available for use This is the number of bits not committed to either files or general storage The list of PE s currently being served The list of PE instructions waiting to access the SD that have been blocked out due to an insufficient number of ports The list of files stored in the SD and their current size Modules when active 1 2 3 A Module name followed by a sequence number The Instruction which the Module is executing The number of times the current Instruction has been started for the Module along with the total number of times it will be scheduled The Module s start time The host PE The reason an active Module is not currently executing on a PE if applicable Potential reasons include a Module waiting for a host PE A Module will be in the PE Local Queue if it will run on a specific PE one allowed PE or successor to another Module The Module will be in the System PE Queue if it is waiting for one of a group of host PEs b Module waiting for a hardware precondition c Module waiting for a Semaphore precondition d Module waiting for a message precondition e Module waiting for a File precondition f Module waiting for more Anded Predecessors If a Module has more than one Anded Predecessor when the first predecessor to chains to a Module the Module s status is changed to active This report will list those predecessors to an active Module that have yet to chain to this M
159. This results in a slightly longer run time but is useful in modeling a smart scheduler The default for Iterate By Priority is NO Maximum Message Delivery Combinations can be set to limit the size of the Message Delivery Report By default the Message Delivery report includes statistics on every combination of message source and destination that occurred during the simulation However this can sometimes result in a very large report Presume that you have a 100 node network where any station might send a message to any other station If there is only one message type that could lead to 1 100 99 9 900 combinations Printing a maximum of 12 combinations per page the report would require 9 900 12 825 pages You can limit this by either turning reports off for specific messages or by setting Maximum Message Delivery Combinations to some reasonable value Any combinations that occur after the maximum is reached will not be reported This also saves computation time and memory space The default Maximum Message Delivery Combinations is 999 Maximum Module Messages is provided mostly as a debugging tool By default a module gives its messages to its successor unless the Inhibit Message Inheritance Flag of 74 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 the successor YES If you have a Module in a chain of Modules that loops back it is possible that this inherited list will continue to grow without bounds By default Maximum Module Message
160. Time These statistics are gathered on the time that a Message Instruction begins to the arrival of the message at the destination These statistics will include any delays involving the Transfer Device MESSAGE NAME DESTINATION PE NUMBE SENT R AVG DELIVERY TIME AX DELIVERY TIME D D IN STD ELIVERY TIME EV TIME SOURCE PE MESSAGE DELIVERY REPORT FROM 0 TO 50 ALL TI MILLISECONDS ES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS OFFICE 1 REQUEST OFFICE 1 OFFICE 2 CENTRAL OFFICI 32 ILLA 559 305 244 800 109 384 OFFICE 2 REQUEST E CENTRAL OFFICE 23 299 986 766 050 244 800 124 502 Message Deliver 5 5 14 Snapshot Status Report The Snapshot Status Report lists the status of the model s elements at the end of the simulation The Snapshot Status Report contains the same information as the Periodic Snapshot Report described earlier in this chapter 246 y Report Chapter 5 Simulation Report File 5 6 SIMULATION REPORT FILE FORMAT The simulation Report File format may be changed by editing the printer width value in the N25DEV CFG file The parameters in the N25DEV CFG file are read by NETWORK II 5 at the start of execution If the N25DEV CFG file is not present or
161. WORK displays the Library Form from which all of the library operations proceed 186 Chapter 3 NETWORK NETWORK II 5 gt Library Menu PE Library saved 12 22 1995 15 22 08 Calling PE WS_2 3 Move Load dd The Library Form The Library Form has a list box in its center which is used to display the names of all current library items and a group of control buttons to the right of the list box You may load a library file by selecting the Load button When a library file is loaded the names of all items in the file are then displayed in the list box The four different types of library files will have a specific file suffix attached to the names you give them PE library files are designated by a PEL suffix TD library files are designated by a TDL suffix SD library files are designated by a SDL suffix Module library files are designated by a MDL suffix You are not limited to only one library file for each data type You may create as many library files for each data type as you desire by specifying a different name for each file You may save a library file by selecting the Save button NETWORK will save all items found in the list box to the library file A new file may be created by entering a new name or an old library file can be updated by selecting its name 187 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual The Add button is used to add the current data structure being edited to the list of library items If the
162. a Wait For type the message must be present at the host PE or one of two Chain If types a Module will not be chained to unless the message is present or not present at a specified PE If the type selected is Chain If Queued or Chain If Not Queued the text box to enter a PE name and its double dots 163 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual button will be selectable Enter a PE name directly or select the double dots button to choose from the list of current PE names Message Count A Message Status Requirement may additionally check the count of messages Enter an integer value in the Message Count text box and then select one of the Message Count conditions from the group of radio buttons next to the Message Count text box 3 5 11 3 Semaphore Status Requirement Form Module Name CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER Time Unite lurenceraauns el Semaphore Status Requirement Moc Name PROCESS INTERACTION Lox C Wait For Cancel C Chain If C Run When a Set C Reset C Count C Greater Than C Equal To C Less Than C Not Equal To LolD lile m S lm ml 2 Statistical Successors The Semaphore Status Requirement Form a Semaphore Status Requirement Type This group of radio buttons is used to select a type for the Semaphore Status Requirement The four choices are Wait For Chain If Run When and Run Until Completed If Run Cancelled 164 Chapter 3 NETWORK If Run Until has been selected as the t
163. a low message list size 4 Wild Card Error No PE Input Controller WARNING At 100 004500 SEC module SEND MESSAGES called instruction BROADCAST on pe HOST which sends by using a wild card to pe CLIENT 1 This pe does not have an input controller Message not delivered To ensure delivery of a message broadcast NETWORK requires that Input Controller YES for all potential destination PEs Module Runtime Warnings 5 Instruction not defined on Host PE WARNING At 002500000 SEC pe PE 2 was asked to execu an instruction INS 3 which is not in its instruction list by module MOD 1 1 No execution possible ct ct 0 If a Module tries to execute an instruction which is not defined on its host PE this message will be produced and the instruction will be skipped NETWORK checks for this condition dynamically as the simulation runs This error may also be trapped by verifying the model 6 Module Iteration Period set to Zero WARNING At 000750060 SEC module MOD 2 10 has tried to iterat very zero time units Iteration for this module aborted 320 Chapter 9 Debugging NETWORK will not run a simulation that contains a Module with an Iteration Period equal to 0 This message will also be produced during a simulation if a SDF returns a value of 0 for a Module s Iteration Period To avoid infinite loops the Module will not attempt to iterate again f
164. a runtime warning message will be issued Execution continues as 1f the file was available or the Storage Device had sufficient space This approach is taken because canceling the transfer would produce artificially low utilization reports The Linear Distributions can be used to specify the Number Of Bits To Read Write based on the size of a received message another file or the count of a Semaphore message or file Read Instructions have three file modification options Erase File Decrement File and Do Not Modify File The Erase File option will release all of the storage occupied by a file upon completion of the instruction Decrement File will only destroy the number of bits read from a file upon completion of the instruction When Do Not Modify File is selected the file size will remain unchanged at the end of the execution of the instruction Write Instructions have three file modification options Append to file Replace File and Update File Append to File adds the number of bits to write to the size of the file If an instruction writes to a file that does not exist a file will be dynamically created on the Storage Device To Access and will contain the number of bits to write at the completion of the instruction The Replace File option replaces an existing file with the new data and the file will have a size equal to the number of bits written when this instruction completes Update File does not affect a file 1t is greater than or equal
165. age or data transfer was completed by this transfer device TRANSFER DEVICE UTILIZATION STATISTICS FRO 0 TO 50 MILLISECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS TRANSFER DEVICE NAME STATE LINK TRANSFER REQUESTS GRANTED 9 REQUESTS INTERRUPTED 0 AVG REQUEST DELAY 454 464 MAX REQUEST DELAY 1718 000 STD DEV DELAY 658 864 INTERRUPTED TRANSFERS 0 AVG INTERRUPT TIME 0 MAX INTERRUPT TIME 0 STD DEV TIME 0 COMPLETED TRANSFERS 8 AVG USAGE TIME 2004 800 MAX USAGE TIME 2649 200 MIN USAGE TIME 1718 400 STD DEV TIME 382 239 AVG QUEUE SIZE 082 MAX QUEUE SIZE 1 000 STD DEV SIZE 274 LOST TRANSFERS TRANSMIT ERRORS 0 QUEUE FLAG 2 BUFFER OVERFLOW 0 THROUGHPUT DATA BITS PER SECOND 10890 000 TRANSFERS SECOND 160 000 PER CENT UTILIZATION 35 148 Standard Transfer Device Utilization Report 231 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Average Minimum Maximum Standard Deviation Usage Time These statistics show how long a PE used a TD from its acquisition until its release Usage time does not include any delay time encountere
166. ages lost for the given combination of message name and sending PE Two separate values for lost messages are displayed Messages are lost by Queue Flag when a Message Instruction s Queue Flag NO and a copy of the message being sent is already present in the received message list of the receiving PE Messages are lost by overflow when the received message list of the receiving PE is full and the receiving PE s Lose Overflow Messages Flag YES Message Name Text up to 40 characters Sending PE The name of the PE sending the specific message RECEIVED MESSAGE REPORT FRO 0 TO 10 SECONDS LOST BY QUEUED Q FLAG OVRFLOW MESSAGE NAME SENDING PE PE 1 200 0 0 RADAR DATA PROCESSED PE 2 283 0 0 STRING COMPLETE PE 1 PE 2 200 0 0 RADAR DATA AVAILABLE PE 1 200 0 0 STRING COMPLETE PE 2 Received Message Report 5 5 13 Message Delivery Report The Message Delivery Report displays the delivery times of each message from a source PE to a destination PE 245 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Message Name Text up to 40 characters Source PE Text up to 40 characters Destination PE Text up to 40 characters Number of Messages Sent The number of complete message deliveries from the source PE to the destination PE Average Maximum Minimum Standard Deviation Delivery
167. al CACI NETWORK II 5 R 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 ELEASE 11 00 03 23 1996 1072916 Instructor s solution to Part 2 of Case 4 Instructor s solution to Part 2 of Case 4 Run for 50 milliseconds KKKXXkXX ETGEN RELEASE GLOBAL GLOBAL FLAGS FLAGS GRAPH1 CENTRAL OFFICE gt Z DOMIZER OCK YES TCH NO Zot RAPH2 OFFICE LINK ITHETIC VARIATE NO 0 PUT LISTING NO T FAULT LIS GTH pHPU HdDOaJ gt O ING NO 50 000000 MIL AL REPOR ROCESSOR ee RANSFER D EVICE I P INSTRUCTION T S TORAGE DEVICE ODULE SEMAPHORE ESSAGE SNAPSHOT PLOT DATA F ILE YES RUNTIME WARNINGS BOTH TEXT SCALE DIAGRA ERRE STATI ST STATISTICAL D NAME TYP ll G HF FU I nee il o U po INTERARRIVAL TIME BOUND BOUND FACTOR 10 24 BOUNDARIE S 0 11 00 FIL SAVED 03 22 1996 15 11 29 103 325 ICAL DISTRIBUTION FUNCTIONS ISTRIBUTIONS IFORM 350 000 3500 000 DARD BACKOFF T E BACKOFE E 51 200 IMIT 16 000 ELAY 1 00E 006 PROCESS ING ELEMENTS HARDWARE TYPE PROCESSING NAME OFFI LOCATION STY I
168. al instructions In addition Macro Instructions can be made up of Macro Instructions Therefore what looks like a single instruction in a module definition may turn out in reality to expand to 100 or 1000 actual instructions to execute Instruction Type Different types of instructions take different amounts of NETWORK II 5 CPU time to execute The hierarchy of instruction CPU execution times is Highest gt Read Write Instruction Message Instruction Semaphore Instruction Lowest gt Processing Instruction Unfortunately instruction type choices are generally dictated by the job that needs to be done However when designing a simulation execution time considerations may help a you decide the instruction type to choose when there is a choice In general terms a Processing Instruction takes half the CPU time of a Semaphore Instruction and a Semaphore Instruction takes half the time of either a Message or a Read Write Instruction Therefore using a semaphore instead of a message to synchronize two modules could result in a modest saving at runtime 213 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Preconditions Combining modules will cut down on the simulation execution time because it will reduce the amount of precondition checking NETWORK II 5 will be required to perform It takes approximately the same amount of CPU time to set up a module with 6 instructions in its instruction list as 1t takes to set up a module with a single instruction excl
169. al to zero and less than or equal to the simulation Run Length The Plot Stop Time must be greater than the Plot Start Time and less than or equal to the simulation Run Length TEXTWORK Run Parameters LAN Analyzer File The LAN Analyzer File parameter specifies the name of an External Traffic File file type EXT that you wish to use in the simulation The External Traffic File is generated by the TRAFLINK program If you choose to enter a LAN Analyzer file name TEXTWORK attempts to locate the file If the file cannot be found TEXTWORK will inform you that it is unable to find the file and then again ask if you wish to specify a LAN Analyzer File Do you want to specify a LAN Analyzer Name Y N ABORT gt y Pl as nter the LAN Analyzer file name gt casel ext AA TEXTWORK Run Parameters Runtime Warnings Runtime Warnings notify you of potential error conditions in the simulation Runtime Warnings may be sent to the simulation Report File and or to your display Do you want to specify how to handle runtime errors now Y N ABORT gt y 205 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Would you like runtime messages directed to your Terminal the Listing file Both places or Neither place T L B N gt hb l By default Runtime Warnings will be sent to both your terminal and the simulation Report File The simulation will halt when a Runtime Warning is encountered and you will then be prompted to take a co
170. ally assigns a unique random number stream to each distribution The stream is actually an index into an array of random number seeds which are integers An index is used instead of an actual seed value to preserve the machine independence of a NETWORK II 5 simulation Using unique random number streams preserves the statistical independence of the distributions in a model For instance independence allows changing the iteration distribution of one Module without affecting the iteration periods statistically chosen for any other Module 12 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 The user is given control over the starting random number seeds to be used so that the effect of different random number streams on the simulation can be studied If a simulation contained 100 different random distributions manually editing the simulation data file to alter them would be tedious At the top level of NETWORK use the Define Controls command to get to the form that allows you to define parameters which apply to all statistical distributions On this form you can set the values of Antithetic Variate Randomizer and Minimize Random Seed Array The Randomizer and Antithetic Variate features are offered to make it easy to change every distribution s starting condition The Randomizer is an integer between 0 and 9 It merely specifies which of 10 random number seed arrays is to be used by the simulation The Antithetic Variate is either YES or NO The Antith
171. and PE 4 The destination of the message instruction in PE 1 would then be the name of this Route PE 2 and PE 3 require a Module with a Message Requirement matching the name of the message to forward This Module will execute a message instruction whose destination is NEXT So when PE 1 sends its message it is then 46 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 forwarded by PE 2 and then PE 3 until it reaches PE 4 If you use wild cards for the Message Requirement of the forwarding Modules one Module is able to forward many different messages Also note that the forwarding Module can work in any direction It forwards messages regardless of source and destination Therefore you probably will not need more than 1 forwarding Module per PE 47 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual ERER ROUTES HARDWARE TYPE ROUTE NAME PE 1 TO 4 NEXT PE PE 2 NEXT PE PE 3 NEXT PE PE 4 A Sample Route 2 2 5 Echo Processor Lists Message Instructions allow you to reference an Echo Processor List Echo Processor Lists are defined at the top level The EPL Echo Processor List is given a name It consists of a list of TD names each of which has a PE name associated with it This feature allows a PE to mark a message so that it ECHOs via a different PE than itself By default whenever a PE retransmits a message it tags the message with its own name If the message sent was returned using the ECHO feature it would then return via thi
172. and discontinues the simulation trace to both the display and the simulation Report File if specified Halt merely stops the generation of trace messages The simulation will continue until the specified stop time A confirmation is requested before the Halt command is accepted Trace Report Button Resume The Resume command temporarily discontinues the simulation trace from the current time to a user specified time in the future You will be asked to enter a Resume Time which must be a value greater than the current simulation time and less than the simulation Run Length When the simulation time reaches the Resume Time the simulation trace will be continued Trace Report Button Continue The Continue command advances the simulation to the next listing of traced events The list of events is updated only when there is enough to fill the list box This is normally about 20 lines which represents about 5 events 4 2 7 i Runtime Warnings Runtime warnings notify you that a potential problem has occurred in the simulation If a runtime warning occurs and the Warnings to Screen option has been selected the Runtime Warning Form will be displayed The Runtime Warning Form provides several reporting and course of action options including Close Quit Report Message to File and Future Messages to Screen In addition the Print option from the menubar remains active These options allow you to determine the state of the simulation at the time of
173. and may be useful in cleaning up the display Display Scale Diagram The Display Scale Diagram command allows you to change the magnification of objects on the display Selecting the Display Scale Diagram command has the same affect as clicking on the toolbar s Scale Button After selecting this command the Scale Selection form is presented The diagram scale ranges from the platform minimum Windows UNIX 1 OS 2 DOS 10 to 100 A value box is also provided for fine tuning of the diagram scale The default scale is 40 percent To choose the diagram scale click on the appropriate radio button and click on OK 109 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 gt Work Area Size Menu a FA Bl ah E Percent of Current Work Area 0 50 gt E Al Add to Bottom and Right C Add to Left and Top The Work Area Size Form Display Work Area Size The Display Work Area Size will let you expand the size of the canvas on which you can position a hardware layout When you start NETWORK the default size of the work area is 1 5 times the size of the display window with the extra space defined to the right and below the display Initially the scroll box of the vertical scrollbar is at the extreme top and the scroll box of the horizontal scrollbar is at the extreme left This means that if you scroll all the way to the right you have shifted the display one half screen to the right and if you scroll all the way to the bottom
174. ansfer Interestingly the 802 6 MAN Metropolitan Area Network standard can be easily modeled with the Priority Protocol The control bus in the 802 6 is used by all stations on the ring to compute a prioritized request queue for the ring To model this in NETWORK II 5 you only need to model the data bus and let the Priority Protocol mechanism handle the ordering of TD requests 2 2 2 7 Token Ring Protocol A Token Ring Protocol views the Transfer Device Connection List as a ring with the last member of the list followed at least in a logical sense by the first member of the list After a PE has used the Transfer Device an allowed number of times given by the connection s Key the Transfer Device is allocated to the next PE on this ring PEs without pending requests will be skipped It is possible that no other PE has a request and control will immediately return to the PE that was using the Transfer Device Once a PE has control of a Transfer Device it may not be interrupted by any other PE It will release control of the Transfer Device when one of the following occurs 1 It has finished the Key number of accesses of this TD The Key is specified for a given PE in the Connection List The default value for Key is one time If the Key value is greater than 1 the PE must execute a continuous series of instructions that all access this TD to retain control When a PE executes an instruction that does not access this TD the TD is allocated t
175. ansfer Device per second in the course of the simulation Although this value is related to the speed of a Transfer Device a slower TD may have a higher throughput than a faster TD if more bits are sent on the slower TD Transfers Per Second is the number of transmissions per second conducted by this Transfer Device in the course of the simulation Per Cent Utilization The percentage of time from the start of simulation or reset time until the time of this report that the transfer device was either allocated to a PE or passing a token For a TD with a token passing protocol the percent utilization is dependent on the token passing time If the token passing time is left in the NR No Response state token passes occur in zero time and do not affect the percent utilization However if an explicit 232 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File token passing time is used the percent utilization will be 100 percent because the TD will always be in use either allocated to a PE or else passing a token 5 5 5 Collision Transfer Device Utilization Statistics The collision Transfer Device utilization report is generated for TDs LANs which utilize a collision protocol CSMA CD LANs Aloha Collision and contains the following information Transfer Device Name Text up to 40 characters Collision Episodes The total number of collision episodes that occurred during the simulation A collision episode occurs when two or more potential users attem
176. ansferred to from a Processing Element via a Transfer Device The default response Of ANY presumes that any Transfer Device that connects the source and destination will be acceptable Although NETWORK II 5 would never pick a Transfer Device that does not connect the source and destination this feature allows the user to restrict the transfer of a large file to a high speed local data link even though a low speed global bus also connects the two devices The first file read by a Module becomes its original file Original files are inherited so that the original file for a successor Module becomes the first file read in by the predecessor Module For example assume Module K read in FILE 1 then FILE 2 and then chained to Module J Module J would inherit FILE 1 as its original file If you do not want a Module to pass inherited files to successor Modules you may set the Inhibit File Inheritance flag of the successor Module to NO The original file concept is only used by the File Linear Distribution and the File Count Distribution The File Linear Distribution performs an Ax B calculation where A and B are user defined coefficients and x is the number of bits read in the original file The File Count Distribution performs a similar Ax B calculation in which the count of the original file is substituted for x 23 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 2 2 1 6 Message Instructions Message Instructions are used to provide communication betw
177. apter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 Devices has sufficient room the transfer is blocked until sufficient room becomes available The File Accessed is the name of the file this instruction will manipulate Reading a file that does not exist produces a runtime error The Read Instruction will then continue to execute as if the file is present Writing to a file that does not exist will cause a file by this name to be automatically created Files may be predefined in the SD Storage Device form when using NETWORK so that they exist at the start of a simulation Files are distinguished not only by there names but also by an optional File Count A File Count can either be an integer value or a statistical distribution When a Read Write Instruction attempts to access a file 1t will search for a file with the appropriate name If the Read Write Instruction also has a specified File Count then the instruction will search for a file with a matching count in addition to a matching name If a Write Instruction dynamically creates a file during a simulation and if a File Count is specified the new file will then be given this value as its count Writing to an existing may change its size but its count will not be altered The File Count can be used to create new versions of the same file and can also be a part of a Module s File Status Requirement A Read Write Instruction may optionally contain a list of Allowed Transfer Device s A file is tr
178. apter 3 NETWORK NETWORK II 5 bd EA File Edit Define Display Verify Analysis Help L3 lt Select lt A ll O O 2 5 2 Processing Element lt Transter Device lt Storage Device lt Gateway lt LAN lt Text Label lola e e Jm 5e gt lt Scale The NETWORK Toolbar To create a new hardware structure PE TD SD LAN Gateway select the appropriate toolbar button by clicking on it A new building block icon is automatically created and the cursor will be displayed as the building block s icon Position the icon at the desired location and click on the mouse once again to anchor it Now the PEs SDs and Gateways can be connected to the TDs and LANs PEs SDs and Gateways may not be connected directly to each other 1 e no direct PE to PE PE to SD PE to Gateway connections are allowed PEs SDs and gateways may only connect to each other through TDs and LANs Similarly no direct TD LAN to TD LAN connections are permitted TDs LANs may only be connected to other TDs LANs through PEs and Gateways To create a connection click on the toolbar s Connect Button Position the cursor on a TD or LAN and click the mouse This anchors the first connection point to the TD LAN Next move the mouse to a PE SD or Gateway and click the mouse again A connection has been established Continue making connections in this manner until the network topology has been established The order in whi
179. aration which is described in Chapter 3 2 1 1 Overview Hardware devices are specified in NETWORK II 5 by using building blocks based on the functions of the device being modelled There are three functions performed by the hardware elements in a computer system These are Process data performed by a Processing Element building block Transfer data performed by a Transfer Device building block Store data performed by a Storage Device building block These building blocks are powerful enough to model any device that performs the given function NETWORK IL5 uses an event driven simulation In an event driven simulation you only need to know the timing aspects of an operation not its implementation For example to model a communications link NETWORK II 5 only needs to know when to send the data and how long it takes to move the data from source to destination Whether the technology involved is a satellite channel or a fiber optics link is immaterial Actual devices are modelled by defining one or more building blocks to perform the function of the device being modelled Most devices can be modelled by a single building block As an example when modeling a personal computer connected to a local area network the personal computer can usually be adequately modelled by a single Processing Element building block However if the internal operation of the personal computer were of interest it could be modelled as a collection of
180. ased on the count of a file A Wait For precondition is a delaying precondition not a scheduling precondition Therefore a 57 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Module must have another precondition in addition to the Wait For precondition s to be considered for execution For example to start a Module every time a particular file was written the Module could be given a Start Time of zero and be listed as its own successor This will meet the NETWORK requirement that a Module have a scheduling precondition the zero Start Time and cause a new copy of this Module to be made after the old one completes because it is a successor to itself BEWARE This method requires that the Module during its lifetime do something to inhibit its next execution such as to Read and Destroy the file Otherwise an infinite loop will result Wait For Message Status Requirements allow a Module to require that one or more messages be received at the Module s host Processing Element When the Module leaves the checking preconditions state each of the messages which satisfied the Module s Wait For Message Status Requirements is taken from its host PE s Received Message List This effectively uses up the message Another message must be received before the requirement would be satisfied again If two or more Modules had the same message as a precondition the first Module to execute would use up the message and the other Modules would have to wait unti
181. ass 1 consisting of scanning the traffic file prn for PE and TD LAN Segment names TRAFLINK will proceed with Pass 2 in which information is written to a temporary file based on the linking process options During Pass 3 your External Traffic File ext 1s generated and saved The TRAFLINK File Progress Form will be displayed during Pass 2 and Pass 3 TRAFLINK will also display messages if any errors are found during this process At the conclusion of Pass 3 TRAFLINK returns to NETWORK II 5 The newly created External Traffic File will be stored with name same as the type of traffic it represents i e Message with extension ext For large models multiple LAN Traffic Files may be selected at the Setup dialog box The LAN Traffic Files may have been gathered using different Network traffic capturing tools or may be representing different LAN segments This will allow you to build merge traffic from different segments into a single External Traffic File By checking ON the Use External File option all the external files generated by TRAFLINK will be used by NETWORK during simulation 10 3 TRAFLINK FILES 10 3 1 LAN Traffic File PRN This file contains captured traffic data TRAFLINK scans this file to determine LAN node names and messages used to create the External Traffic File ext TRAFLINK requires that the LAN Traffic File contain the following information in plain text Delta time in seconds milliseconds or microseco
182. ateway If the message arrives over a TD or LAN which has Separate Blocks YES the message will be considered for processing and or retransmission block by block as it arrives 52 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 There is a set of reformatting parameters for processing time and message length for each TD LAN connected to the Gateway The processing time is calculated using the equation of the form Ax B where A referred to as the Message Multiplier is any real number x is the incoming message length in bits and B referred to as the Message Additive is any real number The processing time is the time for any required translation and message length adjustment between the two TDs LANs The retransmitted message length is calculated using a different equation also of the form Ax B where A the Processing Multiplier is any real number x is the incoming message length in bits and B the Processing Additive is any real number By default the processing time is zero A 0 B 0 and the outgoing message length is equal to the incoming message length A 1 B 0 The set of reformatting parameters for processing time and message length can be either identical for all output units or set individually You set these parameters by clicking on the name of the TD LAN that the output unit serves in the connection list of the Gateway form There is no reason that the formatting time must be the same no matter what direction a message is
183. ause this field is measured in bits The Global Message List is the global equivalent of a PE s Received Message List and it has similar check boxes to define it Queue Flag Keep Blocks Separate and Lose Overflow Messages can be set to YES or NO Name Offset Three attributes are grouped under the Name Offset label to control how names of new data structures are shown on the display The attributes can be set for an individual data structure in its graphics form The X horizontal value controls how far the starting position of a name is offset from the center of an icon A negative value positions names to the left a value of zero will start a name at the icon s center and a positive value moves names to the right The Y vertical value controls the vertical offset of names in relation to the center of an icon Positive values will move the name above the icon s center while negative values move the name downward The Line Spacing value is used to control the spacing of lines for names that are broken into more than one line 179 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 3 6 Graphics Forms Each of the hardware data structures of NETWORK II 5 has graphical attributes to describe its appearance on the display The graphics form of a data structure is accessed from within the attributes form of the data structure The attributes and controls common to all or most of the graphics forms will be described next followed by illustrations and descriptions
184. aw The icon you just created should be available from the standard menus when you restart Network IL 5 The portions of the icon that you have just created which are marked Color definable with DCOLOR A will be assigned the color of device during layout and when busy during animation Potential Problems 1 A new piece does not appear above an existing piece Every piece of the icon has a priority Pieces are drawn and overlap based on their priority Click on the piece then on Edit Detail to get to the form where you can set priority Higher numbers are higher priority Simply make sure the priority of your piece 1s higher than the priority of the piece that was obscuring it 366
185. ayed Fill in the plot 118 Chapter 3 NETWORK parameters as described in Chapter 7 Analysis Plot is only selectable after a simulation has been run if a Simulation Plot File had been requested for the simulation Analysis Browse Report The Analysis Browse Report command displays the Simulation Report File LIS which was generated by the simulation engine for the current model To use the Analysis Browse Report command you must have previously run a simulation for the current model For example if the model EXAMPLE NET is the current model read in by NETWORK the Analysis Browse Report command will allow you to examine the contents of the file EXAMPLE LIS If a Simulation Report File LIS does not exist for the current model the Analysis Browse Report command will not be selectable 3 5 ATTRIBUTE FORMS To completely define the data structures that comprise your NETWORK II 5 model it will be necessary to provide values for the various attributes of the data structures These attributes describe the behavior of an object during a simulation Each data structure type has its corresponding attributes form which presents these attributes for examination and editing Many of the attributes such as a name are common to all or most of the data structures These comment attributes will be described in the first part of this section along with the most common forms control buttons The remainder of this section will detail the attribute forms
186. bar selecting the appropriate hardware type from the menu that appears selecting the name of the specific hardware structure from the list of names and then selecting the EDIT button To create a non graphical building block the software data structures select Define from the menubar and then the appropriate entity type When the name list for the entity type selected appears enter a new name for the building block by selecting the ADD button The name will be added to the list and a new building block has been created To edit the building block s attributes select the name in the list and then select the EDIT button which will be enabled as a result of highlighting a list item You may create and edit Modules statistical distribution functions Semaphores Routes Echo PE Lists Destination Mixes Instruction Mixes Macro Instructions and messages in this manner Modules may be defined by using on the Define Module menubar command which will display a list of existing modules You may add a new Module by selecting the ADD 84 Chapter 3 NETWORK button and entering a new name Modules may also be accessed and created when within the PE form Click on the Modules button found in the PE form and a list of Modules that run on this PE will be displayed Modules may be selected from the list to be edited and new Modules may be added Several means of directly adding hardware and software data structures to your model have been described a
187. been read or a Semaphore count See the section on Statistical Distributions later in this chapter for further details on Linear Distributions 2 2 1 5 Read Write Instructions Read Write Instructions move a file between a Storage Device and a Processing Element Files have a name and a size and reside on one or more Storage Device s Trying to read a file from a Storage Device where it does not reside or trying to write a file to a Storage Device that does not have sufficient space available produces a warning in NETWORK II 5 A Processing Element will execute a Read Write Instruction according to the following sequence of events Request a Transfer Device Request the Storage Device To Access Request the File Accessed Work the amount of time it takes to read write the Number Of Bits To Transmit taking into account the Storage Device time and the Transfer Device time Relinquish the File Relinquish the Storage Device Pee veer AM 7 Relinquish the Transfer Device The time it takes to read or write a file depends on the speed of the Transfer Device and Storage Device used Specifically it will take the greater of either the time to transfer the file over the Transfer Device or to read write the file from to the Storage Device Read Instructions which use a Transfer Device that is slower than the Storage Device used will add the time for the Storage Device to access the first word of the requested file to the Transfer Dev
188. before again requesting a Transfer Device after a collision The algorithm is called in NETWORK and has the following parameters TYPE IEEE BACKOFF 36 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 Slot Time a multiplier The distribution picks a random integer based on the number of collisions then multiplies that integer by this value to compute the amount of time to wait before RETRYING to get the TD Retry Limit After this number of collisions the processor stops retrying for the TD Instead it waits the Limit Delay then tries again If you reach the Retry Limit you are in real trouble The number of times that you reach this limit is included in the TD report Limit Delay After a PE reaches its Retry Limit it waits this amount of time before trying for the TD again When it retries the collision count restarts at zero Offset a parameter not in the IEEE standard This value is added to the result of the IEEE algorithm It is included merely to add flexibility Set to zero if you do not want to modify what would be the standard result of the IEEE formula Stream a random number stream for this distribution The algorithm uses the parameters as follows IF TYPE TEEE BACKOFE vv uses PE COLLISION COUNT to store the number of collisions PETO backoff delay PERA bet rr ADD 1 IF PE ELSE
189. bove NETWORK will also indirectly create new data structures when you enter a name of a data structure that does not exist in an attribute field of a current building block As an example if you are editing a Module and enter the name of a Statistical Distribution Function for the Iteration Period of the Module and a SDF of the given name does not exist a new one is automatically added to the model If you verified the model immediately after editing the Module an error message would be generated because the new SDF has not been defined with a type Be aware that adding new names in attribute fields may automatically create new data structures which must be defined to be valid 3 2 3 Defining Global Model Attributes Global Model Attributes can be used to influence the behavior of a model to achieve varying simulation results Changing Randomizer and Antithetic Variate will produce different numbers in a simulation without changing the attributes of the model components Choose the Define Controls command from the menubar to access the Controls form which contains various global attributes 85 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual A ETT Controls Menu Autosave llo Hin Randomizer jo Run Batch Simulation Plot File Selections Full Verify X PE and GATEWAY in Plot File Iterate By Priority X TD in Plot File X Minimize Random Seed Array IX SD in Plot File Antithetic Variate IX SEMAPHORE in Plot File Maximum Message Delivery C
190. ccur in the course of the simulation A complete listing of runtime warnings is provided in Chapter 9 of this manual Runtime warnings may be sent to the simulation Report File by selecting the Warnings to File option at the start of a simulation in NETWORK and TEXTWORK 5 5 SUMMARY REPORTS 224 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File The Summary Reports contains the simulation statistics for the Processing Elements Transfer Devices Storage Devices Modules Instructions messages and Semaphores in your model The summary reports are automatically generated at the end of the simulation and may be generated periodically in conjunction with a narrative trace or interactively during the simulation The summary reports include the following information Processing Element Utilization Statistics Completed Instruction Statistics Global TD Queue Statistics Transfer Device Utilization Statistics Storage Device Utilization Statistics Global Module Queue Statistics Completed Module Statistics Semaphore Statistics Message Statistics Received Message Report Message Delivery Report 5 5 1 Processing Element Utilization Statistics The following information is provided for each column in the Processing Element report Processing Element Name Text up to 40 characters Number of Storage Requests Granted This is the number of times PE requests to use Storage Devices were granted It does not include requests still pending Number of Interrupte
191. ce a verify warning because no time is spent in sending bits on the TD To set the Cycle Time click on the value box labeled Cycle Time and enter a value BUS 1 in the example model has a Cycle Time of 13 0 microseconds Change Cycles Per Word of BUS 1 to 8 by clicking on the value box labeled Cycles Per Word and entering 8 The attributes of BUS 2 and BUS 3 should also be changed BUS 2 has a Cycle Time of 1 mic 8 Bits Per Cycle 256 Words Per Block and a Block Overhead Time of 15 microseconds BUS 3 has a Cycle Time of 2 mic 8 Bits Per Cycle 256 Words Per Block and a Block Overhead Time of 25 microseconds You also have the option of changing the appearance of a TD by selecting the Graphics button and then making changes in the TD Draw Options form Segments may be added to or removed from the TD it may be scaled and rotated and other display options can be selected from within this form 8 3 3 Adding Storage Devices To add a Storage Device to your model click once on the SD palette icon fifth from the top and then position the SD image in the desired location and click again A new SD has now been created with the default SD icon and with a default name SD 1 SD 2 etc Perform this operation twice to add the two Storage Devices to be used in the example model 279 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual HE TYSOHE 11 5 fae da Dries Displey Verify Arsbesie Wels Defining a New Storage Device Once a new SD has been added yo
192. ch a connection is created is 83 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual important The first connection point must be on a TD or LAN with the second point on a PE SD or Gateway When the toolbar s Connect Button has been selected you may create as many connections as you desire After you have finished creating connections deselect the Connect Button by clicking on the display background If you wish to redraw a connection between to devices make a new connection between them and the old connection between the two devices will be removed 3 2 2 Defining Network Operations In order to define the network operations you must specify the characteristics of each PE SD Gateway TD LAN and Module in your model For a more complex model you may need to create Semaphores SDFs Instruction Mixes Destination Mixes Routes or Macro Instructions When a new hardware data structure is created it is given a default set of attributes name icon model parameters To add meaning to these structures you must edit the structure s attributes so that they reflect the system under consideration To edit a hardware structure s attributes double click on the hardware structure s icon The hardware structure s attribute form will then be displayed Make the desired changes and click on OK to save the changes to the structure and remove the form Alternatively you may access the hardware structure s attribute form by selecting Define from the menu
193. chronous allocation may be a value greater than or equal to zero Each of these Connections may also have a minimum synchronous priority defined used to prevent low priority transfers from using the synchronous allocation of a PE The priority of a transfer request is based on the priority of the Module executing the instruction invoking the transfer The synchronous allocation is tested before the start of every transmission and is not used to interrupt a transmission Therefore a PE will continue to transmit after the expiration of the synchronous allocation for any transmission begun before the allocation expires After a synchronous allocation ends a PE will begin its asynchronous traffic which is traffic that is controlled by Target Token Rotation Times TTRT For each PE 40 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 Connection of the TD a list of Target Token Rotation Times may be defined for any number of priority classes The list of Target Token Rotation Times is used to provide a dynamic allocation for the PE based on the priorities of its transmission requests Each TTRT will have a priority and a time value associated with that priority The TD priority of a transfer request is based on the priority of the executing Module that is invoking the transfer Multiple levels of priority are available to a PE to restrict the use of a Transfer Device when it is highly utilized Asynchronous traffic is regulated by the Target Token Rotation Tim
194. command a list of cut data structures will be displayed Selecting names from the list of cut data structures and then clicking on the OK button will restore the Cut data structures TD LAN connections to PEs SDs and Gateways will not be restored when you return a PE SD or Gateway to the model The Edit Uncut command is selectable only when a hardware data structure has been cut from the model 3 4 3 The Define Menu 101 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 DRA Display Verify Analysis Help Controls Destination Mix Echo PE List Gateway Instruction Mix LAN Macro Instruction Message Module Processing Element Route Storage Device Statistical Distribution Function Semaphore Transfer Device The Define Menu The Define Menu allows you to create edit cut restore and clone the data structures of your model in a list oriented fashion You may also edit program and simulation control parameters by selecting Controls from the Define Menu The Define Menu is an alternate means for working with the hardware data structures of NETWORK II 5 which can be created and selected directly on the display For most of the software data structures the Define Menu is the only way to access them within NETWORK When the Define command is selected a menu with the names of all the types of building blocks of NETWORK II 5 is displayed with the additional choice of Controls Selecting Define Controls will present the Controls Fo
195. commonly used to model features of real Storage Devices For example one feature easily modelled by a block is the sector of a disk Once a sector is located Block Overhead Time models the disk seek time the words in the sector are transmitted without delay When a read or write involves a block that is not completely full the partial block will incur the full Block Overhead Time but is not filled with blank words to pad out the transfer The amount of time it takes a Storage Device to read or write a file depends not only on the speed of this device but may also depend on the speed of the requesting Transfer Device If the Storage Device is faster than the Transfer Device the read write proceeds at the speed of the Transfer Device The Storage Device is marked as busy for the entire length of the transfer If on the other hand the speed of the Storage Device is the limiting speed the read write will take the amount of time it takes to move the data in or out of the Storage Device 43 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 2 2 3 2 Storage Device Attributes Every Storage Device has A name A Capacity A Bits Per Word A Words Per Block A Number of Ports A Read Word Access Time A Write Word Access Time A Read Word Overhead Time A Write Word Overhead Time A Read Block Overhead Time A Write Block Overhead Time A Read Access Delay A Write Access Delay Capacity is a real number specifying the total number of bits
196. crollbar on the bottom of the display provides left and right movements To examine an object out of range of the display and to the right of the currently displayed objects click on the right arrow of the bottom scrollbar or simply drag the scroll box to the right When you begin NETWORK the working area size which is the area on which you may position hardware icons is equal to 1 5 times the display window expanded to the right and bottom of the display To increase the size of the work area for large layouts select the Display Work Area Size command from the menubar 3 3 2 Selecting Objects On the Display Objects on the display PE TD SD LAN Gateway may be selected for editing moving cutting etc by clicking once on the object s icon When an object has been selected its icon is highlighted Multiple objects may be selected at a given time To deselect all selected objects click on the display background To immediately edit a single object on the display double click on its icon and its corresponding attributes form will be displayed 3 3 3 Positioning Objects On the Display PE icons SD icons Gateway icons and labels may be positioned on the display by dragging these objects with the cursor Click directly on an object and move the mouse without releasing the mouse button As long as the mouse button is not released you may reposition the object on the display Release the mouse button when the object is in the desired posi
197. ct that directly from the Setup dialog box by selecting the Set Layout button 10 2 2 5 Matching Names After the Setup Form parameters have been entered you may start the linking process by clicking on the Match Names button located on the bottom of the form TRAFLINK will then scan the LAN Traffic File prn in Pass 1 searching the file for PE names and message names The TRAFLINK File Progress Form displays a running count of lines read number of PE names found and number of messages found during Pass 1 When TRAFLINK completes Pass 1 the Name Match Form is displayed The function of the Name Match Form is to establish the name map between PE names found in the LAN Traffic File with the PE names found in your model 340 Chapter 10 TRAFLINK III ES TRAFLINK III Name Match No Name Match File has been loaded X Display Matched Names E A Set Link lt all Links in Model gt Save External Name Model Name _ Save As superfly superfly Broadcast lt Local Broadcast gt Auigmatin Match barfly barfly ee E dragonfly dragonfly popfly popfly Figure 10 9 The TRAFLINK Name Match Form At this point a Name Match Form would be displaying all the names found in your LAN Traffic File TRAFLINK will not generate the External File until all the names in the traffic file have been mapped with the names in the model PE names in the model may be mapped to multiple PE names in the traffic file In order to create a name
198. cting the DONE button removes the Verify Progress Report form In the Verify Progress Report the first column Number Checked notes the number of structures of each type found The second column Number With Errors notes the number of data structures that have errors 3 2 5 Saving The Model A model may be saved by selecting the File Save command from the menubar You are now ready to run a simulation 87 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 3 2 6 Running A Simulation When you are satisfied that your model is sufficient to test use the Analysis Start Simulation command on the menubar to display the Run Parameters form After selecting a Run Length and setting any other desired optional attributes start the simulation by selecting the RUN button A full Verify is always performed on a model just before the simulation starts NETWORK II 5 gt NET4 SNET EA a Network 11 5 Run Parameters ah Run Length 1 000000000 SECONDS E Trace to Screen gt I Trace to File l Le NET104 NET8TO10 al NET10 NETWORK II 5 d The Run Parameters Form 3 3 MANIPULATING THE DISPLAY 3 3 1 Scrolling Scroll bars are positioned on the display window to allow you to focus on different parts of your model if the layout is larger than the display window The vertical scrollbar on the right side of the display provides the up and down movements for the display window 88 Chapter 3 NETWORK and the horizontal s
199. ctions which are themselves made up of 10 PE instructions This Module would execute 10 x 10 100 instructions before it is done Macro Instructions are useful in reducing the amount of work required to produce a simulation where many Modules have sections of their instruction lists in common They are also valuable in top down refinement of a simulation For example a Write Instruction in a preliminary simulation could be defined as WRITE 600 BITS TO MEM 1 but later refined into a series of 3 instructions that SET STATUS FLAG WRITE 600 BITS TO MEM 1 and RESET STATUS FLAG with one simple change Macro Instructions are also used to create loops within a Module If you have a series of instructions that you would like to loop through n times put the instructions in a Macro Instruction and call it with a number of executions of n An example of a Macro Instruction is SOFTWARE TYPE MACRO INSTRUCTION NAME MACRO 1 NUMBER OF INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTION NAME PROC NUMBER OF INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTION NAME SET NIFORM BETWEEN 1 AND 10 SSING INSTRUCTION HG bh 109 EMAPHORE 1 Notice the use of the name of a Statistical distribution instead of a number for the number of times to execute the first instruction 2 3 4 Files A File represents the organized storage of information in a Storage Device It may be created by NETWORK when a model is bei
200. d Gateways the Edit Detail command accesses the forms which contain the object s attributes When multiple items are selected PEs are edited first followed by Gateways TDs LANs and SDs If you have not selected an object the Edit Detail command will not be selectable NETWORK II 5 Help 98 Chapter 3 NETWORK The Edit Menu Edit Clone After selecting an object or a group of objects use the Edit Clone command to produce another object with identical attributes Multiple copies of an object can be created connections may be duplicated Modules specific to a cloned PE may be copied and Semaphores specific to a cloned PE may be cloned If you have not selected an object on the display the Edit Clone command will not be available Clones are positioned next to each other in a line The X Offset default 20 and Y Offset default 0 values determine the position of the newly created objects relative to the original cloned object Clones are automatically named by adding a copy number to the name of the parent object For example if two clones are created from the PE named WORKSTATION the resulting clone names are WORKSTATION 1 and WORKSTATION 2 PE SD and Gateway connections to TDs and LANs may be replicated by selecting the Clone Connections check box An example application of Clone is to produce multiple identical PEs connected to the same TD or LAN For this application it is helpful to set the attributes and draw opt
201. d Predecessors one instruction named FFT and will have an Anded Successor REPLACE DATA REPLACE DATA will have Anded Predecessors and four instructions to execute REPLACE DATA RADAR DATA PROCESSED STRING COMPLETE and RESET TIME THE DATA STRING The communications function will consist of three Modules Because the first Module of this chain executes only on PE 1 you may wish to return to the PE Form for PE 1 to add these Modules Start by adding the Module CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER Select the new name and then Edit to complete the definition of this Module This Module will 287 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual iterate every 120 milliseconds so an Iteration Period must be defined Three instructions will be performed by this Module SET TIME THE MSG BUFFER STRING GET MESSAGE BUFFER and CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER This Module will also have two Statistical Successors which can be added in the Module Successors Form Select the radio button Statistical and then add the names MSG NOT AVAILABLE and DISPLAY MESSAGE Because these are Statistical Successors their chaining is based on percentages When new Statistical Successors are added to the list they are given a default percentage of zero The Percent button to the right of the successor list is used to edit these percentages Select MSG NOT AVAILABLE click on Percent and enter the value 90 and then change the percent for DISPLAY MESSAGE to 10 Module m Hana Ennek mrsa HETTA Vi
202. d Storage Requests This is the number of times a Module operating on this PE was interrupted while it had a pending Storage Device request Average Maximum Standard Deviation Wait Time Statistics on the time a PE waited to use a Storage Device They do not include pending requests or time waiting for a file once a Storage Device request is granted Number of General Storage Requests This is the number of times the PE accessed General Storage of a Storage Device There is never any delay in accessing General Storage so no delay statistics are kept 225 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Number of File Requests Granted The number of times the PE was granted access to a file in a Storage Device not including pending requests Number of Interrupted File Requests The number of times a Module operating on this PE was interrupted while it had a pending file request Average Maximum Standard Deviation File Request Wait Time Statistics on the time Modules operating on this PE spent waiting for a file request to be fulfilled The statistics do not include pending requests or time waiting for the Storage Device Number of Transfer Requests Granted This is the number of times that the PE was granted access to a TD LAN It does not include pending TD LAN requests When a PE is connected to a collision TD LAN this statistic includes the number of successful transfers plus the number of collided attempts Number of Interrupted Transfer Requests The
203. d for this semaphore when this check box is selected Include Count in Plot File Include Response in Plot File These check boxes determine if data on the Semaphore s count and response will be added to the plot file during a simulation 174 Chapter 3 NETWORK 3 5 16 Message Form NETWORK II 5 gt Name NEW DATA AVAILABLE X Delivery Report The Message Form Delivery Report The Delivery Report flag will be set to YES when this check box is selected and determines if the message will appear in the Delivery Report 3 5 17 Controls Form The Controls Form allows you to manage NETWORK Full Verify Autosave TD LAN Move Options and change certain simulation parameters Iterate by Priority Minimize Random Seed Array Antithetic Variate Max Message Delivery Combinations Maximum Module Messages and Randomizer Full Verify The Full Verify check box determines the type of verification report produced when Verify is invoked either at the top level or from a data structure form If the Full Verify 175 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual check box is not selected a brief description of verification errors is given If the Full Verify check box is selected additional notes on default parameters and model characteristics are given in the verification report INN Controls Menu Autosave jo Hin Randomizer jo ua C Run Batch Simulation Plot File Selections Full Verify X PE and GATEWAY in Plot File TT
204. d make a selection from the list Connection Width The connection width controls the line width used for the Transfer Device connections The segment width may range from 0 to 999 The default segment width is 120 Automatic Draw Type You may change the drawing type of the Transfer Device by selecting the down arrow of the Automatic Draw Type combo box The available selections include Bus Ring Star and User Position Options Three buttons are available for positioning Transfer Devices and LANs Select the Entire TD LAN button to move the Transfer Device or LAN on the display The TD LAN icon will move with the cursor until you click on the mouse again to anchor the TD LAN icon in a new position The Name and MSG File buttons will move only the TD LAN name and TD LAN Msg File locations respectively Horizontal Scale The Horizontal Scale controls the horizontal size of the TD icon on the display The horizontal scale value ranges from 0 01 to 10 The default scale of 1 presents the TD icon at its original size Increasing the scale above 1 increases the horizontal size of the TD icon Decreasing the scale below 1 decreases the horizontal TD icon size Vertical Scale The Vertical Scale controls the vertical size of the TD icon on the display The vertical scale value ranges from 0 01 to 10 The default scale of 1 presents the TD icon at its original size Increasing the scale above 1 increases the vertical size of the TD icon Decreasing
205. d the time that Module copy starts its first instruction Only Modules which have completed execution are included in this report All delays recorded in these statistics will be due to hardware Wait For message additional predecessor delay for the second and subsequent Module predecessors and host PE requirements A Module with a Start Time and or an Iteration Period will have a copy activated at the Start Time and or each Iteration Period A Module with predecessor conditions will be activated the first time a predecessor chains to it A Module which has a Wait For Required Message as its only precondition will have a copy activated whenever its message preconditions are satisfied This assures that there is always a copy of this Module to wait for the message Average Maximum Minimum Standard Deviation Execution Time This statistic measures the time from the start of this Module s first instruction to the last instruction s completion It includes time spent during interrupts instruction execution and contention delays Number of Restarted Interrupts The number of times the Module was restarted after 1t had been interrupted Average Maximum Standard Deviation Interrupt Time A measurement of the interval between the time an active Module was interrupted and the time it was restarted Only Modules which have been restarted are included 241 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 5 5 9 Semaphore Utilization Statistics Each column in a Sema
206. d up or slow down a PE for sensitivity studies for example Although the Basic Cycle Time may be the actual clock cycle time of the simulated PE it need not be As an example if the minimum time to execute an instruction is 50 microseconds mic and all other instruction execution times are multiples of 50 mic 50 mic would be an obvious choice for the Basic Cycle Time Every PE has an Interrupt Overhead specification Switching from one Module to another due to an interrupt will always invoke the delay given by this specification If you do not want to add any interrupt overhead disable this feature by leaving Interrupt Overhead in the NR No Response state An Interrupt Overhead of zero is not allowed because it adds to simulation execution time without an improvement in simulation accuracy 16 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 Every PE has a Time Slice attribute The Time Slice attribute specifies automatic swapping between equal priority Modules during their execution Setting it to NR will disable this feature Time Slice only applies to Modules whose Interruptibility Flag is set to YES This means you can exclude certain Modules from being affected by Time Slicing The Time Slice feature works as follows When a Module starts executing its first instruction a timer is started which will expire in the amount of time specified by Time Slice If the Module completes before the timer expires the timer is canceled If the timer expir
207. d waiting for this TD Average Maximum Standard Deviation Queue Size Statistics on the queue size of PE requests for this TD These time weighted statistics cover the period from the start of the simulation or reset time to the current time including any periods when the queue was empty Token Passes The number of token passes on the TD This statistic is only collected if the TD has one of the token type protocols with an explicit token passing time defined If token passing time is left in the NR No Response state token passes will not be displayed in the TD utilization report Transmission Error Queue Flag Buffer Overflow Lost Transfers These statistics show the number of times that a transferred message or block was lost by the Transfer Device Transmission error lost transfers can occur on a Transfer Device with a non zero block error probability Queue Flag lost transfers result if the Queue Flag NO in a Message Instruction and a copy of the message being sent is already present at the destination PE Buffer overflow lost transfers can result when messages are sent to a PE with a full received message list and Lose Overflow Messages YES There is no distinction made between messages and blocks by this statistic Each time a message or block is lost the count is incremented Throughput Two statistics related to throughput are provided in the Transfer Device report Data Bits Per Second is the number of bits transmitted on this Tr
208. description Chapter 4 How to run a simulation Chapter 5 The reports produced by a simulation Chapter 6 Using animation Chapter 7 Plotting simulation results Chapter 8 A complete example of a NETWORK II 5 simulation from problem statement to analysis of simulation results Chapter 9 Several methods and guidelines to debug a system description Chapter 10 Using TRAFLINK to import topology and or to drive a simulation with a LAN analyzer trace file Chapter 11 How to convert a Simulation Plot File between binary and text format Appendices describing implementation specific procedures on available hardware platforms are included These currently include MS Windows Windows 3 1 Windows 95 and Windows NT OS 2 Warp 3 0 Unix HP 9000 700 SUN SPARC IBM RISC 6000 Silicon Graphics NETWORK II 5 is written in a higher level language SIMSCRIPT I 5 and is very portable Implementations for other platforms will be added as required NETWORK II 5 User s Manual The final appendix in this manual describes using the SimGraphics II editor for the creation and modification of icons which can be added to your system description 10 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 2 MODELING WITH NETWORK IL5 2 1 INTRODUCTION In this chapter all of the elements which can be used to describe the hardware and software of a computer system in NETWORK II 5 are defined We are not concerned with the exact form of input prep
209. diately and a value of zero is added to the delay statistics If there are no idle ports 237 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual the PE request is queued until a port becomes available SD ports are allocated on a first come first served basis When the requesting PE is assigned a SD port the delay the PE encountered is added to these statistics Number of General Storage Requests Statistics on the number of requests to access General Storage Because multiple users can access General Storage simultaneously a PE can never be delayed when requesting 1t Therefore General Storage Request statistics are kept separately from File Request statistics This avoids averaging in a zero delay to the File Request delay statistics every time an access is made to General Storage Number of File Requests Granted The total number of requests granted for files other than General Storage Number of Interrupted File Requests The number of times a Module with a pending request for a file in this Storage Device was interrupted before the request was granted Average Maximum Standard Deviation File Delay The time a PE spent waiting to access a file on a Storage Device The statistics include only file requests that have been fulfilled Only one PE may access a particular file at a time After a PE acquires a Storage Device 1t requests a file If the file request is granted immediately a value of zero is added to the statistics If another PE is using the file
210. distributions perform a computation of the form Ax B where x is chosen based on the type of distribution For Message Linear Distributions x is the number of bits in the original message that started the Module See Section 2 2 1 6 Message Instructions for how to determine which is the original message For Key Linear Distributions x is the key value of the PE which is currently using this device For File Linear Distributions x is the number of bits in the original file see Section 2 2 1 5 Read Write Instructions for an explanation of which is the original file For Semaphore Linear distributions x is the count of the named Semaphore For Message Count Distributions x is the count of the original message For File Count Distributions x is the count of the original file The Message Linear Distribution may be used to base the Number of Cycles of a Processing Instruction on the size of the incoming message to change the length of a message being retransmitted and so on The File Linear Distribution can be used to send a message of the same size as a file just read The IEEE Backoff Distribution is only acceptable as the Retry Interval for a Transfer Device with a Collision Protocol As such it is described in Section 2 2 2 5 Collision Protocol All random distributions in NETWORK II 5 have a random number stream attribute The stream is an integer value between 1 and 999 If omitted NETWORK automatic
211. e Descriptive text may also be added to indicate simulation events For example if a PE transmits a message over a TD the PE is highlighted with its characteristic color the TD color changes to the source PE color the message text is displayed by the TD and the TD connection to the destination PE changes to the source PE s color The animation display of a PE with a Quantity greater than 1 and with a Drawing Mode of Single Icon is handled in a special way Whenever a member of the PE group becomes busy a count of active PEs in the group is incremented The name of the displayed PE icon will be replaced by the count followed by the name of the most recently started Module on any of the group members When a member of the PE group becomes idle the name of the most recently started Module and the adjusted count will be displayed Hardware elements will undergo the following display changes in the course of an animation PE An active PE is displayed with its normal color The name of a Module executing on a PE is displayed in place of the PE name TD A TD carrying a message or file data is displayed in the color of the PE sending the message or reading writing the file The connection from the PE to the TD is also displayed in the color of the PE The name of the message or file being transferred is displayed in the Msg File location 1f one is defined for the TD 251 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual SD When a PE is reading from writing
212. e Write Instruction options you may choose from are replacing an entire user named file 1f one by the same name existed before the write or increasing the file size by the number of bits written or leaving the file size unchanged For simulations where the file structure has yet to be determined or is not significant to the simulation files can be read from or written to a Storage Device s General Storage General Storage keeps track of the number of bits stored but not individual file names Commonly for simplicity some files are written to a Storage Device s General Storage while more significant ones are explicitly named and stored A Storage Device may be defined to serve more than one PE simultaneously The user specifies that a Storage Device has n ports where n is the number of simultaneous accesses that can be handled by the Storage Device Additional information about the operation of the SD building block will be covered in the Storage Device Details section which appears later in this chapter 14 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 2 1 5 Module Overview A Module is the specification of a task to be performed by a Processing Element The Module description consists of four parts 1 Scheduling conditions 2 Host Processing Element options 3 A list of instructions to execute 4 A list of Module s to execute when this Module completes Each of these parts maps into a stage that every Module goes through in it
213. e interrupted or cancelled and listed as having this Semaphore Instruction as its current instruction However if the Module resumes it will start with the next instruction in the Module s Instruction List Every Semaphore Instruction has A name A Semaphore A Set Reset Flag An assignment type A count The Semaphore represents the name of the Semaphore this instruction is to modify The Set Reset Flag determines the effect the Semaphore Instruction will have on the status of the Semaphore If the Set Reset Flag SET then the status of the Semaphore will be SET upon completion of the Semaphore Instruction If the Set Reset Flag RESET then the status of the Semaphore will be RESET upon completion of the Semaphore Instruction If the Set Reset Flag TOGGLE then the status of the Semaphore will be reversed from SET to RESET or from RESET to SET when the instruction is finished If the Set Reset Flag does not equal SET RESET or TOGGLE then the Semaphore Instruction will have no effect on the status of the Semaphore The assignment type will determine if a Semaphore Instruction will modify the count of a Semaphore upon execution Three different assignment types may be specified 29 113 Increment By Decrement By and Equal To The assignment type is used in 29 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual conjunction with the count of a Semaphore Instruction to modify a Semaphore s count The effects of the assignmen
214. e simulation You can optionally monitor the simulation as it progresses through the use of trace and snapshot reports Running NETWORK II 5 produces periodic and end of simulation reports An event trace data file may also be requested The event trace data file contains hardware and Semaphore status information that can be post processed by NETWORK II 5 and by custom report routines written by you NETWORK II 5 OFFICE LINK CENTRAL OFFICE OFFICE 1 STATE LINK BEQUESTING USER OFFICE 2 REQUEST STATE OFFICE OFFICE 3 Animating a Simulation Animated displays of NETWORK II 5 simulations provide a view of the modeled computer system in operation Itis easy to define the location color and icon of every device in a NETWORK II 5 simulation Interfaces to network management software packages such as HP OpenView Netview for AIX Digital PolyCenter and Cabletron SPECTRUM allow users to import topology information automatically if desired The Chapter 1 Introduction animation may be advanced in single steps or continuously Animation and event trace messages describing simulation activity can be displayed concurrently NETWORK 11 5 OFFICE 1 pe INTERVAL 1 8 MIL BH am wo a Utilization 28 A 5 6 16 6 15 8 26 6 25 8 3 0 35 B 46 4 45 8 58 8 Plot from B to 58 4 MILLISECONDS TT Last Crevious Next Data Print_ Done Plotting a Simulation NETWORK II 5 can produce a graph
215. e a current precondition highlight it in the list box and then select the Edit button For Start Time Stop Time and Iteration Period you will be asked merely to enter a new value or SDF name The other preconditions will have their attributes displayed in a separate form in which you may make changes The Hardware Status Requirement Form is simply a group of four radio buttons to determine the required status of the selected hardware data structure busy idle collision and overflow The remaining Module precondition forms are described below 3 5 11 1 File Status Requirement Form 161 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual i Module Name CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER Comment Cancel File Status Requirement FileName COMM DATA TA L L a Wait For Present On Storage Device MEM 1 CJ C Wait For Not Present C Chain If Present C Chain If Not Present File Count jo a Ignore Count C Greater Than f C Equal To A C Less Than g C Not Equal To L 2 Statistical Successors The File Status Requirement Form Make Original File The Make Original File flag can be set to YES NO by marking and unmarking the check box It can be used to reset the original file of a Module File Status Requirement Type A group of radio buttons is used to determine the if the File Status Requirement will be a Wait For or Chain If type and if the File is to be present or not present on a specified Storage Device The choices are Wait
216. e in a Storage Device If a Write Instruction attempts to add bits to a file when the Storage Device is full this runtime warning is generated When the error occurs the Write Instruction will continue as if the storage capacity is available The number of bits used in the Storage Device will exceed the stated capacity until another instruction removes the overflow As a result the number of bits available listed in the Snapshot Report may be greater than the capacity of the Storage Device 26 Number of Bits Read exceeds File Size WARNING At 001500000 SEC instruction INS 1 on pe PE 1 tried to read 250 bits from file F1 on storage device MEMORY 1 but the file contains only 0 bits All files in a model have a size Trying to read more bits from a file than it contains will produce this error message However the instruction will proceed as if the file had all the bits requested The file size will remain unchanged Route Runtime Warnings 27 No NEXT Destination in Route WARNING At 240550000 SEC Module PASS MESSAGE ON called instruction CONTINUE MESSAGE ON ROUTE to send messag USER REQUEST using a destination of NEXT on pe GATEWAY There is no NEXT destination in the route Instruction cancelled A Message Instruction attempted to send a message to the NEXT PE in a route However no NEXT destination existed in the route This error may indicate either an incomplete Route or a
217. e in the Network has a corresponding NETWORK II 5 PE in your model Otherwise TRAFLINK will not be able to generate an external traffic file A single PE in the model may be linked with multiple nodes in the LAN traffic file 10 2 2 3 Initializing TRAFLINK From the menu select Import External Traffic option TRAFLINK will scan your network model to search for device names TRAFLINK will then display the Setup Form TRAFLINK III Setup Dialog Create Ext File Traffic File Layout File Name Match File Caneal LJ3 PRN LJ3 PRO lt default gt NMETRIX PRN HPMETRIX PRO lt default gt SNIFFER PRAN SNIFFER PRO lt default gt _Edit a Layout be Remove _Match Names _Setlayout_ _Set Name Match Default Name Match Figure 10 8 TRAFLINK Setup Form The TRAFLINK Setup Form has three main functions the entry of file names defining the format of the captured traffic file and the process of name matching Three file names may be entered on each line of the Setup Form 1 the name of the LAN Traffic File prn to be linked with your model 11 the name of the LAN Traffic Profile pro 339 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 111 the name of an existing Name Match linking process File 1nk You must enter the name of a LAN Traffic File in order to proceed with TRAFLINK To enter the name of a LAN Traffic File click on the Add option button The LAN Traff
218. e or read write data that were satisfied by this Transfer Device Number of Interrupted Transfer Requests The number of times a Module with a pending request for this Transfer Device was interrupted before the request was granted Average Maximum Standard Deviation Transfer Request Delay The time a PE spent waiting for a request to be fulfilled by this Transfer Device The statistics include only requests that have been granted Whenever a Processing Element attempts to send a message or to read write data it must first acquire a Transfer Device If the requested Transfer Device is available it is immediately assigned and a value of zero is added to these statistics If the Transfer Device is unavailable the PE request will be queued until a Transfer Device becomes available When the requesting PE is assigned a Transfer Device the delay it encountered is added to these statistics Number of Interrupted Transfers The number of times a Module was interrupted while using this Transfer Device 230 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File Average Maximum Standard Deviation Interrupt Time Statistics on the amount of TD time consumed by interrupted message or data transfers If a Module that has acquired a Transfer Device is interrupted while sending a message or data these statistics reflect the time from when the Module PE acquired the Transfer Device to when the interruption occurred Number of Completed Transfers The number of times a mess
219. e time Transfer Devices are characterized by their data transfer rate data transfer protocol and connections Storage Devices are characterized by capacity access time and access method By using generalized building blocks the user is not restricted to predefined hardware types For example a Transfer Device building block is used to model anything that transfers data from one device to another This could represent a bus a satellite communications link a LAN a WAN etc There is no arbitrary limit to the number of hardware device building blocks that may be used in a NETWORK II 5 simulation There is also no arbitrary limit to the number of Processing Elements and Storage Devices that can be connected to a single Transfer Device The software of the simulated system is presented to NETWORK II 5 in the form of software Modules Each Module contains a list of the Processing Elements on which it may execute a description of when it may run what it is to do when running and which other Modules if any to start upon completion A Module may be assigned to a specific Processing Element it may be allowed to run on any Processing Element on a list required to run on every Processing Element in a list or it may be allowed to run on any Processing Element in the system You can specify a limit to the number of copies of the same Module that may execute concurrently NETWORK II 5 provides you with the ability to specify many different kinds of
220. eady incorporated into the package They are however invisible to you and are automatically invoked The main way that you can reduce the CPU time needed to execute a NETWORK II 5 simulation is to limit the amount of work to be done Reducing the amount of work performed does not necessarily diminish the quality of the simulation Run Length One major efficiency consideration is the simulation run length Running a simulation twice as long as necessary will cost nearly twice as much and will not improve the results 212 Chapter 4 Running a Simulation Number of Instructions Another major efficiency consideration is the number of instructions executed The amount of work required to set up an instruction and execute it is approximately fixed within an instruction type Having a message instruction send 600 bits takes NETWORK II 5 approximately the same amount of CPU time as sending 6 bits Thus it pays to combine instructions when there is no significant impact on the simulation results Make one 400 cycle processing instruction instead of 100 4 cycle processing instructions The NETWORK II 5 CPU time to execute this workload will go down by a factor of 100 Extreme care also must be employed in the use of Macro Instructions Used properly they contribute to an easy to read module definition and they save time when specifying a module However they can also be deceptive in that each Macro Instruction is mapped into two or more re
221. ectory selected and contains all Network Description Files found in that directory Depending upon the platform you are using options should be available to select a different directory or drive A form is displayed during the process of loading the model in which NETWORK displays the number of individual model components read in from the Network Description File When the model is completely loaded this form is erased and all model components with drawing information are displayed 95 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 hd Ed Opening file E N25_16 userX TEST1 NET Please wait a El a ah ME ratas 0 E Transfer Devices 7 LANs Ral A Storage Devices 6 Routes Modules 43 Inst Mixes 0 0 3 Echo PE Lists 0 Dest Mixes 0 0 Macro Instructions 0 Files 4 9 Semaphores 12 Messages The Load Progress Form File Save The File Save command stores the current model in a Network Description File NET using the current file name If you wish to save a model using a different name use the File Save As command see below 96 Chapter 3 NETWORK NETWORK II 5 x File Edit Define Display Verify Analysis Help File to Save File Name Directories filel net e n25_16 List Files of Type Files _net The Save Form File Save As The File Save As command allows you to save a model using a new file name or file path The save form used by this command has a f
222. ed by the zero Semaphore 2 or more numbers x y x index number of the semaphore y status of the semaphore 1 if SET 0 if RESET Example listing of a Semaphore being SET 1348 363 412 9 110 420 8 8 420 1 If the semaphore count was assigned 10 is added to the status to indicate that another value an double precision number representing the count follows If the semaphore response time was assigned 100 is added to the status to indicate that a double precision number representing the just completed response time follows If both count and response time are assigned the count appears first Transfer Device 4 or more numbers if active w x y Z 358 Chapter 11 File Conversion index number of the Transfer Device index number of the Processing Element using this Transfer Device index number of the File or Message being sent index number of the destination either a Storage Device or Processing Element If z is 1 then a list of the index numbers of all destination Processing Elements is shown The beginning and end of the list is denoted by the number 1 The number 0 then immediately follows the list N lt xg 4 or numbers if PE relinquishes TD w x 2 0 w index number of the Transfer Device x index number of the Processing Element relinquishing this Transfer Device When the TD is relinquished by a PE the last two numbers of the four number sequence are 2 and O These numbers are for internal coding on
223. een two PEs The effect of a Message Instruction is to deliver the Message Text of this instruction to the Destination Processor s Received Message List The entries on the Received Message List can best be thought of as tokens which will remain in this list until used by a software Module which has this Message Text as a Message Status Requirement Every PE has its own Received Message List The same Message Text may appear more than once in the same list and may appear simultaneously in more than one PE s list A PE executes one instruction at a time The time it takes to execute a Message Instruction will be the time required to transfer the number of bits that make up this message across the chosen Transfer Device plus any delays encountered Every Message Instruction executes by the following sequence of events 1 Request a Transfer Device 2 Request the Destination Processor only if the Destination Processor does not have an Input Controller 3 Work the amount of time it takes to transfer the number of bits to send across the chosen Transfer Device 4 Relinquish the Destination Processor if one was requested 5 Relinquish the Transfer Device If a Message Instruction is delayed for a Destination Processor it will continue to hold its assigned Transfer Device The Transfer Device will be listed as busy even though the transfer has not yet begun These delays plus the potential for interruption make the exact
224. egins a new execution every 120 milliseconds on PE 1 starting with the CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER module CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER reads in the message buffer from MEM 1 and processes it Ninety percent of the time the message buffer is empty so the module chains to a MESSAGE NOT AVAILABLE module which sends a STRING COMPLETE message to its host processor and then terminates Ten percent of the time data is found in the message buffer As a result the module DISPLAY MESSAGE is activated to display the data DISPLAY MESSAGE calls a processing instruction to perform the display 274 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation Self Test function WF M STRING COMPLETE ee ee ee PE PE H hb Gl Fl SELF TEST AAA KKKKKKKK KKK KK KK The self test function is initiated by the receipt of a STRING COMPLETE message at either PE 1 or PE 2 Both PE 1 and PE 2 each have an independent SELF TEST instruction which models the length of the self test operation on each processor The SELF TEST instruction is called by the SELF TEST module which executes on both PE 1 and PE 2 Because a module references instructions by name only one SELF TEST module that runs on either PE 1 or PE 2 needs to be defined 8 3 BUILDING THE MODEL When building a NETWORK II 5 model it may be easiest to proceed by laying out the hardware structures on the display and then adding their attributes After this is acco
225. empt to execute an instruction on a Processing Element which does not have that instruction in its Instruction Repertoire will cause a runtime warning message to be generated The instruction execution will be abandoned and the next instruction will be attempted The Verify feature of NETWORK will warn you about any Modules that may call an instruction which is not defined on any of its possible host PEs An instruction name in a Module s Instruction List may also refer to an Instruction Mix or a Macro Instruction rather than to an instruction in a PE s Instruction Repertoire Each of these features will be described in its own section No special specification is required to indicate that a name represents one of these features If a host PE has an instruction in its Instruction Repertoire with the same name as an Instruction Mix or Macro Instruction the Instruction Mix or Macro Instruction will be executed in preference to the host PE s instruction A Module may be interrupted in three ways If a Module with a higher priority requests a PE and this Module s Interruptibility Flag is set to YES this Module will be interrupted In addition for a Module with a Required Semaphore Status if the required Semaphore status changes after a Module has its preconditions met the Module will be interrupted Also if you specify a Time Slice for a PE the PE will interrupt the Module if the Time Slice expires and this Module s Interruptibility Flag is
226. en As the protocols are all quite different from each other each protocol will be covered in a separate section Protocols not predefined in NETWORK II 5 may be modelled by the user by using Semaphores and messages to control the Modules that access a Transfer Device Cycle Time is a real number that specifies the clock speed of a Transfer Device It is usually given as the time for one clock tick If a Transfer Device is to send one bit at a time i e serial the Cycle Time is the inverse of the data rate Bits Per Cycle is an integer and specifies the number of bits transmitted in one cycle Cycles Per Word is also an integer The number of bits per word is obtained by multiplying Bits Per Cycle by Cycles Per Word For example a serial bus with a transfer rate of 10 Mb Megabits per second translates to a Cycle Time of 1 microsecond per bit the inverse of 10 000 000 bits per second For parallel transfer devices the Cycle Time is the inverse of the clock speed multiplied by the number of bits sent in parallel As an example take a 16 bit parallel transfer device running at clock speed of 64 000 000 cycles per second The Cycle Time is 1 64 000 000 x 16 25 microseconds per cycle Words Per Block may be either an integer or NR No Response An integer value represents the number of words required to make one full block A value of NR means that transfers are not to be broken up into blocks Word Overhead Time is a real
227. en display the current values for the row Enter a new value for either or both of these boxes and select the Update Table button To remove a table row highlight the value or percent box of the row to be deleted and then select the Remove button The probabilities may be displayed either cumulatively or discretely by selecting the appropriately named radio button A table of cumulative probabilities will show the probability of a particular table value with the probabilities of all previous values added to it The first probability in this table should be O and the last should be 100 A table of discrete probabilities displays a table value s probability independent of all other table values The probabilities in such a table should sum to 100 173 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 3 5 15 Semaphore Form NETWORK II 5 viz re Name PROCESS INTERACTION a EA Bl Al B Maximum Pending Responses 999 e E al Initial Semaphore Count jo Initial Semaphore Status X Measure Response Time C Set X Include In Plot File Reset X Include Count In Plot File X Include Response In Plot File The Semaphore Form Maximum Pending Responses The semaphore s maximum pending responses must be input as an integer value Initial Semaphore Count The semaphore s initial count must be input as an integer value Initial Semaphore Status Either Set or Reset at simulation startup Measure Response Time Response times will be compute
228. ens ELEMENT NAME PE 1 PE 2 pore REQUESTS GRANTED 49 40 REQUESTS INTERRUPTED 0 0 AVG WAIT TIME 0 13 234 AX WAIT TIME 0 529 368 STD DEV TIME 0 82 648 Es STORAGE REQUESTS 29 0 FILE REQUESTS GRANTED 20 40 REQUESTS INTERRUPTED 0 0 AVG WAIT TIME 0 0 AX WAIT TIME 0 0 STD DEV TIME o 0 oe REQUESTS GRANTED 69 60 REQUESTS INTERRUPTED 0 0 AVG WAIT TIME 292 744 34 935 AX WAIT TIME 10342 552 1269 700 STD DEV TIME 1472 667 192 434 E PUT CONTROLLER REQUEST 20 20 ee PE REQUESTS GRANTED 0 0 AVG WAIT TIME 0 0 AX WAIT TIME 0 0 STD DEV TIME 0 0 ener INTERRUPTS 0 0 AVG INTERRUPT TIME 0 0 AX INTERRUPT TIME 0 0 STD DEV TIME 0 0 AX INTERRUPT QUEUE 0 0 AVG INTERRUPT QUEUE 0 0 STD DEV QUEUE 0 0 ae MESSAGE BITS 8 41 les ESSAGE BITS 0 0 STD DEV BITS 0 0 PA MODULE QUEUE 1 1 AVG MODULE QUEUE 0 0 STD DEV QUEUE 0 0 leek CENT UTILIZATION 9 556 33 906 PS Simulation Report File file type LIS 295 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual ANT A A O a aed 296
229. er a Message Instruction or Read Write Instruction begins The icon will appear 255 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual as a filled circle displayed in the highlight color red by default The icon will first travel from the PE to the TD LAN carrying the message file and then travel from the TD LAN to the destination PE or Storage Device Do not check the Move Icon at Start of Transmission if you do not want the icon displayed during the animation Move Icon at End of Transmission If Move Icon at End of Animation is checked an icon will be displayed whenever a Message Instruction or Read Write Instruction finishes The icon will appear as an empty circle displayed in the highlight color red by default The icon will first travel from the PE to the TD LAN carrying the message file and then travel from the TD LAN to the destination PE or Storage Device Icon Speed Scale The Icon Speed Scale is used to control the speed of the icons shown at the start and end of transmissions The rate at which these icons travel may vary on various platforms so this is added as a means for you to regulate the speed of these icons You may set the Icon Speed Scale to any integer value in the range from 1 slowest to 1000 fastest The default is 750 Change Drawing Scale The Scale button can be selected to change scale of your model on the display either prior to or during an animation See Chapter 3 for a complete explanation of the Scale dialog OK Se
230. er must be a real number The unit of the Processing Multiplier 1s microseconds per bit Processing Additive The Processing Additive must be a real number The unit of the Processing Additive is microseconds Message Multiplier The Message Multiplier is a unitless quantity that must be a real number Message Additive 138 Chapter 3 NETWORK The Message Additive must be a real number It is measured in bits 3 5 4 Transfer Device Form The Transfer Device form is used to display and change the attributes of a selected Transfer Device Protocol independent TD attributes are displayed on the TD form and protocol specific attributes are displayed in subforms for the various protocols Transfer Device Name us 1 Protocol FIRST COME FIRST SERVED Protocol Values Time Units MICROSECONDS Block Error Cycle Time 13 000 MIC aay Bits Per Cycle Separate Blocks Cycles Per Word X Include in Plot File Words Per Block Word Overhead 0 000 MIC Block Overhead 0 000 MIC call Min Bits to Send Connection List Name Key dlalmlala tem de lem l 10 The Transfer Device Form Protocol To establish a protocol for the Transfer Device click on the down arrow of the Protocol combo box and select one of the protocol choices from the list Cycle Time The cycle time must be a real number Bits per Cycle The bits per cycle must be an integer value 139 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Cycles
231. erhead Per Msg o Bits Time in Hours Minutes Seconds First Traffic arrives at 0 000 MICROSECONDS MILLISECONDS NANOSECONDS SECONDS Figure 10 13 TRAFLINK Traffic Form 10 3 2 1 TRAFLINK Traffic Form Parameters TRAFLINK Traffic Parameter Start The label Start appears above seven value boxes on the Traffic Form which constitute the Starting Position parameters The Starting Position parameters tell TRAFLINK where to expect the starting column for the Destination Source Message Time Size Class and Holding Time per Message fields in the LAN Traffic File prn TRAFLINK Traffic Parameter Length The label Length appears above four value boxes on the Setup Form which constitute the Text Length parameters The Text Length parameters notify TRAFLINK of the number of characters in the Destination Source Message and Time fields For example if the starting position for the Destination is column 25 and the text length is 12 characters TRAFLINK expects the message destinations to be located in columns 25 to 36 in the LAN Traffic File prn This would be reflected in the Setup Form with the number 25 in the Destination Start value box and the number 12 in the Destination Length value box TRAFLINK Traffic Parameter Ignore Lines Containing These fields alert TRAFLINK that it should skip over lines containing the listed text strings in the LAN Traffic File prn This is useful in bypassing header and footer 346 Chapter 10
232. eriodic reports may be requested at the start of a simulation in NETWORK and TEXTWORK Finally a snapshot report may be included in the set of summary reports produced at the end of a simulation This snapshot report identifies model elements incomplete Modules incomplete instructions undelivered messages that have not finished execution at the end of the simulation These elements will not be included in the model s summary reports Snapshot Reports vary in length based on the model size the amount of activity in the model and the Module and message queue sizes For example if a module s iteration period 100 microseconds the module s concurrent execution flag YES and the 221 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual simulation run length 1 second up to 1000 copies of the module may exist at the end of the simulation The snapshot report in this situation is likely to be very large Modules are listed in a snapshot report only when they are active A module is classified as active if it is executing on a PE if its preconditions have been met or if it is waiting for message semaphore or hardware preconditions Modules that are waiting for time based preconditions are excluded from the snapshot A module waiting for predecessor preconditions will be listed as active only if it has multiple Anded Predecessors and at least one of these predecessors has chained to this module Otherwise a module waiting for predecessor preconditions
233. es before the Module completes the Module is interrupted and put at the back of the queue for its priority class Then the PE selects the next Module to execute according to standard rules Normally it will select another Module of equal priority If there are no other Modules of equal or higher priority to execute the PE will restart the interrupted Module Interrupt Overhead applies to Modules interrupted by a Time Slice Whenever an interrupted Module is restarted a new timer is started to expire in one full Time Slice Every PE may have a Message List Size This attribute defines the number of bits available for storing received messages If Lose Overflow Messages is set to YES this will cause any messages which overflow the PE s Received Message List to be lost If set to NO a warning flag is set but the message is stored regardless Every PE has an I O Setup Time which applies to all Read Write and Message instructions This attribute is used to add an additional amount of processing time before every Transfer Device access This delay might represent various operations including checking Transfer Device status and breaking a message into packets Instructions form the link between hardware and software The correspondence is established through a user defined name Each Module includes an Instruction List containing a sequence of instruction names When the Module is executed on a particular PE it issues the instructions it ha
234. es of a Connection and the Token Holding Time THT Whenever a token is received the time between the current time and when the token was last received is recorded as the current Token Holding Time When asynchronous traffic begins the THT clock is started beginning with this assigned value The time spent on synchronous traffic does not affect the THT clock The priority of an asynchronous transmission will be used to select the TTRT whose priority is equal to or most nearly equals without exceeding the priority of the asynchronous transmission If the lowest priority TTRT has a priority greater than the priority of the asynchronous transmission request the token is passed to the next PE Before each asynchronous transmission The PE compares the Token Holding Time to the time of the selected TTRT If the Token Holding Time is equal to or greater than the TTRT the token is passed to the next PE in the Connection List A Target Token Rotation Time will not interrupt a transmission but is used to determine if a transmission should begin 2 2 2 10 Aloha Protocol The Aloha protocol can be described as a Collision protocol in which the status of the Transfer Device is unknown Transmitting PEs are not aware of when the TD is busy nor do they recognize when a collision occurs When a PE wants to use an Aloha TD it immediately begins transmitting and continues even if a collision occurs An instruction that calls an Aloha TD should not list any other A
235. es of the animation display Step By Time If Step By Time the default is selected the animation will proceed from one recorded time to the next as listed in the simulation If several events occurred during the same time in the simulation each of those events will be updated together on the display Step By Event If Step By Event is selected the animation will proceed from one recorded event to the next as 1t occurred in the simulation If several events occurred during the same time in the simulation each of the events will be updated separately on the display Delay Time Delay Time will only be used if Single Step Operation is not checked Delay Time is used to control the pause between updates of the animation You may select a value from 0 to 999 seconds Start Time Start Time defaults to the current time of the animation When you begin an animation Start Time will be set to zero and is given in the time units recorded for the simulation used to generate the animation Start Time can be used to jump ahead in an animation To do this select the Options command from the Animation Options dialog box to display the Animation Menu form Then select a new time value for Start Time and click on the OK button to resume the animation You will see a message that the animation is being advanced to the new Start Time Move Icon at Start of Transmission If Move Icon at Start of Animation is checked an icon will be displayed whenev
236. ess than the current animation time You may reset this value as often as you like to fast forward during an animation You may change the diagram scale during an animation by clicking on the Animation Menu Form s Change Diagram Scale button The Scale menu works the same way regardless of where it is selected For further information please see Chapter 3 6 2 3 Start The Animation When you are satisfied with the values displayed on the Animation Menu form select the OK button to start the animation Before running the animation NETWORK first checks to determine if the information in the simulation Plot File agrees with the currently 250 Chapter 6 Model Animation loaded network description If there are no errors the animation proceeds There might be errors if you modified the simulated system without rerunning the simulation NETWORK will then remove the Animation Menu form and then display all of the hardware elements in the idle color gray in the default color set at the start of the animation 6 2 4 Observing The Animation As the model s hardware elements become active they are displayed using a color PEs use the color either assigned to them by default or assigned by a user in the PE s Graphics Menu Every new PE is assigned a randomly selected default color Other devices will turn the color of the PE that is using them When a Module runs on a PE the name of the Module will be displayed in place of the PE nam
237. etic Variate takes advantage of the principle that all distributions can be derived by one or more selections from the uniform distribution on the interval 0 to 1 All of the distributions in NETWORK II 5 which are really statistical i e not Pattern Linear etc are derived in this way If the Antithetic Variate is YES 1t subtracts the value returned by the uniform distribution from 1 and uses that value to compute a pick from a distribution This may convert lucky to unlucky or vice versa however note that 1 5 5 so middle of the road choices remain unchanged Both the Randomizer and the Antithetic Variate are useful in studying the effect of the randomness on a particular simulation run If changing one or both of these attributes produces a dramatic change in the final results a longer simulation time is probably desirable Long simulations will smooth out the perturbations caused by luck when drawing from a Statistical Distribution An additional global control Minimize Random Seed Array is offered Minimize Random Seed Array is YES or NO If NO automatically assigned seeds are assigned starting at one greater than the largest seed value specified by the user In addition the last seed value is used for random start time generation for Modules with an iteration period but no start time If YES seed 1 is reserved for the distribution used by Modules with an iteration period but no start time The remaining a
238. etwork Description File continued Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation O AAN BUS CONNECTIONS PE 2 SEGMENTS 18 804 12 000 18 804 17 180 0 EM 1 eee SEGMENTS 44 098 12 000 44 098 5 164 0 ME BUS 3 oe TYPE BUS NAME MSG LOCATION 1 000 13 500 62 000 13 500 STYLE WIDTH 2 60 2 60 SEGMENTS 2 10 000 14 000 58 000 14 000 PROTOCOL FIRST COME FIRST SERVED CYCLE TIME 2 MIC BITS PER CYCLE 8 CYCLES PER WORD 1 WORDS PER BLOCK 256 SEPARATE BLOCKS O WORD OVERHEAD TIME 0 MIC BLOCK OVERHEAD TI 25 MIC BLOCK RETRY TIME 0 MIC SCALE ERROR PROBABILITY NO BUS CONNECTIONS MEM 1 SEGMENTS 41 658 14 000 41 658 4 984 0 RADAR DISH SEGMENTS 45 763 14 000 45 763 17 000 0 PE 1 SEGMENTS 14 033 14 000 14 033 5 164 0 x STORAGE DEVICES a TYPE STORAGE pa AME RADAR DISH LOCATION 45 541 18 710 STYLE COLOR 1 8 1 00 0 1 5 00 2 50 1 00 ICON earthsta icn READ WORD ACCESS TIME 4 MIC WRITE WORD ACCESS TIME 4 MIC RE
239. ex of all Processing Elements Transfer Devices Storage Devices Modules Files Semaphores Messages and Special Flags in the simulation Each entry includes the index number entity type and entity name f a listing of simulation events including the event time and the entities involved PLOT DATA FILE EXAMPLE 4 PES 1 TD 1 SD RUN UNDER RELEASE 11 09 OF NETWORK II 5 DATA GENERATED FROM 0 TO 4000 000000 MICROSECONDS ON 03 09 1996 AT 09 56 28 20 1FLAG LISTENING 2FLAG TRACE MESSAGE 3FLAG END OF SIMULATION 4PE COMPUTER Al SPE COMPUTER A2 6PE COMPUTER B1 TPE COMPUTER B2 8STORAGE DEVICEMAIN STORAGE 9SEMAP HORE SEMAPHORE 10BUS BUS 1 Fes ODULE INTERRUPT OVERHEAD 12MODULE DATA RETRIEVAL lis ODULE DATA TRANSMIT 14MESSAGE COLLISION Fe ESSAGE JAMMED 16MESSAGE UNSETTLED ie ESSAGE TOKEN PASSING 18MESSAGE DATA PACKET foe GENERAL STORAGE di DATA FILE 0 1348 363 412 9 110 420 8 8 420 1 1398 363 8 420 010 4 2 010 010 418 5 1448 363 10 4 2 010 0 51310 518 1 6 7 1 0 4 0 1498 363 10 5 2 010 0 9 0 5 0 2848 363 412 9 110 420 8 8 420 1 2898 363 8 420 010 4 2 010 010 418 5 2948 363 10 4 2 010 0 51310 518 1 6 7 1 0 4 0 2998 363 10 2 010 0 9 0 5 0 5 4000 000 3 0 In the portion of the simulation Plot File that lists simulation events each line lists the simulation time followed by a series of numbers that describe the simulation events At least one event will be
240. execution time of a Message Instruction impossible to predict in advance although a lower bound based on the data transfer time does exist During a message transfer a PE is listed as busy executing this Message Instruction even though it is not officially executing any cycles To model a PE that executes other instructions while sending a message a new PE may be added to the system to handle the output operations A message may be sent by a Processing Element to itself This operation does not require the use of a Transfer Device therefore it takes zero time for a PE to send a message to itself This feature is useful in cases where Module coordination is handled by messages and Module to PE assignments are either dynamic or determined after the Modules are defined 24 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 Every Message Instruction has A name A Message Text A Message Count A Destination A Queue Flag A Resume Flag A Continue Message Flag An Inhibit Message to Self Flag An Inhibit Message Delivery Flag An Allowed Transfer Device List The Message Text is the name that this instruction will put in the Received Message List of the Destination s It defaults to the name of the instruction that sends this message if no Message Text has been entered for the instruction A Message Text can be a text string or a wild card If the Message Text is not a wild card this text string will be sent to the Destination s
241. f these attributes these topics are covered in Chapter 2 The major data and graphics editing functions found in NETWORK will be discussed in this chapter The other major capabilities provided by NETWORK II 5 are described in the following chapters running a simulation Chapter 4 animation of a model Chapter 6 plotting simulation results Chapter 7 using external traffic files in a simulation Chapter 10 and file conversion Chapter 11 NETWORK is started by double clicking on the NETWORK program icon or by typing NETWORK at the command prompt depending on the computer and windowing system in use Please refer to the appropriate appendix for further information 3 1 2 The NETWORK Display When NETWORK is started an introductory form is displayed followed by the presentation of the main display The display is the window in which a graphic layout of a model is developed and the various forms of NETWORK are displayed At the top of the display is a menubar Selecting an option on the menubar will present a menu from which related commands may be selected A complete description of all the menubar menus and commands is found in section 3 4 On the left side of the NETWORK display is a vertical toolbar from which other commands may be invoked by selecting a toolbar button The NETWORK toolbar is described in section 3 2 1 Scrollbars are positioned at the bottom and right edges of the NETWORK display to enable you to move the display to a
242. ginning to execute on pe COMPUTER A gt 233 142163 SEC td BUS 1 has been allocated to pe COMPUTER A Continue Resume Halt trace Snapshot Other report Abort C R H S O A gt Ss 207 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Continue C The simulation will proceed and a new page of simulation events are displayed when the Continue command is selected Resume R The Resume command puts the simulation trace into sleep mode TEXTWORK will ask you for the wake up time when the trace shall be resumed The simulation proceeds without producing any trace messages until the simulation clock reaches the wake up time The trace is then resumed at this time Enter time to resume trace IN SECONDS gt 50 Do you want the trace to stop at the end of every page Y N ABORT gt n Enter the time to stop trace IN SECONDS gt 60 Halt H The Halt command discontinues the simulation trace to both the display and the simulation Report File Once the Halt command has been executed it will not be possible to start a trace again during the current simulation Snapshot Report S Selecting the Snapshot command will generate a Snapshot Report An example of a snapshot report is given below SNAPSHOT REPORT AT 23 142163 SECONDS pe COMPUTER A is BUSY executing instruction ASK FOR DATA FIL resident module is REQUEST DATA FILE 1 pe COMPUTER B is idle
243. he message to itself This takes zero time and does not require a Transfer Device Finally if the Destination is a Destination Mix the ultimate destination for the message is selected randomly according to the percentages specified in the mix If the Allowed Transfer Device List is set to ANY the default 1t will be presumed that any Transfer Device that connects the source and destination will be an acceptable path 28 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 2 2 1 7 Semaphore Instructions Semaphore Instructions are used to set or reset global flags called Semaphores and or to modify the count of a Semaphore These Semaphores are named by the user and may have a status of either SET or RESET and a count represented as an integer The status SET RESET and or the count of a Semaphore can be examined or changed by any Processing Element or Module Semaphores are commonly used to indicate device availability to synchronize parallel activities to record the duration of certain events or to indicate the current phase of the simulation Executing a Semaphore Instruction takes zero simulated time Therefore Semaphore Instructions will never be interrupted in the midst of execution by another Module because they never can be caught executing However a Module might execute a Semaphore Instruction that changes a Semaphore to a state where the Module s own run conditions are no longer met In this case of Module suicide the Module will b
244. he plotting time span as defined by the Plot Start and Plot End times Plot file covers 0 to 5 MIL Plot Type a Status C Utilization Select Plot Interval C Utilization Select Plot Increment C Count C Response Time Plot Time Units MILLISECONDS 2 Plot Start jjo 000 MIL Plot End 5 000 MIL Threshold 100 000 Percent The Plot Menu form 259 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Four types of plots are available Status Utilization Count and Response Time In addition the Utilization plot is available in two varieties Each type of plot will be described in its own section Selecting the items to plot is the same for all plot types The start and end times define the time span over which plots will be created By default the plot start is set to 0 and the plot end is set to the run length of the most recent simulation run The time units may be changed by clicking on the Plot Menu s Plot Time Units The time units which may be selected are seconds milliseconds microseconds and nanoseconds 7 1 1 Defining a Plot List The plot list is used to select which items to plot The Plot List form may be accessed by clicking on the Plot List button on the Plot Menu form Three methods of specifying the plot list are available You may plot all items plot a list of items that you select or plot by item class The default value is Plot All 0D APES TAG USER 2 55M OFFICE 2 TC lade i ETEN Co j Hre
245. he simulation Report File 4 2 8 The Simulation Completed Message At the end of the simulation the simulation completed message form is displayed This message includes the actual time to run the simulation and the number of runtime warnings encountered Click on the View button to observe the runtime utilization graphs 1f they have been created Final summary reports can also be viewed at this time by selecting the Report button U entes a E a repni Tin umman beet Lere eH iaebeL a The End of Simulation Message 4 3 i TEXTWORK TEXTWORK is the text based user interface simulation program The program is started by typing TEXTWORK at the command prompt textwork on UNIX platforms TEXTWORK is available on all platforms with the exception of Windows 3 1 After starting TEXTWORK you will be asked to enter the model name and the simulation run parameters When all of the prompts from TEXTWORK have been answered the simulation begins During the run you may monitor the simulation progress by interactively generating summary reports snapshot reports and trace reports 198 Chapter 4 Running a Simulation The main advantage of TEXTWORK over SIMWORK is that you do not need graphics to run a simulation Running TEXTWORK over the internet via a telnet session is one example where you will not have graphics capabilities Also it is easier to run TEXTWORK as a batch or background job because it does not try to open a graphics
246. he simulation that trace messages will be generated The Trace Start Time must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to the simulation Run Length 206 Chapter 4 Running a Simulation The Trace Stop Time must be greater than the Trace Start Time and less than or equal to the simulation Run Length Enter time to start trace IN SECONDS or All to trace entire simulation Do you want the trace to stop at the end of every page Y N ABORT Simulation begins 4 3 4 Runtime Reports Trace Report The trace report provides a brief description of simulation events An example of a trace report is given below After a page of trace messages is printed on your display TEXTWORK offers you the option to continue the trace C resume the trace at a later time R halt the trace H print a Snapshot Report S print a summary report O or stop the simulation A The number of lines displayed may be adjusted by editing the terminal height field in the N25DEV CFG File At 233 142163 S module REQUEST DATA FILI can now proceed to xecute as pe COMPUTER A is now available gt 233 142163 SI pe COMPUTER A will attempt to execute instruction ASK FOR DATA FILE from module REQUEST DATA FILE 8 gt 233 142163 SEC message instruction ASK FOR DATA FILE from module REQUEST DATA FILE 8 sending message ASK FOR DATA FILE 8 to pe COMPUTER B is be
247. he simulation with periodic reports you may determine if the simulation statistics approach either a constant value or follow a pattern When the difference between the reports is insignificant or when there appears to be a pattern to the results it probably is time to stop the simulation Another technique is to explore a worst case scenario Sometimes the main concern driving the simulation is how well the simulated system will perform under stress The scenario for a failure or some other worst case condition may be fairly well defined with a definite beginning and end This would make choosing a simulation length considerably easier The choice of simulation run length should influence the simulation design If a module executes at a very low rate e g once a year you should either restrict the time period for that event so that 1t occurs within the projected simulation run length or ignore the module if it has an insignificant impact on the simulation This will eliminate the need to run a simulation for an excessive length of time just to see what happens when this module executes 4 5 EFFICIENCY CONSIDERATIONS NETWORK II 5 is a very efficient program However some users have limited computer resources while others have enormous problems to solve This section should help these users minimize execution costs and decrease run times Because NETWORK II 5 is a commercial product a number of runtime optimization features are alr
248. ht control system The system consists of two processors three busses one memory device and a radar dish sensor The two processors are called PE 1 and PE 2 the three busses are called BUS 1 BUS 2 and BUS 3 the memory is called MEM 1 and the radar dish is called RADAR DISH PE 1 is a general purpose processor which executes navigation communication and self test functions PE 2 is a special purpose radar processor Self test functions are called every time a major function is completed by a processor BUS 1 is a low speed bus BUS 2 is a high speed bus BUS 3 is a high speed bus MEM 1 models a hard disk Each sector on the disk is modeled as a block The random seek time for the disk sectors is input as a statistical block overhead time MEM 1 will contain 2 files RADAR DATA and COMM DATA in addition to GENERAL STORAGE The RADAR DISH sensor is modeled as a memory device because its function is to provide data to a PE upon command The preprocessing and buffering of data within the sensor is not under study and will not be modeled 269 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETYYORK II 5 y File Edit Define Display Verify Analysis Help PE 1 MEM 1 Bus 1 MSG FILE BUS 2 MSG FILE BUS 3 MSG FILE RADAR DISH olp lm B a The System Simulated Four basic software functions are modeled in this example These functions include navigation radar data processing communications and self test
249. ibutes double click on the PE icon you have just positioned Or click once on the PE to highlight its image and then select the Edit Detail from the menubar Once you have done this the PE Form will be displayed in which you make changes to the PE HE TWGHK 11 5 Proce iiig Element lolo lala mis lim l Defining Processing Element Attributes The Processing Element named PE 1 in the example file will have 17 instructions in its instruction list This list represents the available instructions that a Module executing on 276 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation this particular PE may perform To add an instruction to a PE click on the Add button beside the Instruction List on the PE Form Select a name for the instruction and then select the instruction type in the next form that appears After this is done the new instruction will be displayed in the Instruction List of the PE Form You may then add attributes to the new instruction by clicking directly on the instruction name and then clicking on the Edit button You may change any of the attributes found in the PE Form Because PE 1 will execute several Processing Instructions a value is required for the Basic Cycle To set the Basic Cycle Time of PE 1 click directly in the value box labeled Cycle Time and then enter 1 PE 1 now has a Basic Cycle Time of 1 0 microsecond This will be multiplied by the number of cycles defined for each Processing Instruction executing o
250. ic File can be selected from the from a list of prn files found in the default directory Selecting a file from this list and choosing the OK button would take you back to the initial Setup dialog form The LAN Traffic File selected would be added to the textbox and by default it adds Sniffer Profile pro as the Traffic format file and lt default gt Name Matching file The lt default gt name matching assumes that the names in the traffic file maps directly to the names in the model The other function of the Setup Form is to describe to TRAFLINK the format of the captured traffic file Starting Positions Text Lengths Ignore Lines Containing Overhead per Message and Time Units The format to be used by TRAFLINK can be defined by directly setting the format field Start and Length values and the Ignore Lines Containing text boxes or by reading in a file pro that contains these values Refer to section 10 3 for the format of profile file and various Traffic Form parameters A listing of the format definition fields can be edited from default Sniffer Traffic Format File pro by selecting the Edit Layout button at the top of the Setup Form refer to section 10 3 The modified profile may be saved using Save As button You can load the values saved in a Traffic Format File into the Traffic Form by selecting the Open button and then selecting a file from the TRAFLINK Load Form If you want to use a previously saved profile you can sele
251. ical time line status report This is a post processed report that shows for each Module message and hardware device selected the times at which the device was busy In addition the status and or count of each of the Semaphores in the simulation is plotted as a function of time It can show whenever any of these items exceeded a user defined threshold of activity NETWORK II 5 can also produce detailed graphical utilization reports that will display the utilization of devices in a simulation as a function of time The scale of these diagrams is adjustable The diagram may cover the entire simulation on a single screen or you can examine a smaller period of particular interest in greater detail to study conflicts or dependencies without rerunning the simulation 1 3 NETWORK II 5 DATA STRUCTURES NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK IL5 data structures fall into two primary groups hardware and software There are other data structures Global Flags and Variables Statistical Distribution Functions etc that are used by these two groups Hardware devices are specified in NETWORK II 5 as one of three basic types Processing Elements Transfer Devices or Storage Devices Gateways are a special case of a Processing Element and LANs are a special case of a Transfer Device Complicated real world devices may be simulated by a combination of these NETWORK II 5 building blocks Processing Elements are characterized by their Instruction set and cycl
252. ice time A Read Write Instruction may be delayed by contention for a Transfer Device contention for a Storage Device or contention for a file It is these delays plus the potential for interruption that make the exact execution time of a Read Write Instruction impossible to predict in advance although a lower bound based on the transfer time storage time does exist 20 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 During file transfer the PE will be listed as busy executing the Read or Write Instruction even though it is not officially executing any cycles To simulate a PE which concur rently executes other instructions during a file transfer a separate PE building block must be added to the system to handle the I O operations for this PE Because NETWORK II 5 uses one building block per function it is quite reasonable to model one real device as a number of these building blocks when the real device performs more than one function simultaneously The TD and SD used by a Read Write instruction will be listed as utilized for as long as the PE executing this instruction holds them So if a PE acquires a TD and then holds it while queueing for a SD the TD will be listed as utilized during that time Also if a TD 1s much faster than a SD the TD will still be listed as utilized for the entire time of the file transfer The TD is counted as utilized because it is held by the PE for the duration of the entire transfer The TD s ab
253. icn The next time NETWORK is run this icon should be available in the icon list Now click on Save to Library Then click on Return From Save You now have a new icon 365 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Now click on an icon piece that you do not want to be in your final icon That piece should now turn a highlight color and be surrounded by a box Now select Edit Cut to remove the piece Repeat until you have removed all unneeded pieces Now create and position a new piece on the icon Select Group Add to to make this a part of the icon Repeat until you have the desired result Select that part of the icon that you would like to be color changeable Select Edit and Detail from the menu bar The Icon Detail form will appear with a checkbox labeled Color definable with DCOLOR A Make sure the box is checked Now that part of the icon can then have its color changed in NETWORK IL5 Now save your icon Perform this step very carefully because it is quite common to accidentally not save an icon by skipping one step First click on the icon in the Tags window that represents the icon that you want to save That icon should now be highlighted Then select File Save Make sure the name of your icon appears in the Name box If it does not it is because you did not select the icon in the Tags window You may change the icon name in the Name box if you wish Now click on Save to Library and then on Return From Save Exit Simdr
254. ics of using the icon editor is covered in a separate manual This section addresses the unique aspects of creating an icon for NETWORK II 5 C 2 Creating custom icons for NETWORK II 5 Start Simdraw If this is the first time that you want to create an icon you should copy the file NEWICON SG2 to the file name USERICON SG2 User defined icons are kept separate from system defined ones so that user defined icons are not lost when a new release is installed and the system icon file NGUSER SG2 is updated However you may want to cut and paste from NGUSER SG2 into USERICON SG2 to create an icon just like a system icon but with special characteristics Click on File Load Browse Then use browse to find the file USERICON SG2 Click on OK then on Load Library Select an icon from the list that most closely matches your intended icon Note that icons whose names begin with bk are used for backgrounds all others are available for devices It is far better to modify an existing icon than to create a new one This is true even if the only part you keep is the square background The file NEWICON SG2 which you copied over to USERICON SG2 contained a few simple icons to help you get started Click on Load Object then Close Now save this under a new name by clicking on File Save Then type in a new name in all lower case Use a name that does not begin with bk this name prefix denotes a background icon Also all names must end with
255. ign tool which takes a computer system description you specify and provides measures of hardware utilization software execution message delivery times response times and contention It is intended for the person who designs or specifies computer systems and computer networks NETWORK II 5 is used both to evaluate the ability of a proposed system configuration to meet the required workload and to evaluate competing designs NETWORK II 5 is designed to model a wide variety of computer architectures from a single processor to a complex system of processors and storage devices connected in a network It is extremely flexible allowing the portions of a computer system of special interest to be modeled at a detailed level while the rest of the system is modeled at a coarser level Most importantly NETWORK II 5 is a tool and not a computer language It has an interactive graphical interface and can be used after a short period of training NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 vi gt File Edit Define Display Verify Analysis Help OFFICE LINK CENTRAL OFFICE STATE LINK MSG FILE MSG FILE STATE OFFICE OFFICE 3 Building a Model One of the main considerations in the design of a computer system is the effect of contention between devices on total system operation This effect is not readily determined by the use of analytical models Because NETWORK II 5 actually models the interactions between all devices in the sys
256. ile name box where you can directly enter a file name The current file name will appear in this box when the form is first displayed Depending upon the platform in use you may be able to select which directory or drive your Network Description File NET is saved to File Import The File Import command is used to make calls to the TRAFLINK III program A side menu is displayed which has two types of options The first option External Traffic allows you to import an external traffic file which can be used to help drive a simulation The second group of options will import a topology produced by a network management system to provide the initial hardware layout of a model Please refer to Chapter 10 for a complete description of TRAFLINK III and how to use it File Print 97 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual The File Print command is used to access system print functions This command will display a form which will permit you to print the NETWORK display directly or to save the screen shot to a postscript file File Quit The File Quit command terminates a NETWORK session If you have modified a model and have not saved the changes NETWORK requests confirmation before ending the session If you elect to save the changes the Save Form is displayed After the save operation has completed the session is terminated 3 4 2 The Edit Menu Edit Detail After selecting highlighting an object or a group of objects PEs TDs LANs SDs an
257. ility to transfer bits faster than they are presented does not override the fact that the TD was held by the PE for the full length of the file transfer Sometimes it is not necessary to deal with specific files when describing input output operations In this case the default file of General Storage may be specified for both read and write operations General Storage is the name given to that part of memory with no specific file structure General Storage is unique in that more than one user may simultaneously use this file General Storage must be created like any other file and will be removed from a Storage Device should its size ever fall to zero bits The size of General Storage is monitored and reported separately Every Read Write Instruction has A name A Storage Device To Access A File Accessed A File Count A Number Of Bits To Read Write File Modification Options A Resume Flag An Allowed Transfer Device List The number of bits an instruction is to read or write may be an integer or a reference to a statistical distribution The value given will be used to compute the length of time needed to access the file For a Read Instruction a NR No Response to this attribute tells NETWORK IL5 to read all the bits the File Accessed contains If an instruction tries to read more bits than a file contains or write more bits than the Storage Device To 21 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Access has available
258. ill be prompted for the type of elements to be reported You may select either a PE SD Semaphore or TD status report If you wish to view all of the reports select ALL from the Status Menu After the reports you selected have been displayed the animation proceeds 257 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual The PE Status Report lists the name status idle busy and current active Module for each Processing Element The SD Status Report lists the name status idle busy and current file in use for each of the Storage Devices The TD Status report lists the name status busy idle and messages files being carried for each TD The Semaphore Status Report lists the name status set reset and count of each Semaphore 258 Chapter 7 Plotting Simulation Results CHAPTER 7 PLOTTING SIMULATION RESULTS 7 0 INTRODUCTION NETWORK II 5 plotting capability allows you to generate graphical displays of utilization status count and response times for the Processing Elements Transfer Devices Storage Devices Semaphores Modules and messages in your model It creates these plots by processing the simulation events listed in the simulation Plot File file type PIN The simulation Plot File is produced by the NETWORK during a simulation 7 1 DEVELOPING A PLOT To start plotting select Analysis Plot from the top menubar The Plot Menu form will then be displayed Prior to selecting Plot you must select a plot type a list of plot items and t
259. imulation are not provided TEXTWORK the text based simulation provided on certain platforms will use the run parameters saved within a model when Batch Run Simulation YES If Batch Run Simulation NO the default TEXTWORK will ask for run parameters before starting a simulation SIMWORK the graphics based NETWORK IL 5 simulation engine is never run as a batch job Complete descriptions of SIMWORK TEXTWORK and all run parameters are given in Chapter 4 75 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 2 4 SIMULATION PARAMETERS The preceding simulation building blocks have been described qualitatively in order to give an overview of all of the elements of a NETWORK II 5 simulation The interactive input processor NETWORK provides a graphic screen based input environment for describing the system to simulate The method of entering building block descriptions is covered in Chapter 3 After this step is complete the only additional inputs are the simulation control parameters relating to the run length simulated time and reporting options A description of how to run a NETWORK II 5 simulation and a complete discussion of these options are given in Chapter 4 Some consideration should be given to the selection of run length versus the smallest time increments For example if the Basic Cycle Time is one microsecond there may be excessive activity in a one second simulation period and a correspondingly excessive expense in computer use However it ma
260. in zero simulated time This feature is very valuable when you would like to schedule a fixed number of tasks perhaps a number randomly chosen which have a choice of host processors As an example to model a parallel processor that spawns n copies of a task that run on the first available of y PEs just send n messages to the Global Message List and define one Module that waits for that message and runs on any of the y PEs If the Destination is the reserved word ECHO this instruction will send its Message Text to the Processing Element that sent the original message as previously defined via the same Transfer Device s on which it was received If a message that arrives via the Global Message List is to be ECHO ed a Transfer Device will be dynamically selected from those TDs that link the source PE to the Destination If no such TD exists a runtime warning message will be issued and the message will not be delivered If the Destination is the reserved word NEXT this instruction will send its Message Text to the Processing Element that appears next in the Route of the original message If the original message is not traveling along a route a runtime warning message is produced If the Destination is a this instruction will send the Message Text to every PE on the selected Transfer Device whose name matches the given wild card name The Destination may also be the host PE executing this instruction In this case the PE is just sending t
261. ined as having Ored Predecessors any Module chaining to it is sufficient to meet the predecessor precondition If a Module is defined as having Anded Predecessors then every Module which lists this Module as a successor must chain to this Module before its predecessor precondition is met Every new copy of this Module will have its own predecessor conditions which must be met Therefore if a Module has three Anded Predecessors all three must chain to this Module once before this Module can be scheduled Once the Module is scheduled it creates a new copy of this Module which starts by checking its preconditions All three predecessor Modules must then chain to this new copy before it may be scheduled Any extra chainings predecessor Modules made to the old copy will not be used to satisfy this new copy s Anded Predecessor preconditions It is often useful to specify a Module as its own successor thus allowing a Module to be always ready to perform an action When specifying a Module as its own successor do not specify that it has a predecessor thus avoiding a logical impossibility Start only after you have completed A scheduling precondition must still be provided for the Module Commonly the Module is given a Start Time of zero to bring it into existence at the start of a simulation It will then chain to itself to remain active throughout the simulation Checked once preconditions are Chain If Semaphore Chain If File and Chain If
262. ing Elements Button 165 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual J b Module Name CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER Time Units MICROSECONDS 2 Module Controls Predecessors No Predecessors__ Module Host Processors Processor List FS C None a Allowed C Resident Pl Si L E A dl F 4 a A Q Move Lou 2 Statistical Successors The Module Host Processors Form 3 5 11 5 Set Successors The Set Successors button will display the Module Successors Form which controls the successor list of a Module This form has a set of radio buttons to determine the successor type None Anded or Statistical If None is selected the Module Successors list will be emptied If Anded is selected all listed successor Modules will be scheduled to run at the completion of this Module If Statistical is selected only one successor Module will be selected and the selection is determined by the percentage attribute of the successor Modules Use the Add Cut and Move buttons to create remove and reposition successors in the list The percentages of Statistical Successors are displayed in the list box just after their names The Percent button can be used to change the percentage of Statistical Successor names highlighted in the list box These percentages must sum to 100 The Edit button is selectable only for Anded Successors and is used to associate a Skip Count or a Chain Count with an Anded Successor 166 Chapter 3 NETWOR
263. ing in a dialog box all known SDF names and a prompt that allows you to enter a number or a new distribution name Statistical Distributions are referenced by their user defined name The parameters of the distribution are defined separately at the top level of NETWORK Each Statistical Distribution Function has a name an optional comment and a distribution type normal beta etc After you have selected a type you will be able to access the parameter list containing a maximum of five attributes and possibly a stream to be used by the SDF NETWORK II 5 supports the following different types of distributions with the following attributes DISTRIBUTION ATTRIBUTES Beta K1 K2 Lower Bound Upper Bound Constant Value Erlang Mean Variance Exponential Mean Lower Bound Upper Bound File Count A B Lower Bound Upper Bound File Linear A B Lower Bound Upper Bound Gamma Mean K Lower Bound Upper Bound IEEE BACKOFF Slot Time Offset 70 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 Retry Limit Limit Delay Stream Key Linear A B Upper Bound Lower Bound Log Normal Standard Deviation Mean Lower Bound Upper Bound Message Linear A B Lower Bound Upper Bound Message Count A B Lower Bound Upper Bound Normal Standard Deviation Mean Lower Bound Upper Bound Pattern Table Pattern From File File Name Random Linear Table Random Step Table Semaphore Linear A B Lower Bound Upper Bound Semaphore Triangle Mean Lower Bound Upper Bound Uniform Lower Bound
264. ing line at command prompt INSDK Install quick 3 This will invoke SpectroINSTALL 4 From here the SPECTRUM 3 0 Installation Procedures can be followed with one exception NOTE The only component that should be selected for installation is topex1 0 i e Topology Export 5 Exit root This procedure will add menu options within SPECTRUM Select command Export Topology to capture the topological information of your network 10 4 3 NETWORK II 5 HP OpenView Interface NETWORK IL5 can be installed such that it can be started from within HP OpenView refer to appendix for instructions To export the network topology click on the Tools menu option from the Root Window and then NETWORK II 5 Topology Export The exported file will be stored in tmp n25 top which is set by default in n25 reg To manually export the file without installing within HP OpenView type at the command line ovtopodump 1 r gt lt filename gt This command can be used even when HP OpenView is not running 10 4 4 NETWORK II 5 IBM NetView 6000 NetView for AIX Interface The topological commands for IBM NetView 6000 are same as HP OpenView instructions above except NETWORK II 5 commands may also be invoked directly using the icons provided on the tools palette The command line for topological dump is same 10 4 5 NETWORK II 5 Digital PolyCenter Interface The topological capture commands for Digital PolyCenter are same as IBM NetView 6000 ins
265. ing the TD will have to contend for the TD once for every block sent To send a message that required 10 blocks over an Ethernet a PE would have to contend for the TD 10 times If Separate Blocks NO the time to transfer the total number of words and blocks will be computed However the actual transmission will be made as one transfer So in the previous example the PE would contend for the TD only once Setting Separate Blocks to NO may reduce the execution time of your model by decreasing the number of TD requests If the system that you are modeling actually transfers data one block at a time this speedup will result in some loss of modeling accuracy 2 2 2 2 Transfer Device Attributes Every Transfer Device has A protocol A Cycle Time A Bits Per Cycle A Cycles Per Word A Words Per Block 31 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual A Word Overhead Time A Block Overhead Time A Minimum Bits to Send A Block Error Probability A Block Error Stream A Scale Error Probability flag A Block Retry Time A Separate Blocks flag A Connection List The Protocol defines the method of resolving contention between Processing Elements for a Transfer Device Your choices of Protocol are FCFS First Come First Served Collision Priority Token Ring Slotted Token Ring Priority Token Ring Aloha and Crossbar Based on your selection you may be required to specify additional attributes that are specific to the protocol chos
266. ions of the PE and to connect the PE to the TD or LAN before performing the Clone The Clone Modules check box is only used when PEs are cloned Setting this check box to yes may have two effects on the cloning process Any Modules that run exclusively on a PE that is cloned i e those Modules with a single Resident or Allowed PE name identical to the cloned PE will be duplicated and renamed for each clone For example the Module called SEND MESSAGE runs on the PE WORKSTATION When WORKSTATION is cloned the new Module WORKSTATION 1 SEND MESSAGE will be created if Clone Modules was selected Also those Modules that may run on several PEs including the PE being cloned will be will have their Resident Allowed PE lists altered by the addition of clone names in these lists In this case no new Modules are created but current Modules may now run on the clones If you do not select Clone Modules new Modules will not be created and the existing Modules will not be altered 99 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 viz Clone Menu a Es al ET l Ral A X Clone Connections X Clone Modules Clone Semaphores The Clone Form The Clone Semaphores check box is only used if PEs are to be cloned If Clone Semaphores YES for any cloned PE a check is made to see if this PE has Semaphore Instructions that access Semaphores that are not accessed by any other Pes in the model If such a PE is to be cloned a newly named
267. is not active and is omitted from the Snapshot Report A module may have multiple preconditions and be unable to execute because it fails two or more preconditions The snapshot report lists only one of the failed preconditions because the module stopped checking when it found a precondition that had not been satisfied The Snapshot Report includes the following information Processing Elements 1 PEname 2 PE status idle busy or listening A PE is listening if a message is being received and the PE does not have an input controller 3 The name of the current Instruction being executed 4 The name and identification number of the Module running on the PE 5 The name of the TD LAN being used by the PE 6 The name of the current Storage Device 7 The name of the current file being used by the PE 8 A list of Modules queued for PE services in order of priority 9 A list of messages received by the PE that have not been used 10 If a message list size was specified the number of bits available 11 The source of delay at the PE if any i e waiting for a File Storage Device Transfer Device or destination PE Transfer Devices LANs 1 TD LAN name 2 TD LAN status idle or busy 3 The name of the current TD LAN User 222 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File Semaphores 1 semaphore name 2 semaphore status SET or RESET 3 semaphore count Storage Devices 1 Ze 3 SD name SD status idle or busy
268. it will execute To add the Message Requirement click on the Add Button next to the Preconditions list on the Module form and then select Message Requirement from the Preconditions list Then enter the message name RADAR DATA PROCESSED in the form that is displayed To complete the Module add the instruction NAVIGATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT to its list and declare the Module TACTICAL OPERATIONS as an Anded successor Return to the Modules Menu select TACTICAL OPERATIONS and then add the instructions TACTICAL OPERATIONS STRING COMPLETE and RESET TIME THE FLIGHT STRING to its instruction list This completes the Modules used for the navigation function Click on OK to get back to the top level The radar data processing function will consist of three Modules Select PE 2 and then Modules and then create a module called GET DATA Click on the name GET DATA and then Edit to complete the definition of the new Module This Module begins the processing of radar data and starts execution whenever the message RADAR DATA AVAILABLE is received on PE 2 Add the Message Requirement RADAR DATA AVAILABLE to this Module enter the instruction names SET TIME THE DATA STRING and GET DATA in its instruction list and declare the Module FFT as an Anded Predecessor Module GET DATA is now complete When you return to the Module List Form add the Module names FFT and REPLACE DATA to the list and then select Edit to complete their definitions FFT will have Ande
269. ization Plot The scale at the bottom of the plot represents the percent of the plotted range So point 50 represents 50 percent of the plotted range not an absolute time 7 4 Count Plots The Count Plots show the maximum average and minimum Count for a Semaphore and the current number of users for a Crossbar or Aloha TD over a user defined period of time The user specified interval from start time and end time is divided into 100 bins Then for each of the 100 plotted bins the maximum average and minimum count or users labeled Circuits are plotted The colors used to distinguish the different levels may be set from the Plot Menu form by selecting the Display button 265 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual KE TWeCOHEK 11 5 ATH SHITH HUB Flot Feos 6 to 3 8 SECONDS A Count Plot The Y axis is automatically scaled to match the actual count reached during the simulation The X axis represents the plotted time 7 5 Response Time Plots The Response Plots show the response times for each plotted Semaphore It is specified by a start time and end time Then for each of the 50 plotted bins the maximum average and minimum response times are plotted KE TWOHE 11 5 FA 318 Ha E HI Im a Plot from Bd to 18 B LUIS A Response Time Plot 266 Chapter 7 Plotting Simulation Results The Y axis is automatically scaled to match the actual maximum response time reached during plotted range of the simulation The X a
270. ize in the external file has been capped to 1E 38 bits this is the maximum limit of message size within NETWORK II 5 e Input file PRN does not have a number in the Holding Msgs field on line LINE_NUM Set Holding Msgs Start to O to disable reading this field Unable to finish traffic file The Traffic file has incomplete data column Holding Msgs based on the profile settings you have set Check the profile settings again and if you need to disable this particular field set Holding Msgs Start value to 0 e Input file PRN has a negative Holding Msgs value on line LINE_NUM Value must be positive Set Holding Msgs Start to 0 to disable reading this field Unable to finish traffic file A negative value was found on line LINE_NUM in the Holding Msgs column Negative values are not allowed within TRAFLINK e Your traffic file PRN has a blank source destination message field on line LINE_NUM Unable to finish traffic file The source destination message field in the Traffic file on line LINE_NUM was undefined TRAFLINK requires a name for all the source destination and message fields e Your input file PRN has an external name not matched to a simulation name Unmatched name is SOURCE_NAME DEST_NAME MSG_NAME Unable to finish traffic file During the name matching process all the names in the external file have to be matched with the names in the simulation model This message will be displayed when either SOU
271. k Overhead Time and Write Block Overhead Time are real numbers or references to statistical distributions specifying the amount of time to add to each block read or written to account for Storage Device overhead 44 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 Read Write Access Delay represents the initial amount of time before a read write transfer can begin on the Storage Device regardless of the length of the read write An example when this attribute is helpful is modeling the hard disk drive on a laptop computer A hard disk request might be delayed waiting for a powered down hard disk to come up to speed Once the hard disk is up to speed the entire read write transfer may proceed The time for the transfer will then be based on the other SD speed and overhead attributes and the Transfer Device rate connecting the SD to the PE requesting the read write 2 2 3 3 Example MODELING A DISK DRIVE A sample calculation of the amount of time needed to move data from a Storage Device follows Disk Read Time Example To read 133 words from a Storage Device with a 64 word sector Read Word Access Time 500 mic average seek time 10 mic Read Block Overhead Time Word Time 133 words x 500 mic word 66500 mic Block Overhead Time 133 words 64 words per block 2 08 blocks 3 blocks x 10000 mic 30000 mic Total Transfer Time Word Time Block Overhead Time 66500 30000 96500 mic 2 2 4 Routes Message instructions let yo
272. l always be added to the Destination s Received Message List If the Resume Flag NO an interrupted instruction will restart transmission of the message from the beginning when resumed If the Resume Flag YES an interrupted instruction will only transmit the number of bits not yet sent when resumed The Continue Message Flag can be used if the Message Instruction has inherited an original message If Continue Message YES the message is passed to its destination and the PE executing the instruction is considered to be an intermediary to the message rather than the originator of the message If this message is then echoed back from the destination it will be returned to the origin of the original message If Continue Message NO the PE executing the instruction is considered the originator of the message even though an original message has been inherited If the Inhibit Message to Self Flag YES the message sent by this instruction is prevented from being received by the host PE executing this instruction This allows the broadcast of a message to be received by every PE on a TD or LAN except the host PE If a message is sent to a destination selected from a Destination Mix when the destination selected is the Host PE for this instruction a new selection will be made from the mix until a PE other than the host is selected There is an upper limit of 100 attempts to find another PE to prevent an infinite loop If the Inhibit Message
273. l and conducts Pass One Error Check 199 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual As your input file is read in by TEXTWORK the load progress report is displayed on your screen indicating the number of entities that have been loaded Global Flags initialized Processing Elements initialized Transfer Devices initialized Modules initialized If there are any pass one errors in the model the resulting error messages will be written to the display and to the Simulation Report File LIS Pass One checks the model for syntax and completeness TEXTWORK terminates execution when a pass one error is encountered If a pass one error occurs load the model into NETWORK verify the model and correct the identified errors If an input listing was requested the pass one error messages will be written below the line that caused the error If the error resulted from an incomplete description the error messages will be written at the end listing of the offending Module PE Transfer Device or Storage Device PASS ONE found FATAL ERRORS in the input file Simulation stopped Refer to the listing file for error messages If no pass one errors are found in the model TEXTWORK continues the simulation setup dialog NETWORK II 5 took 1 seconds to read the 93 line data file TEXTWORK Setup Parameters Default Listing After TEXTWORK has read in the input file you are given the opportunity to send the default listing to the simulati
274. l be returned by the SDF 33 Invalid use of Key Linear IEEE Backoff SDF WARNING At 89786450 SEC Key Linear IEEE Backoff distribution DIST 5 used by something other than a td Both the Key Linear and IEEE Backoff SDFs may only be used in conjunction with a Transfer Device Any other use will result in a runtime warning A value of zero will be returned by the SDF 34 IEEE Backoff SDF Error WARNING At 3 154680 SEC Distribution MY IEEE BACKOFF used by a TD without a proper connection An IEEE Backoff SDF was used by a Transfer Device that does not have a connection As a result of this error the simulation will stop 35 Pattern From File SDF Not Found WARNING At 125004500 SEC file RECORDS PFF used by PATTERN FROM FILE distribution MESSAGE LENGTHS not found Simulation halted 328 Chapter 9 Debugging NETWORK was unable to locate the specified file to be used for this Pattern From File SDF As a result the simulation was terminated Check the spelling of the file name and the location of the file If necessary specify the explicit path from the root directory in the SDF Form 36 Non Numeric Entry in Pattern From File SDF WARNING At 2304500 SEC file RECORDS PFF used by the distribution MESSAGE LENGTHS contains the non numeric entry ONE Entry skipped Only numeric entries are allowed in a Pattern from Fi
275. l the Transfer Device PEs will only be allowed to transmit on the TD at the beginning of each time cycle defined by the Slot Width The Resume Flag of Message and Read Write Instructions acts normally on an Aloha TD This flag determines whether an interrupted instruction restarts completely or will resume and complete the remaining transmission A collision on an Aloha TD does not interrupt a Module so the Resume Flag will not cause the retransmission of bits lost due to a collision because the sender is not interrupted To automatically retransmit all lost transfers on an Aloha TD set Automatic Retry to YES 2 2 2 11 Crossbar Protocol The Crossbar protocol permits simultaneous transmissions on the same Transfer Device at any time without any complications resulting from multiple transmissions A Crossbar Transfer Device can be refined by using the Source Blocking Flag the Destination Blocking Flag and the Number of Circuits attribute If the Source Blocking Flag YES a PE will be blocked from transmitting to any other PE that is currently sending a message or a file The blocked PE will delay until its intended destination has finished sending its transmission If the Destination Blocking Flag YES a PE will be blocked from transmitting to any other PE that is currently receiving a message or a file The blocked PE will delay until its intended destination has finished receiving the current transmission The Number of Circuits attribute can
276. l this message was received again Messages are only allocated to Modules which have all of their preconditions met If two or more Modules with all other preconditions met were waiting for the same message the message would be allocated to the highest priority Module Within equal priority it would go to the Module that waited the longest for this message All else being equal a random choice will be made Wild cards are permitted in a Module s Message Status Requirement Therefore a Module could wait for one of many different messages with only one wild card Message Status Requirement See Section 2 3 7 for a complete description of wild cards The Wait For Message Status Requirement List is presumed to be an Anded List This means that every message in the list must be received to satisfy this Module s Message Requirements Wild cards are commonly used to effectively provide an Ored List where any one of a group of messages would be sufficient to start this Module An additional Module attribute that relates to Wait For Message Status Requirements is the One Message At A Time flag This flag is used in cases in which you may want only one copy of a Module that has a Wait For Message Status Requirement to exist at a host PE at any given time When One Message At A Time NO the default every time a new copy of the message which will satisfy the Module s Message Status Requirement arrives a new copy of the Module is created and will conte
277. le 1 bits Cycles Per Word 8 cycles Words Per Frame 17967 words Word Overhead 0 bits Frame Overhead 200 bits Min Data Per Frame 0 bits Token Passing Time NR mic Notes Frame Format lt SFS gt lt FCS Coverage gt lt EFS gt ISD ACIFCIDAISAI INFO FCS EDIFS SFS Start of Frame Sequence SD Starting Delimiter 1 octet AC Access Control 1 octet FC Frame Control 1 octet DA Destination Address 2 or 6 octets SA Source Address 2 or 6 octets INFO Information 0 or more octets FCS Frame Check Sequence 4 octets EFS End of Frame Sequence ED Ending Delimiter 1 octet FS Frame Status 1 octet Predefined LAN Implementation Values Notes regarding how the LAN implementation parameters were derived may also be displayed at the bottom of the list If you have chosen a user defined LAN Type you will be able to edit the Chapter 3 NETWORK NETWORK II 5 hd E User Defined LAN USER DEFINED COLLISION LAN Speed 10 00000 Mbps Type Bits Per Cycle Mi bits ES Incl Cycles Per Word js cycles Words Per Frame fass o words Word Overhead jo bits Frame Overhead 240 bits Min Data Per Frame 336 bits Collision Window 4 33 mic Jam Time 3 2 mic Interframe Gap 9 6 mic a Standard C User Defined es LJ i LO PD lle Lim lim S LE A User Defined LAN Form LAN Connection List The LAN Connection List provides a listing of
278. le SDF data file When a non numeric entry is encountered a runtime warning is generated the non numeric entry is skipped the next entry in the file is read and the simulation proceeds Echo PE List Runtime Warnings 37 Incomplete or Incorrect Echo PE List WARNING At 240550000 SEC Instruction NEW DATA AVAILABLE on pe DATA CRUNCHER tried to use echo pe list RETURN PES to change the return pe for a message that arrived via td DATA HIGHWAY but this td is not in this list When a Message Instruction utilizes an Echo PE List the selection of the new echo PE is based on the TD which transmitted the original source message If the TD is not listed in the Echo PE List this runtime warning will be generated The message s current echo PE will be maintained NETWORK assumes no defaults for Echo PE Lists External Traffic Runtime Warnings 38 External Traffic File Format Corrupt WARNING At 0 0 SEC First non comment line in file CLASS4 EXT is not an integer File format corrupted Simulation cannot be started The first non comment line in an External Traffic File EXT must be an integer value Otherwise the simulation will not run If you encounter this error run TRAFLINK again to recreate the External Traffic File 329 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 39 External Traffic PE does not match Simulation PE WARNING At 0 0 SEC pe SERVER is listed in the ex
279. lect the OK button to begin the animation or to resume an animation CANCEL If you select the CANCEL button when the Animation Menu form is first displayed the animation will be terminated and control is returned to the top level If during an animation you select the Options command from the animation menubar CANCEL will resume the animation and ignore any changes you may have made to the animation parameters on the Animation Menu form 256 Chapter 6 Model Animation 6 3 2 The Animation Options dialog box d Animation Options Dialog Box with Single Step Stop Selecting the animation menubar s Stop command ends the animation and returns control to the Top Menubar Step The Step command advances the animation to the next event or time when single step mode is being used The Step command is only available if Single Step Operation was selected If the animation is advanced continuously the Step command is not shown on the dialog box Options The Options button allows you to change animation run parameters during the animation After the Options button is selected the animation pauses and the Animation Menu form is displayed To restart the animation click on either the OK new parameters are accepted or the CANCEL button new parameters are ignored Snapshot The Snapshot command allows you to monitor your model elements during an animation When the Snapshot command is executed the Status Menu appears and you w
280. led the simulation would enter an infinite loop by resending the message block If you use an SDF for the Block Retry Time make sure it cannot return a zero value 20 No Connection between Message Source and Destination WARNING At 24 734563 SEC SEND INFO tried to send a message from pe SOURCE PE to pe DESTINATION PE but no td connects these devices Instruction aborted In order for a Message Instruction to execute a Transfer Device must provide a connection between the source PE and the destination PE 21 No TD connection to Message source PE WARNING At 29 060464 SEC TRANSMIT DATA tried to send a message from pe STATION1 to pe STATION2 using td ETHERNET H 324 Chapter 9 Debugging but it does not connect to the source pe Instruction aborted In order for a message to be transmitted a Transfer Device must provide a connection between the source PE and the destination PE If there is no Transfer Device connection to the source PE the Message Instruction will be cancelled 22 No TD connection to Message destination PE WARNING At 30 112962 SEC SEND FILE tried to send a message from pe PC1 to pe WORKSTATION using td TOKEN BUS but it does not connect to the destination pe Instruction aborted In order for a message to be transmitted a Transfer Device must provide a connection between the source PE and the destina
281. les from the PE Form The difference between approaches is that if you access a module from a PE form that module is presumed to run on that PE If you access a module from the menubar you must specify where the module is to run Perder ra mee tia Preis s 13 toma e Defining a Module In the example model four separate software functions are to be included navigation radar data processing communications and self test The self test function will be modeled as a single Module and the other three functions will be modeled using Module chains The navigation function will be entered into the model by double clicking on the PE 1 icon to get to the PE form Click on the Modules button and the Module Menu form will be presented for PE 1 This form has a list box showing those Modules that may run on PE 1 during the simulation Select the Add button at the right of the form and the New Name form will appear Enter the text FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT in this form and then select OK to create a new Module by this name FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT should now appear in the Module list of PE 1 Select the name FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT and then select Edit to display the Module Form in which the Module can be defined 283 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual KE TWeCGHK 11 5 Peace iiig Element l o CHECKE ESA BOFFA BEG HOT AVALAN DISPLAY MESSAGE PHO RAGA TODS SWS TE ee ae HT TAC TCA OFERATIOHS SELF TEST a F al
282. ll be selectable The Cut button will display a list of the cut data structures from which names may be selected to restore the cut data structures to the model The Move button will reposition a name within the name list and is selectable only when 1 name has been selected highlighted in the list This is useful not only to position those items in the list that are frequently edited in a more convenient location but in some cases the list position of a data structure can influence the model The order of PEs is important as an example when a Module with an Allowed PE List of any is searching for a host PE The name to be moved will be removed from the list and list position numbers will be inserted between the remaining list names to assist you in repositioning names Once a Move is started it must be finished before any other actions can be performed The Clone button is selectable when a list name is highlighted and will create new copies of the selected data structure If a hardware data structure is being cloned the standard Clone Form will be displayed to allow multiple clones If the Clone button is used for a software data structure you will be asked merely to supply a new name and only one copy is made The names of the clones will then be displayed in the name list The Edit button will display the standard attributes form for each of the selected list names so that you can examine modify your data structures 103 NETWORK
283. llowed Transfer Devices because succeeding Allowed TDs will never be selected due to the fact that there is never a delay for an Aloha TD An Aloha protocol TD has three attributes in addition to the normal TD attributes Automatic Retry Retry Interval and Slot Width Automatic Retry can be set to YES or NO If Automatic Retry is set to NO and a collision occurs the colliding instructions will continue until completed and then its host Module will move on to its next instruction However the message or file being transmitted will not have been sent or received If Automatic Retry is set to YES and a collision occurs the colliding instruction will 41 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual complete and then be rescheduled for another transmission attempt at the end of the collided transmission The time the instruction will wait before retrying is derived from the Retry Interval which must be a statistical distribution function if it is specified The IEEE BACKOFF statistical distribution function may be used for Retry Interval Retry Interval is provided as a modeling convenience because the actual Aloha protocol uses acknowledge messages to detect undelivered transmissions This feature permits modeling this mechanism without adding additional Modules and messages The Slot Width can be used to convert a pure Aloha TD Slot Width NR into a slotted Aloha TD When you provide a value for the Slot Width a timer equal to the Slot Width is used to contro
284. ly and do not identify any simulation entities 2 numbers if idle x y x index number of the Transfer Device y setto 0 to indicate the Transfer Device is not in use Example listing of a Transfer Device allocated for accessing a file in a Storage Device 1348 363 412 9 110 420 8 8 4201 At 1348 363 microseconds Transfer Device BUS 1 index number 10 is allocated to PE COMPUTER Al index number 4 to access File DATA FILE index number 20 in Storage Device MAIN STORAGE index number 8 Example listing of a TD broadcasting to several PEs 1448 363 10 4 2010 051310 518 1671040 At 1448 363 microseconds TD BUS 1 index number 10 is allocated to PE COMPUTER A2 index number 5 to transmit the message DATA PACKET index number 18 to PEs COMPUTER B1 and COMPUTER B2 index numbers 6 and 7 with a 1 in front and at the end of the list of destination PEs Storage Device 4 numbers w x y Z w index number of the Storage Device x index number of the Processing Element using the Storage device y index number of the File being accessed within the Storage Device z status of the Storage Device 1 when busy O when idle 359 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Example listing of a Storage Device in use 1348 363 412 9 110 420 8 8 420 1 At 1348 363 microseconds Storage Device MAIN STORAGE index number 8 is being used by PE COMPUTER Al index number 4 The File accessed is DATA FILE index number 20 In addition each time a trace mes
285. me Units combo box Time units may be set to seconds milliseconds microseconds or nanoseconds Any time values displayed on a form will be scaled to the new units If you have specific time values to enter into a form given in a certain time unit it is easier to convert the time units on the form than it is to convert the numbers to a time unit Include In Plot File This check box is provided so that you can determine if an individual item is to be included in or excluded from the plot file To include a data structure in the plot file make sure the check box is marked The Controls Form also has similar check boxes which can be used to mark whether or not an entire group of data structures will be included in the plot file These check boxes are useful if you wish to ignore plot data on less important modeling objects and to restrict the size of the plot file OK To accept changes that have been entered in a form click on the OK button When you OK the form NETWORK may check the validity of your entries such as checking a new name to make sure that it conforms to NETWORK II 5 naming rules If an invalid entry is found NETWORK will display a form to explain what new entries must be changed In this case your OK will be cancelled and you will be returned to the attributes form to make any corrections Cancel To reject changes that have been entered in a form click on the CANCEL button If you cancel from the PE Form changes made to the
286. meter must be specified as a real value 145 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Block Error Probability The block error probability parameter must be specified as a real value 146 Chapter 3 NETWORK Error Stream The error stream is an integer value that must be in the range from 1 to 999 If you leave the error stream in the NR state an error stream value will automatically be chosen by the simulation program Scale Error Probability A TD s Scale Error Probability flag is set to YES when this check box is selected 3 5 5 LAN Form The LAN Form is used to display and change the attributes of a selected LAN NETWORK II 5 hd E al T z Type IEEE 802 5 16MBPS Lan Values X Include in Plot File LAN Connection List Verify E WORKSTATION_3 Cut Move LOL e a Lim S lim 5 z The LAN Form Type Use the Type combo box to select a LAN Type A list of available implementations is displayed by clicking on the down arrow of the Type combo box In addition to the predefined implementations user defined LANs are also available which will allow you to customize the LAN parameters 147 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Values To view the LAN implementation parameters click on the Values button A list box with the implementation values will be presented box parameters in the form Lol lalo lmislmis a E 148 LAN Implementation Parameters RATE INNATA Bits Per Cyc
287. mode will create a single PE icon to represent an entire PE group regardless of the quantity of the PE group Max Group Members Displayed Max Group Members Displayed will limit the number of copies of a PE group that can be shown on the display If the quantity of a PE group exceeds this number it will be shown in Single Icon mode on the display PE Group Offset The X horizontal and Y vertical values of PE Group Offset are used to position copies of a PE group displayed in Individual or Group mode You may change either of these values by clicking in the box and entering a real value When a PE group is displayed 182 Chapter 3 NETWORK the first icon is presented and then succeeding group icons are displayed by adding the offset values to the coordinates of the previously displayed icon 3 6 3 Gateway Graphics Form The Gateway Graphics Form is nearly the same as the PE Graphics Form There is no Drawing Mode or Group Offset controls on the Gateway s form because Gateways do not have a Quantity attribute 3 6 4 Storage Device Graphics Form The Storage Device Graphics Form has all of the fields found on the Gateway Graphics Form with one exception There is no Color combo box on the SD Graphics Form because Storage Devices do not have a color attribute 3 6 5 Transfer Device LAN Graphics Form Because Transfer Devices and LANs are drawn as line segments in NETWORK II 5 the TD Graphics Form is unlike the other graphics for
288. mplished the software elements and other refinements can be added to the model In the following paragraphs of this section the steps required to add a Processing Element PE Transfer Device TD Storage Device SD Module and Statistical Distribution Function SDF will be described When building your model the simplest way to create any of the NETWORK II 5 hardware data structures is to select the appropriate hardware icon from the palette on the left side of the display See Chapter 3 for a complete explanation of the palette icons When you click on a hardware palette icon your cursor will become the image of the data type you have selected You may then position this image anywhere on the display and then click once again to anchor the hardware element on the display 8 3 1 Adding Processing Elements To add a PE to your model click once on the PE palette icon third from the top and then position the PE image in the desired location and click again A new PE has now been created with the default PE icon and with a default name PE 1 PE 2 etc Perform this operation twice to create the two Processing Elements that are used in the example model 275 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual HE TWecGHk 11 5 Adding a PE Once the new PE has been added you may continue adding hardware components to your model or you may fill in the details of the newly created PE To define the details of a new PE add instructions define attr
289. ms described above 183 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 hd E TD LAN Draw Options Name BUS 1 Segment Style solid 2 Segment Width 60 View Connection Style solid 2 Connection Width 60 K EA Bl a Automatic Draw Type Bus 3 El Ad A Scaling and Rotation Options Position Options Horizontal Scale 1 00 Entire TD LAN Vertical Scale 1 00 Name Rotate degrees 0 00 MSG File Add Segments The TD LAN Graphics Form Segment Style The Segment Style combo box controls the line pattern used for the Transfer Device line segments Five different line styles are available To change the line style select the down arrow of the combo box and make a selection from the list Segment Width The segment width controls the line width used for the Transfer Device The segment width may range from 0 to 999 The default segment width is 120 Also it is worth noting that the increase decrease in segment width is relative to the model scale For example changing the segment width from 120 to 190 with a model scaled at 30 will not be noticeable However if the model scale is 80 you will be able to perceive the difference 184 Chapter 3 NETWORK Connection Style The Segment Style combo box controls the line pattern used for the Transfer Device connections to PEs SD and Gateways Five different line styles are available To change the line style select the down arrow of the combo box an
290. mulation Run Length The default Trace Stop Time is the simulation Run Length Traced Items The Traced Items List may be displayed and modified by clicking on the Traced Items button Use the Add and Cut buttons to enter and remove names of items that are to be traced during the simulation Everything in your model can be traced by selecting ALL and entire classes may be selected by clicking on ALL PES ALL TDS ALL SDS ALL INSTRUCTIONS and ALL MODULES External traffic which was captured with a LAN Analyzer may be traced by selecting lt External Traffic gt Set Graph 1 Set Graph 2 Set Graph 3 Three separate utilization graphs may be displayed during the simulation To select the name of a Processing Element Storage Device or Transfer Device click the Set Graph buttons and then select a device name ACE E A A Mesa Eh brad pora Destin Listing A Waring la Scan A Wwerrga is Mia a Pata FU Use External Trade Fle MeH Tias 1 cnn SEC Napis Marta al vaniy Apr Plaga D The Advanced Options Form 4 2 2 Advanced Options Form Default Listing By selecting the Default Listing option a copy of the internal model database used in the simulation will be saved in the simulation Report File Any required 191 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual parameters omitted in the Network Description File will have their default values displayed in this listing Periodic Reports If the number of Periodic Reports
291. n Plot File file type PIN The simulation Report File is a text file which contains summary statistics from the simulation run This is the file presented when you Browse Reports from within NETWORK The file consists of plain text and can be printed and viewed with an editor The simulation Plot File is a binary file which is used by NETWORK to generate plots and animation The Plot File is not normally examined by the user 4 2 SIMWORK SIMWORK is the simulation program with a graphics based user interface SIMWORK is started from within NETWORK by selecting Analysis Start Simulation from the menubar Prior to starting SIMWORK you should have opened or created a model containing at least one Module to be executed by a Processing Element When you invoke SIMWORK it begins execution by displaying the Run Parameters form where you may set the values that control your simulation The Run Length is the only run parameter that must be supplied If no other parameters are entered the simulation will produce a progress graph a simulation Plot File file type PIN for the entire simulation and a simulation Report File file type LIS which contains every 189 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual applicable report Fill in the run parameters as appropriate and then click the Run button to begin the simulation Additional run parameters can be accessed on the Advanced Options Form when you click the Advanced button from the Run Parameters form
292. n an animation Section 6 3 provides a reference for the Animation Menu Form and the options provided by the animation menubar 6 2 RUNNING AN ANIMATION The basic steps needed to run an animation are as follows 1 Select the Analysis Animation command from the menubar 2 Set the desired animation options on the Animation Menu form 3 Select OK on the Animation Menu form to start the animation 6 2 1 Set Animation Parameters 248 Chapter 6 Model Animation Animation parameters may be set both prior to and during an animation The Animation Menu form may be accessed either by selecting the menubar s Analysis Animation command when you begin the animation or by selecting the Animation Options form s Options button during the animation KE TWeOHE 11 5 Dalap Tara 30 SE Gina Tiaa Loe L E Mrs bona Ga ol Testa le dir bi dl Ed dl Dri The Animation Menu If Animation trace messages are available in the simulation Report File they may be displayed during the animation by selecting the Display Trace Messages checkbox on the Animation Menu form The display of trace messages can be turned on off as the animation proceeds An animation may be advanced either continuously or a single step at a time By default the animation is advanced continuously For an animation which is advanced continuously Single Step Operation not checked the delay time represents the amount of time the animation pauses between di
293. n determining message transmission times over the various Transfer Devices A Message Instruction has a Message Text separate from the Message Instruction name to allow more than one instruction to send the same message and to allow the same instruction name to send different messages on different PE s For example a Module issuing the message THIS PE FAILING might want to send a message that indicates who is failing However the Module that issues this instruction might be dynamically assigned to different PE s Having an instruction of the same name on different Pes send a different message text from each PE PE1 IS FAILING from PE1 PE2 IS FAILING from PE2 etc solves this problem The Message Instruction s Message Text is the name that appears in the receiving PE s Received Message List and is the name that will be compared to a Module s Message Status Requirements 2 3 6 Semaphores Semaphores are also used to schedule and coordinate tasks Semaphores are global flags with both a binary value SET or RESET and an integer count They may be modified 67 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual by any PE in the simulation and examined by any Module in the simulation Modifying a Semaphore does not take any simulation time Every Semaphore has a count associated with it You may increment decrement or assign a Semaphore s count by using a Semaphore Instruction This count can be used by a Module s Wait For and Chain If preconditions See Section 2
294. n draws a diagram in the same format as CONNECT except that PEs SDs and Gateways may appear either above or below TDs and LANs This algorithm minimizes the width of the resultant diagram at the expense of a less structured diagram The LAN option will attempt to draw each TD and LAN as a separate entity and then connect all PEs SDs and Gateways found in the TD or LAN Connection List If the PE SD or Gateway has already been connected to another TD or LAN a connection is drawn from the TD or LAN to the PE SD or Gateway from wherever it has been placed on the screen NETWORK II 5 vis AUTO DRAW OPTIONS Za Bl ah ci PO gt E al CONNECT LAN REPOSITION R10 MODEL The Auto Draw Options Form The COLORS option allows you to select the colors that will be seen on the display A default set of color choices is used when NETWORK is invoked The current color choices are indicated by a check next to the color To select or deselect a color click on the check box next to the desired color When all color choices have been made clicking on the OK button accepts the color changes The display will be adjusted so that the only 106 Chapter 3 NETWORK colors shown are the current color choices To leave without adjusting any colors click on the CANCEL button The Reposition R10 Model option is useful if you an older model that is read into NETWORK is displayed with connections from TDs LANS to hardware icons
295. n the check box is selected Input Controller A PE s Input Controller flag is set to YES when the check box is selected Modules You may modify Modules that operate on a PE or create new Modules by selecting the Modules button The current list of Modules that may run on the PE is shown when the Modules button is selected This list includes Modules that have the PE as an Allowed or Resident PE and all the successors of these Modules Modules may be edited from this list or created and added to the list If a Module that appeared in the list is edited so that it no longer runs on the PE its name is removed from the list and any successors it called may be removed from the list 123 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 vis Processing Element A Name OFFICE 1 Quantity E ml Time U Module List Cycle T Time Sl REQUESTING USER 1 Interrup WAIT FOR REPLY Lol lat La lm e lem The Modules List Form Instruction List The Instruction List contains the names of instructions used by a PE You may use the Instruction List to create modify and delete PE instructions Four control buttons are provided for the Instruction List Add Cut Uncut Move and Edit To add a new instruction to a PE click on the Add button You will be asked to enter a new name or select from a list of instruction names This name list includes Module instruction names taken from Modules that may run on the PE and for which a co
296. n this PE to determine the processing time for the instruction Enter 2 as the Basic Cycle Time of PE 2 If you wish to change the appearance of a PE select the button labeled Graphics from the PE Form The PE Draw Options form will then be displayed In this model a new icon was selected for PE 1 by clicking on the Icon button and then selecting the mac icn from the available icon list PE 2 was displayed using the pc icn HE TYRE 115 Ja Defining Processing Element Graphics 8 3 2 Adding Transfer Devices To add a TD to your model click on the TD palette icon fourth from the top and then position the TD image in the desired location and click again A new TD has now been 277 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual created with the default TD icon a single line segment of minimum width and style continuous and with a default name TD 1 TD 2 etc fae Com ehea Cijspley Very frabyesio Help Defining a New Transfer Device Once the new TD has been added you may continue adding hardware components to your model or you may fill in the details of the newly created TD You should create three separate TDs for the example model To define the attributes of a new TD double click on the TD icon you have just positioned Or you could click on the TD to highlight its image then select the Edit Detail from the menubar Once you have done this the TD Form will be displayed in which you may make changes to the TD attributes
297. nd for the host PE This may lead to many Modules queueing for the host PE if many copies of the message are 58 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 received If One Message At A Time YES a new copy of the Module will not be created in response to a message arrival until the currently executing copy of the Module 1s completed A Module may require any number of hardware devices to have a given status as a precondition to Module execution These requirements specify that a PE Storage Device or Transfer Device be busy or idle before starting this Module In addition you may require Collision for Transfer Devices with a collision protocol and Overflow for a Storage Device or PE if the PE has a Message List Size specified If any device specified in the Hardware Status Requirements List does not have the required status the Module execution will be deferred and retried when the monitored device s status changes Appearance in this list does not allocate the device to this Module Instead it merely inhibits Module execution until the named device attains the requested status A Message Status Requirement must be defined in the Message Status Requirement form as one of four types Global Message Global Block Local Message and Local Block NETWORK II 5 allows you to specify if a message is to be sent across a Transfer Device entirely in one transmission or in several transmissions with the message divided into blocks If you want a Module t
298. nds OR Hours Minutes Seconds time stamp of each event Size in bytes Destination any combination of letters and numbers Source any combination of letters and numbers Message Summary text which gives an indication of message purpose 344 Chapter 10 TRAFLINK III Each field must be separated from adjacent fields by a blank Fields may be in any order and the length of the fields may vary File width is limited to 132 characters Generally you will need to define a configuration file for your network analyzer to get a file in this format The sequence of fields in the LAN Traffic File prn must be reflected in the column positions and character lengths listed in the TRAFLINK Traffic Form In the following example the Destination field starts in column 25 and is 12 characters long The Message field starts in column 52 and is 18 characters long The Source field starts in column 38 and is 12 characters long The Time field starts in column 11 and is 6 characters long The Size field starts in column 18 Sniffer Network Analyzer data from 29 Jun 95 at 09 06 16 file C CAPTURE TEST2 ENC Page 1 SUMMARY Delta T Size Destination Source Summary 0000 60 WstDig8A1707 0000442 0009 06 0000442DCF7D WstDig8 0320 60 WstDig8A1707 0000442 0009 06 0000442DCF7D WstDig8 0321 60 WstDig8A1707 0000442 0009 06 0000442DCF7D WstDig8A170 0321 60 WstDig8A1707 0000442DCF7 0009 06 0000442DCF7D WstDig8A170 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 DCF7 Cc R
299. ne will be created when OK the form Semaphore Status One of four Semaphore status modification methods may be chosen These are Set Reset Toggle and Do Not Modify Semaphore Count To modify the Semaphore count you need to specify the modification value in the Semaphore Count text box and the Semaphore modification value Four modification methods are available These are Increment By Decrement By Equal To and Do Not Modify The Semaphore modification value is used to alter the semaphore count 134 Chapter 3 NETWORK depending on the modification method The Semaphore modification value may be a real number or may be derived from a SDF To use a SDF either enter the name of a SDF in the text box or click on the double dots button next to the text box 135 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 3 5 3 Gateway Form The Gateway Form lists a Gateway s current attributes To modify the attributes enter new parameters and select OK NETWORK II 5 hd E a a Gateway 4 Name aw 1 X Include in Plot File TD LAN Connection List Verify a Single Speed aj C Multiple Speed Select TD LAN name in list to change Gateway speed parameters The Gateway Form TD LAN Connection List The TD LAN connection list identifies the TDs and LANs that the Gateway is connected to Names may only be added to this list by creating LAN connections either graphically on the display or else by adding the name of this Gateway to
300. nerally come from editing a Network Description file and trying to directly load it into Simwork or Textwork They also can occur due to corrupted Network Description file perhaps caused by moving the file over a modem or moving from a UNIX file system to a PC file system without proper file conversion 9 4 PASS TWO The simulation pass two checks a model for logic and consistency errors Two examples of common errors are giving a Module an allowed PE that does not exist and defining a Read Instruction that uses an allowed Transfer Device that does connect to the desired Storage Device When a pass two error occurs a warning message is displayed at the terminal a description of the error is written in the simulation Report File and the simulation is stopped In order to correct a pass two error verify the model A model which has been successfully verified should not encounter pass two errors Pass two errors generally come from editing a Network Description file and trying to directly load 1t into Simwork or Textwork 9 5 RUNTIME WARNINGS It is not possible for verify pass one and pass two to isolate all of the potential problems in a model Error conditions may result from the timing or the frequency of events Therefore NETWORK continually checks for runtime error conditions which may arise during a simulation For example a runtime error will be generated by attempting to read data from a file that does not yet exist but will be crea
301. next copy of this Module after a delay equal to the Iteration Period from the time when the last scheduling occurred 3 Only the Iteration Period is specified a Start Time will be chosen randomly using a uniform distribution between 0 zero and one Iteration Period If the Iteration Period is a statistical distribution the uniform distribution used for Start Time will 55 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual use one selection from the Iteration Period statistical distribution as an upper bound After that the time between schedulings will be the specified Iteration Period If the Stop Time is specified for a module the Module will continue to schedule executions until the Stop Time is reached If there are Modules scheduled and queued when the Stop Time occurs those queued Modules will execute Once a Module Stop Time is reached no new copies of the Module will be scheduled for the remainder of the simulation Awaited preconditions are the Module s Anded Predecessors and Ored Predecessors If one Module lists another Module as a successor it implies that the successor Module has a predecessor precondition A given Module may have a number of other Module s which list it as a When a Module completes and then notifies its successor s that it has completed that notification is called chaining When any Module chains to another Module the successor Module must determine whether its predecessor preconditions have been met If a Module is def
302. ng constructed or a file may be dynamically created during a simulation by a PE executing a Write Instruction A File may be the object of Read Instructions as well Files defined by NETWORK within the SD form 65 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual are specified by name count size where they initially reside and whether they are Read Only Files A Read Instruction or a Write Instruction will search for a File on a given Storage Device by name and also by count if a count has been specified in the instruction If a File has a matching name but not a matching count then the File cannot be used by the instruction When a Write Instruction attempts to access a File which is not currently resident in the referenced Storage Device the file is created with a size equal to the number of bits written to it It remains resident until destroyed by a Read Instruction with the Erase File option selected or until the number of bits in the file is reduced to zero by one or more Read Instructions with Decrement File selected If you write to an existing file there are three options If the Replace File option is selected on completion of the instruction the file will contain the exact number of bits that the instruction writes If the Append to File option is selected the number of bits written to the file is added to the number of bits the file already contains If the Do Not Modify File option is selected the file size remains unchanged You might use the
303. ngs notify you of illogical and or impossible conditions encountered during the simulation Not all problems can be identified by the static test performed by Verify Some problems only turn up during the dynamics of a simulation The runtime messages may be sent to the simulation Report File and or your display If runtime warnings are directed to your display the simulation will halt after each message to await user interaction By default runtime warnings go to both the display and the simulation Report File You might want to ignore runtime messages either to let the simulation continue regardless of warnings and or to reduce the size of the simulation Report File If Warnings to File is checked and Warnings to Screen is not the simulation will not halt when a runtime warning is encountered Any warnings that occur during the simulation will be written in the simulation Report File 192 Chapter 4 Running a Simulation If neither the Warnings to Screen option nor the Warnings to File option is selected the simulation will only count the number of runtime warnings encountered during the simulation The count will then be displayed in the Simulation Completed message box when the simulation concludes A complete description of the runtime warnings that may be encountered during a simulation is given in Chapter 9 Debugging a NETWORK II 5 Model Plot Data to File If Plot Data to File is checked the simulation program will generate a
304. not completely connecting to the hardware icons This offset of hardware icons is a result of the newer NETWORK graphics system defining an icon s origin in the center of the icon rather than the upper left corner Simply select this option to adjust your layout if the hardware icons seem to be out of position Display Background Icon If you wish to add a background icon to your model use the Display Background Icon command An icon may be selected from the list of icons in the combo box Background icons can be scaled and rotated as well A set of background icons is provided with NETWORK II 5 You may create your own icons by using the SIMGRAPHICS II editor supplied with NETWORK II 5 Background icon file names must start with the letters BK end with a file extension of ICN and must be stored in the appropriate graphics library file A further description of the SIMGRAPHICS II editor and creating your own background icons is given in Appendix G NETWORK II 5 viz Icon lt no background ox Scale E 00 Cancel Rotate degrees 0 0 a z Bl ES TT a gt Pal Al 107 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual The Background Icon Form Display Text Font The Display Text Font command can be used to set the text font used on the NETWORK display to display icon names and labels and also determines if the PE Names TD LAN Names TD LAN Msg File SD Names and Gateway Names are shown on the display To t
305. ns just added to the Module FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT will be defined from within PE 1 as described later After the two new instructions have been added to the Module FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT they will appear in the Instruction List box of the Module Form The number to the right of each instruction name represents the number of times the instruction is to be executed when the Module runs The default value for number of executions is 1 so no changes are required 285 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual kodule He Fusar COMTROL SUPPORT J i Hotule Buccciaora HAD PROCESS lmala la lm l 5 eo 1 ied Sacco ner PAA PODES SING Defining a Successor Module After FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT completes execution it will chain to a successor Module named RADAR PROCESSING on PE 1 This Module name can be added to the successor list of FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT by clicking on the Set Successors button that appears at the bottom of the Module form This button activates the Module Successors Form in which a successor type may be selected and the names of successors may be added RADAR PROCESSING is to be an Anded successor to FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT so click on the radio button labeled Anded in the Module Successors Form Next click on the Add button and add the name RADAR PROCESSING A new Module named RADAR PROCESSING has now been added to the model and it can be defined by completing its attributes as was just done for FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPOR
306. nt and a Storage Device as the result of a Read Write Instruction 30 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 2 2 2 1 Words and Blocks Transfer Devices organize all transmissions of data into groups called words and blocks This allows the user to model up to two levels of a data packet structure by means of a user specified word overhead time and block overhead time Words are the lowest level of a user defined packet structure Each is made up of a group of bits The user defined word overhead time can then be used for adding parity bits start stop bits and so on Fractions of a full word incur the full word overhead time The term word is fairly standard across most implementations so a NETWORK II 5 word generally represents a word in the modeled systems Blocks are the highest level of a user defined packet structure Each is made up of a group of words The user defined block overhead time can be used for adding source and or destination headers to message packets adding message checksums and so on Fractions of a block incur the full block overhead time Blocks generally represent packets on an Ethernet and frames on a token ring However the term Block is intentionally generic A Block can represent any structure that is a collection of words A Transfer Device will transmit data in one of two ways depending on an attribute called Separate Blocks If Separate Blocks YES the TD will transmit data one block at a time The PE us
307. ntinuously check their preconditions When the preconditions have been satisfied a module will request its host PE to begin execution Processing Elements choose which modules they run If the host PE is busy the module will be queued The trace message shown below means that the module CENTRAL REQUEST PROCESSING has put in a request to a PE named CENTRAL OFFICE for service It does not mean that the module has begun execution At 244800000 1 RAL OFFICE has received an execution request from module CE EST PROCESSING 1 5 3 2 Snapshot Reports The Snapshot Report describes the status of each Processing Element Transfer Device LAN Storage Device Semaphore and Module if active in the simulation at a specific time A snapshot report may be produced while tracing a simulation If you request an interactive narrative trace i e the report is sent to the display you may request a snapshot report every time the simulation pauses for user interaction When used while tracing the snapshot report is an excellent summary of all the changes that have occurred during the trace execution It also is useful in determining changes in those devices and modules which are not currently being traced You may request the simulation program to produce snapshot reports periodically during the simulation run In this manner you may monitor the progress of a simulation less verbosely than with a full narrative trace P
308. ny of the parameters A snapshot status of the model s elements may be obtained by clicking on the Animation Options Snapshot button You may select a status for PE SD Semaphore TD or ALL The PE Status Report gives the name status busy or idle and active Module if any for each PE The SD Status Report gives the name status busy or idle and active files for each SD in your model The TD Status Report lists the name status busy idle unsettled or collision and messages or files currently carried by each TD The Semaphore Status Report lists the name status SET or RESET and count of each Semaphore in your model 232 Chapter 6 Model Animation A Sample Animation Snapshot Report If the animation is being run in single step mode you may advance the animation by selecting the Animation Option s Step button 6 2 5 Stopping an Animation To stop an animation in progress and return to the top level of NETWORK click on the Animation Option s Stop button NETWORK will request a confirmation that you wish to end the animation If you allow an animation to run to completion all the events in the simulation have been displayed the Animation Completed dialog box will be displayed 6 3 ANIMATION PARAMETERS AND CONTROLS The menubar is the entry point to start an animation To access the Animation Menu form select Analysis Animation To start an animation click on the Animation Menu form s OK button 253 NETWORK II
309. o respond to the receipt of a part of a message select either the Global Block or Local Block options for the Message Status Requirement of the Module A Message Status Requirement with either of these options selected may be satisfied when a message block is received If a message is sent from one PE to another in the form of five blocks Modules with a Wait For Message Status Requirement of type Global Message or Local Message cannot begin execution until all five blocks of the complete message have arrived However a Module with a Wait For Message Status Requirement of type Global Block or Local Block could begin execution immediately after the first block is received During a simulation messages may be sent to the Global Message List Messages received in the Global Message List may satisfy Message Status Requirements for all Modules on any host PE If a Message Status Requirement is designated either Local Message or Local Block messages blocks received in the Global Message List will cannot be used to satisfy the Message Status Requirement In this case only messages blocks sent directly from one PE to another or itself or messages blocks passed by means of a Route i e messages in a host PE s Received Message List can be used to fulfill the Message Status Requirement 59 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 2 3 1 2 Host Processing Element Once all of the preconditions for a Module have been satisfied 1t then waits its specified Delay
310. o the next PE on the ring with a request An exception to this rule is the Semaphore type instruction which does not force the PE to give up the TD because it always takes zero time to execute 38 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 2 It has no further requests 3 The current Module is interrupted the Transfer Device updates its statistics reporting an interrupted transfer and the interrupting Module does not immediately use the TD A Token Ring TD also has a Token Passing Time attribute It may either be NR No Response a real number or a statistical distribution The Token Passing Time specifies how long it takes to pass the token from one station to the next The default Token Passing Time is NR No Response which disables adding a delay to pass the token NOTE If you specify a Token Passing Time your TD will always be 100 busy When not serving a PE it will be actually passing the token from station to station This looks very good in the animation but can easily double or worse the execution time of a model and cloud the actual data utilization of the TD 2 2 2 8 Slotted Token Ring Protocol A Slotted Token Ring Protocol also views the Transfer Device Connection List as a ring with the last member of the list followed at least in a logical sense by the first member of the list It differs from a Token Ring Protocol by using a Slot Time to control Transfer Device access Every time a new PE is granted a T
311. obal Module Queue is used when a module which may run on more than one PE is ready to become active and all potential host PE s are busy The module will be stored in the Global Module Queue until a host PE becomes available The Global Module Queue Statistics report contains information on the maximum average and standard deviation of the queue size GLOBAL MODULE EUE STATISTICS FROM 0 SECONDS E QUEUE E QUEUE EV MODULE Global Module Queue Statistics 5 5 8 Completed Module Statistics The Completed Module Statistics Report contains statistics for each Module PE combination in the simulation Reports are only printed for Modules which have completed an execution See the snapshot report for more information on Modules in progress at the time of the report Module statistics are reported separately for each Module PE combination because each PE has its own instruction repertoire Instructions having the same name may take a different amount of time or do something entirely different on different PEs To combine Module execution time statistics could therefore be misleading 239 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Each column contains the following information for each Module PE combination Module Name Text up to 40 characters Host PE The name of the host PE on which the Module ran Completed Executions The number of times the Module successfully completed on the
312. odule Module interrupt status If no interrupt status is shown the Module is not currently interrupted An interrupted Module will also be listed as being in the host PE s Interrupt Queue 223 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Global Message List 1 A list of messages in the Global Message List 1f any SNAPS HOT REPORT AT 50 MILLISECONDS OFFICE 1 is IDLE OFFICE 2 is IDLE OFFICE 3 is IDLE CENTRAL OFFICE is BUSY executing instruction PASS M resident module is PASS REQUEST ON 3 it holds transfer device STATE LINK CENTRAL REQUEST PROCESSING 81 is in the pe local queue message ACK 1 48 bits queued STATE OFFICE is IDLE message ACK 3 48 bits queued OFFICE LINK is IDLE td STATE LINK is BUSY assigned to pe CENTRAL OFFICE semaphore OFFICE ER is SET count is semaphore OFFICE ER is SET count is semaphore OFFICE ER is RESET count is module PASS REQUEST ON 3 instruction PASS MESSAGE O iteration 1 of 1 start time 48 464347 MIL host pe CENTRAL OFFICE module CENTRAL RE EST PROCESSING 81 start time 49 047053 MIL host pe RAL OFFICE and is int host pe s pe local queue A Snapshot Report 5 4 Runtime Warning Reports Runtime warnings notify you of error conditions and potential error conditions which o
313. odule will be placed ahead of any other Modules with a lower priority in the queue of Modules waiting for a host Processing Element A Module of higher priority will interrupt a Module of lower priority already executing in a PE only if the Interruptibility Flag of the executing Module is set to YES 2 3 1 3 Module Execution After a Module has acquired a host PE it begins its execution stage A Module executes by sequentially issuing all of the instructions in its Instruction List by name to its host PE Each instruction name in the Instruction List contains a Number of Executions specification The Number of Executions is the number of times to execute an instruction before going on to the next instruction in the Instruction List Note that the name of an 60 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 instruction is the link to the Processing Element An instruction with the name MULT on one PE may require a different number of basic cycles than on another PE An instruction by the same name on a different PE may even have an entirely different instruction type This is transparent to the Module Instructions can be of any degree of complexity A user may specify Fast Fourier Transform as an instruction with an execution time of 200 cycles just as easily as a 2 cycle ADD instruction The timing is of course specified in the Processing Element description Only the names of instructions are given in the Module descriptions During execution an att
314. of each of the specific graphics forms found in NETWORK 3 6 1 Common Graphics Forms Attributes and Controls Name The name is included for informational purposes and is not selectable If you want to change the name of a data structure you must enter a new name in the appropriate Attributes Form Position Select the Position button to change the placement of an icon on the display The icon will move with the cursor until you press the mouse button to anchor the icon in a new location View You may view how changes made in a graphics form will affect the a data structure s appearance on the display by selecting the View button After you are finished viewing the changes click on the Continue button to return control to the current graphics form If the graphical changes made to an icon are unsatisfactory merely cancel from the graphics form and the old graphics attributes will be retained Hide If the Hide flag is set to YES the check box contains a mark the data structure will not be shown on the display The hidden item will still be available for editing through the Define data structure type command To display a hidden icon click again on the Hide check box to set the Hide flag to NO mark is removed from the check box Icon The Icon combo box is used to select the icon used to represent a hardware data structure on the display The list includes a variety of icon names as well as the default icon a hardware data struc
315. of messages a Module may inherit from a predecessor before the simulation program generates a runtime warning The runtime warning notifies you of potential memory wasting conditions The default is 999 TD LAN Move Options The manner in which a TD or LAN is moved on the display when you double click on its icon is dependent on the setting of the TD LAN Move Option The TD LAN may be moved independent of all connected devices with all local PEs SDs i e PE SD only has connection to one TD LAN with all connected PEs SDs or with all connected PEs SDs Gateways Autosave The Autosave value box indicates the number of minutes that will elapse in a NETWORK session before an autosave is invoked When an Autosave occurs NETWORK saves the current model to the file AUTOSAVE NET in the current directory When NETWORK begins execution the default Autosave value is 0 minutes Autosave can be set from 0 no autosave will occur to 9999 minutes 178 Chapter 3 NETWORK Plot File Selections Check boxes exist which allow you to include box is marked YES or exclude a type of data structure from the Simulation Plot File The choices are PE and Gateway TD SD and Semaphore Global Message List This section of the Controls Form permits you to set the characteristics of the Global Message List The List Size box will accept real or integer values Real values are permitted to allow values greater than the maximum integer and will be truncated bec
316. ombinations 999 Maximum Module Messages 999 Global Message List List Size NR X Queue Flag Keep Blocks Separate Lose Overflow Messages lole e m 3 S al TDZLAN Move Options Name Offset TD LAN Only X horizontal 25 C TD LAN and Local PEs SDs Y Vertical 25 C TD LAN and All Connected PEs SDs Line Spacing 20 C TD LAN and All Connected PEs SDs Gateways The Controls Form 3 2 4 Model Verification Before attempting to run a simulation you should verify the model to ensure that it has no errors To verify the entire model select the Verify ALL command on the menubar If errors are found they can be corrected prior to running a simulation 86 Chapter 3 NETWORK NETWORK II 5 gt x y aa aA NET2 I VETY Progress Report ia aes Checked Errors Warnings 14 0 0 TOP LEVEL 86 0 PE GATEWAY 31 10 MODULE A Ml 0 0 20 0 0 TRANSFER DEVICE LAN 0 0 0 STORAGE DEVICE 90 0 0 ROUTE 0 0 IMIX DMIX MACRO mB 0 19 260 0 10 Totals NETWORK II 5 Dp NET10 The Verify Progress Report During the model verification process a Verify Progress Report is displayed When the verification process is complete two buttons REPORT and DONE are displayed at the bottom of the form If verify errors are found click the REPORT button to view a description of the errors You can then save this description to a file to use as a reference later Sele
317. on Report File The default listing provides a copy of the internal model database to be used in the simulation with all default and omitted values filled in See Chapter 3 for further information Do you want a report in the listing file showing the input file complete with all assumed default values Y N ABORT gt y TEXTWORK conducts Pass Two Error Check 200 Chapter 4 Running a Simulation After building the internal model database TEXTWORK conducts the pass two error check Pass Two identifies model logic errors e g a module with an allowed PE that does not exist If an error is encountered the resulting error message will be written to the simulation Report File TEXTWORK terminates execution when a pass two error is encountered If a pass two error occurs load the model into NETWORK verify the model and correct the identified errors ERRORS found by PASS TWO in the input file to the listing file for error messages Simulation stopped When the model has been successfully loaded by TEXTWORK the following message is displayed NO FATAL INPUT ERRORS HAVE BEEN DETECTED A 4 3 3 Entering TEXTWORK Run Parameters TEXTWORK Run Parameters Time Units You will be requested for the time units to be used for all the time based simulation run parameters Run Length Reset Time Plot Start Time Plot Stop Time Trace Start Time Trace Stop Time Your choices for time units are
318. on beside the Instruction List to add instruction names to this PE The next form displayed will have a list of those instructions found in the Modules which will execute on this PE and which have not yet been added to the PE The first time this list appears for PE 1 you should see a list of 17 names Select one of these names from the list and OK the form to add the instruction to PE 1 You will then be asked to select an instruction type for the instruction Use the complete listing of the model found in the Network Description File found later in this chapter to select the type and attributes for the instructions in this model Once the instruction has been added to the PE instruction list select the name and then Edit to complete the instruction definition For example when you add the instruction GET RADAR DATA to PE 1 select READ as the instruction type When you then Edit this instruction the Read Instruction Form will be displayed in which the instruction attributes can be added by using the model listing as a guide 290 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation KE TWeCGHK 11 5 Ce O o TT TT E Pract iiig Element z Ce A B E a A E Defining a Read Instruction 8 4 RUNNING THE SIMULATION To start the simulation click on Analysis Simulation from the menubar The results presented here are from a simulation that was run for 1 second of simulated time An example of NETWORK s Run Parameter
319. or Module The first instruction is a Semaphore Instruction which will be used to time the execution of the navigation function The second instruction is a Processing Instruction which will emulate the processing to be performed by FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT To add these instructions to the Module click on the Add button next to the Instruction List A form will then be presented where you may enter a new instruction name or select from the list of those instructions already found in the instruction lists of the PEs on which this particular Module will run Enter the new name SET TIME FLIGHT STRING and then repeat the process to enter the instruction name FLIGHT CONTROL SUPPORT It is important to note that whenever a Module is to execute an instruction the instruction name must appear in the instruction list of the Module as well as the instruction list of the PE on which the Module will run This is because the details of how to perform an instruction are defined with the Processing Element When to call an instruction is defined in a Module This structure allows the same Module to execute an instruction of the same name that behaves differently on different PEs Thus a Module named MODULE 1 which runs on the PEs PE A and PE B and executes the instruction INS 1 can execute a Message Instruction on PE A and a Semaphore Instruction on PE B if INS 1 is defined as a Message Instruction on PE A and as a Semaphore Instruction on PE B The two instructio
320. or the duration of the simulation 7 Module Concurrent Limit exceeded WARNING At 000150000 SEC Module MOD 1 19 has failed the iteration concurrent execution test This is probably the most common runtime warning Prior to scheduling a new copy of a Module the NETWORK checks the number of active Module copies currently in the simulation total executing queued If the number exceeds the Concurrent Limit a runtime warning is generated and the proposed iteration is cancelled The concurrent limit can be set in the Module s Control form The default concurrent limit is 1 The Module s iteration mechanism will continue and another check will be made at the next Module iteration This runtime warning only applies to Modules with an Iteration Period defined 8 Module Message Concurrent Limit exceeded WARNING At 014578025 SEC module MOD 1 4 has failed the message concurrent limit test Prior to scheduling a Module with Message Requirements and no Iteration Period the NETWORK checks the number of active Module copies currently in the simulation total executing queued If the number exceeds the Concurrent Limit of the Module a runtime warning is generated and the proposed Module is cancelled The messages which triggered the Module will be consumed by the cancelled Module 9 Successor Module Concurrent Limit exceeded WARNING At 240550000 SEC module MOD 3 3 has failed the succe
321. ormat which can be directly used by NETWORK External network traffic can is represented by messages External Traffic can include traffic from multiple sources being sent over multiple segments Within the simulation external traffic is similar to the internal traffic External traffic queues for PE in the same manner as internal traffic External traffic packets will also be transferred over the TD or LAN as specified in the External Traffic File External traffic may be mixed with internal traffic within the model This is useful for both baseline and what if scenarios 10 1 2 Starting TRAFLINK The TRAFLINK program is invoked in NETWORK IL5 using the File Import menu option There are four further choices under the import option i External Traffic 11 Cabletron Spectrum Topology iii HP OpenView Topology iv IBM NetView 6000 Topology 332 Chapter 10 TRAFLINK III Importing Network Topology TRAFLINK starts with a network topology file file type top which is captured using your Network Management System refer to section 10 4 TRAFLINK is invoked by selecting the appropriate import option based on the NMS software you have When TRAFLINK begins execution the topology file is scanned for PE names and TDs in the network The Import Form is displayed showing the TDs found in the network topology file This form allows you to filter the number of PEs and TDs which are imported into the NETWORK II 5 model TRAFL
322. ors or warnings were found in the model select the Report button to view the verification report If no verify errors were found you may select the Done button to remove the Verify Progress Report Errors should always be removed from a model before running a simulation Warnings are produced in a verify report to note conditions 111 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual in the model which do not have to be changed before running a simulation Warnings serve to alert you of these conditions which you may have overlooked such as a Module having only a Start Time defined which means that it will only execute once during a simulation Notepad NETGEN TVF bd EA File Edit Search Help paci NETWORK II 5 RELEASE 11 03 1272171995 16 32 26 START OF VERIFY REPORT NO FATAL GLOBAL FLAGS ERRORS DETECTED STATISTICAL DISTRIBUTION VERIFICATION NO FATAL SDF ERRORS DETECTED PROCESSING ELEMENT VERIFICATION PROCESSING ELEMENT OFFICE 1 PROCESSING INSTRUCTION NO OP xxxxx NOTE This PROCESSING INSTRUCTION is neither called directly by a MODULE nor indirectly in a call to a MACRO INSTRUCTION or INSTRUCTION HIX SEMAPHORE INSTRUCTION SET TIMER SEMAPHORE xxx WARNING This INSTRUCTION references a SEMAPHORE that is not used as a SEMAPHORE STATUS REQUIREMENT by any MODULE A Verify Report The Verify Report lists the status of the model components which have been verified You will be notified of the names and types of the da
323. otocol or different protocols Additional information about the operation of the PE building block will be covered in the Processing Element Details section which appears later in this chapter 2 1 3 Transfer Device Overview Transfer Devices TDs are the links connecting Processing Elements and Storage Devices They are used to move data between two or more Processing Elements or between a Processing Element and a Storage Device They can connect as many of these devices as desired Each Transfer Device has a user defined specification giving the transfer speed transfer overhead and protocol definition Data is moved between Processing Elements over a Transfer Device as the result of a Message Instruction and between a Processing Element and a Storage Device as the result of a Read Write Instruction Transfer Devices automatically organize every file or message transmitted into words and blocks You specify word and block transfer and overhead times for the TD Then at run time NETWORK II 5 computes the amount of time to send the actual amount of data a PE is sending or requesting The TD protocol you select defines the method to resolve contention between Processing Elements for a Transfer Device The TD protocol attribute may be set to model FIFO First Come First Served Collision Token Ring Token Bus FDDI Priority Aloha and others A LAN Local Area Network is a special case of a TD A LAN is a standard TD building block with
324. outers print servers etc TRAFLINK Traffic Parameter Time Units The Time Units parameter specifies the what units of time is used for the delta time field in the captured LAN traffic file The time units may be specified in seconds milliseconds or microseconds Different Time Units may be selected from the drop down combo box at the bottom right hand corner TRAFLINK Traffic Parameter Time in Hours Minutes Seconds The Time in Hours Minutes Seconds check box representing absolute time should be selected a check mark in the box if the LAN Traffic File to be linked does not have a delta time relative time between events but time stamps each event with the elapsed time from the start of the capture time 0 0 0 The seconds column may have arbitrary digits of precision In the LAN Traffic file or a blank may be used as a separator between fields 347 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual The following is a sample Layout Profile File pro this file is not directly modified by you Peces TRAFLINK 111 RELEASE 2 00 FILE SAVED 06 28 1995 15 20 25 TIME FIELD START Li crass OF SERVICE START 0 HOLDING TIME START 0 stzE FIELD START 18 DESTINATIO FIELD START 25 SouRCE FIELD START 38 MESSAGE TEXT START 52 MESSAGE TEXT LENGTH 18 SouRCE TEXT LENGTH 12 DESTINATION TEXT LENGTH 12 TIME TEXT LENGTH 6 OVERHEAD PER MESSAGE 96 TIME IN HOURS MINUTES SECONDS NO TIME UNITS
325. ow a Module to be started by any message which starts with the text string NEW DATA Wild cards in NETWORK II 5 are position dependent Wild cards are indicated by the character The may appear at the beginning the end or both sides of a text string If the is at the beginning of the text the wild card will match anything that ends in the given text If the is at the end of the text the wild card will match any text that begins with the given text If the is at both the beginning and the end the wild card text will match any text string that contains in whole or in part the wild card text Spaces between the and the adjoining text will be ignored For example NEW DATA Matches Does not match NEW DATA NEWDATA MORE NEW DATA OLD DATA SOMENEW DATA NEW DATA COLLECTED NEW DATA Matches Does not match NEW DATA NEWDATA NEW DATA FOUND OLD DATA NEW DATAHERE COLLECTED NEW DATA 69 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NEW DATA Matches Does not match NEW DATA NEWDATA MORE NEW DATA OLD DATA SOMENEW DATAHERE NEW COLLECTED DATA 2 3 8 Statistical Distributions Many applications require choosing a value at run time from a user specified statistical distribution Most NETWORK II 5 specifications will accept either a number or the name of a Statistical Distribution Function SDF NETWORK will indicate this option by offer
326. ow it is connected to other devices There are three layout algorithms to choose from The Software Module diagram shows for each Module its preconditions host Processing Element instructions message Semaphore and File outputs and successor Modules The tabular reports show statistics on the operation of each hardware device Module or Semaphore in the simulation Average maximum minimum and standard deviation values are reported for execution delay and queue sizes as appropriate The Narrative Trace produces an optional step by step trace of the execution of the simulation showing for example when an Instruction begins execution completes execution is interrupted and so on The interactive reports may be printed at your terminal while the simulation is progressing The Snapshot Report shows the current status of all elements both Chapter 1 Introduction hardware and software in the simulation The Snapshot Report may be printed periodically or interspersed with the Narrative Trace 1 5 USER MANUAL ORGANIZATION The organization of this manual is based on the parts of the NETWORK II 5 package The parts are presented in the order in which they would be first encountered during a typical NETWORK II 5 session Chapter 1 An overview and brief introduction to the NETWORK II 5 system Chapter 2 How NETWORK IL5 interprets the world to be modeled Chapter 3 Using the graphic user interface to develop and verify a system
327. phore Report contains the following information Semaphore Name Text up to 40 characters Number of Times Set The number of times that the semaphore s status was SET by a Semaphore Instruction Number of Times Reset The number of times that the semaphore s status was RESET by a Semaphore Instruction Per Cent of Time Set The amount of time that the semaphore s status was SET divided by the length of the simulation Number of Responses A response is the time interval between SETting and RESETting a semaphore If a semaphore is SET a second time before it is RESET the first RESET will be paired with the first SET to make up one response The second RESET will be paired with the second SET to make up the second response The following display illustrates how responses are calculated S time semaphore is SET R time semaphore is RESET Semaphore 1 S S k k gt TIME 0 1 2 3 4 5 Two responses occur for Semaphore 1 The first is from time 1 to time 3 The second is from time 2 to time 5 The average response time of Semaphore 1 is 2 3 2 2 5 If the Inhibit Response Time Flag for this Semaphore is set to YES response time statistics are not collected 242 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File SEMAPHORE STATISTICS FROM 0 TO 50 MILLISECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS
328. preconditions The failed Module still takes the messages that met its Message Requirements from its potential host PE s Received Message List For a Module with predecessor Modules the test is made when any predecessor chains to this Module The Concurrent Limit value can be helpful in debugging when Module executions should not overlap If the system simulated cannot keep up with the workload warning messages regarding too many copies of the same Module will be produced 62 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 2 3 1 4 Module Completion After all of the instructions in a Module have executed the Module is marked as completed and any successor Modules are automatically considered for activation Successor Modules will queue for the same PE as their predecessor A Module may be defined to select one of a list of Modules as a successor upon completion The potential successor Modules are referred to as Statistical Successors or Anded Successors The Module that has successors defined in its successor list is called a predecessor Module Each statistical successor Module has an associated probability of selection For example CHOOSI CHOOSI AS SUCCESSOR 30 0 AS SUCCESSOR 70 0 o 6 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 0 0 EJ Ed At each completion of the predecessor Module one of the successors is selected according to the specified probabilities using a uniform distribution You may specify a random number s
329. pt to use the TD LAN when the TD LAN is in an unsettled state The collision episode count is incremented at the start of the episode and thus includes any episode that was in progress at the time of the report Collided Transfers The total number of times that a PE request resulted in a collision Each PE involved in a collision counts as one collided transfer For example if two PEs are involved in a collision the collided transfers count is incremented by two If there are five PEs in the collision the collided transfers count is increased by five Average Maximum To Resolve These statistics are derived from the number of retries required to resolve collisions Number which reached Retry Limit This is the number of times that a PE attempting the same collided transfer reached the TD LAN s Retry Limit while attempting to gain access to the TD LAN Transfer Device Deferrals The total number of times a PE was ready to use the TD but did not because the TD was busy The deferral period starts when the PE detects the TD is busy and ends when the current user stops transmitting There may be many deferrals for every successful transfer When the TD becomes available every PE that was waiting stops deferring and waits its contention interval If the TD is busy when a PE s contention interval ends the PE begins 233 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual a new deferral This value will always be zero for an Aloha protocol TD because PEs using an
330. r current selections gt p Do you want to add another report Y N ABORT gt on l want P TD s MD for choices LIST for current selections for choices LIST for current selections Storage Device Instruction Execution Message Statistics Received Messag S I M R D n Y N ABORT m Module M Semaphore All SE E TEXTWORK Run Parameters Plot Data File The simulation Plot File file type PIN is a binary file which is used by the NETWORK post simulation processing functions It records simulation events as they occur For long simulations this file may grow quite large Therefore you may specify a plot file for only a portion of the simulation or you may choose to have no Plot File created during the simulation 204 Chapter 4 Running a Simulation Should the plot data file cover All Part or None of the simulation A P N gt P gt 100 When do you want the plot file to stop IN SECONDS gt 900 l When do you want the plot file to start IN SECONDS If All or None is entered in reply to the first question the Plot Start Time and Plot Stop Time are not requested because the plot interval will be the entire simulation All or no plot is being generated None The Plot Start Time and Plot Stop Time determine the plot interval The Plot Start Time must be greater than or equ
331. r the name of a SDF in the text box select the double dots button next to the text box and choose a name from the list of current SDFs File List To edit the Storage Device s File List click on the Edit Files button The File List Form will then be displayed with a list of all Files currently resident on the SD Use the Add Cut and Move buttons to add Files cut them from the list or change their list positions To edit a File s parameters highlight its name in the list and select the Edit button to display the File Form A count is displayed on the SD Form of the current number of Files in the File List 3 5 7 File Form Number of Bits The number of bits must be specified as a real number 151 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual File Count An integer only or NR may be entered for the File Count Read Only Flag A file will be marked as read only when this check box is selected NETWORK II 5 I Storage Device Name mem o J gt Pe includ I File List Time Unit Capacity d Bits Per DATA pacrur a i Name COMM DATA Number of Bits 2 4Eh2 File Count NR Read Only Flag Read E Read o Read s Access Delay fo wi Jj wie fo mie The File Form 152 Chapter 3 NETWORK 3 5 8 Route Form Routes define the order in which a message will be passed through a network The Route Form is used to construct a path for messages NETWORK
332. re requesting the Transfer Device The Retry Interval must be a statistical distribution function to avoid infinite loops The Contention Interval Jam Time and the Collision Window may be either statistical distributions or real numbers Care must be taken in selecting the Retry Interval and Contention Interval to be used If the Retry Interval or the Contention Interval return delay times for the two contending PEs that are within the Collision Window of a Transfer Device another collision will occur Infinite loops of collisions are possible If a Key Linear type statistical distribution function is used for the Retry Interval Jam Time and or the Contention Interval of a collision Transfer Device the additional entry of key values is required for every PE in the Transfer Device Connection List These key values will be used as the x value in the Key Linear distribution s calculation This value is a real number greater than or equal to zero and unique within the Transfer Device Connection List in which it appears Key values are only required for Transfer Device connections that are Processing Elements and are superfluous for other Transfer Device connections NETWORK II 5 supports the IEEE 802 3 standard Truncated Binary Exponential Backoff algorithm It may be used for the Retry Interval only by selecting the Standard Retry Interval option In brief this algorithm uses the number of collisions to determine the length of time to wait
333. reater than less than or equal to a particular integer value See Section 2 2 1 6 Semaphore Instructions for an explanation of Semaphore counts A Chain If message precondition allows you to select a Module successor based on the presence or absence of a particular message in the received message list of a specific Processing Element System state preconditions are Wait For Semaphore Status Requirement Wait For File Status Requirement Wait For Message Status Requirement and Hardware Status Requirement After a Module has passed all of its time based awaited and checked preconditions it then begins to check its system state conditions When checking the system state conditions a Module behaves as an impartial observer The Module will remain in an observer state until every system state precondition is simultaneously true When this happens the Module then removes any messages it requires from the Received Message List of the host PE and moves to the next state where it waits its Delay if any and then queues for its host Processing Element Wait For Semaphore Status Requirement preconditions allow a Module to require that one or more Semaphores have a specific setting SET or RESET or a count greater than less than or equal to an integer Wait For File Status Requirement preconditions allow a Module to require that a given file exist or not exist on a given Storage Device or any Storage Device A Wait For File Status may also be b
334. rm which is described in section 3 5 17 Selection of any of the Define Menu options other than Controls Destination Mix Echo PE List Gateway Instruction Mix LAN Macro Instruction Message Module Processing Element Route Storage Device Statistical Distribution Function Semaphore and Transfer Device will display the Define Form which has a name list containing the names of the current data structures for the type selected To the right of the name list is a group of buttons that will let you edit data structures and perform other tasks 102 Chapter 3 NETWORK The Add button is always selectable from the Define Form and is used to introduce new data structures to your models When the Add button is selected you will be prompted for anew name If a valid name is entered a new data structure is created and its name is then placed at the bottom of the name list in the Define Form The Cut button is used to remove data structures from a model The Cut button is only selectable when one or more names have been highlighted in the name list When entities are removed with the Cut button their names are removed from the name list If a PE Gateway SD TD or LAN is cut in this way its icon will also be removed from the display The Uncut button will restore cut data structures If any data structures of the type selected in the Define menu have been cut during your current NETWORK session unless you select File New the Uncut button wi
335. rol button usually OK CANCEL or RETURN to exit When a dialog box is displayed all other fields outside the dialog box are nonselectable This includes the menubar the palette display icons and all other underlying dialog 79 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual boxes Dialog boxes may be displayed on top of other dialog boxes in which case the most recently displayed dialog box is active Scrolling List Boxes List Boxes display a list of text items usually names or numeric values Moving through the list box is accomplished by using the scrollbar on the right hand side of the list box The list boxes provide the means for selecting an item from a list and in some cases performing additional operations on the item selected There are several ways to add an item to a list box depending upon the form containing the list box An ADD button may appear next to the list box for this purpose Click on the ADD button enter the new name in the resulting dialog box and click on OK The new entry will then be added to the list box A text box by which a new list entry may be added may also appear above a list box Click on the text box add a new list item and press the Enter Return key The new item will then be added to the list Entries in the list box may be selected by clicking on the appropriate line of the list which will highlight the line In most cases selecting a list item will activate buttons associated with the list such as the E
336. rotocol This is the simplest protocol and is therefore the default In this protocol requests are served in the order in which they are made Once a PE is allocated a Transfer Device it may use it once regardless of how long that takes No other PE may interrupt the current user of a Transfer Device However if the Module executing on the PE which is using Transfer Device is interrupted the Transfer Device is released and the TD updates its statistics reporting an interrupted transfer 2 2 2 5 Collision Protocol The Collision Protocol does not use a central controller to arbitrate among contending Transfer Device users Instead each PE is responsible for checking the Transfer Device to see if it is busy before using it If the Transfer Device is busy each PE will wait until the requested device is idle and then wait an additional amount of time the Contention Interval before attempting to access the TD A collision occurs if two or more PE s see a TD as idle and both try to use it A TD is vulnerable to a collision for a period of time the Collision Window after a new user takes the TD This value accounts for propagation delays and delays between checking a TD status and actually beginning to transmit In the event of a collision all users must abort their current transmission and retry later the Retry Interval In addition to all of the standard TD attributes listed in Section 2 2 2 2 Transfer Device Attributes a collision
337. rresponding instruction name does not yet exist in the PE Instruction List After you have chosen a name you will be asked to select the instruction type for the new instruction either read write message semaphore or processing from the Instruction Types Form If you cancel from the Instruction Types Form the new instruction is discarded When a new instruction is given a type it will be entered in the Instruction List of the PE 124 Chapter 3 NETWORK To complete the definition of a new instruction or to examine or change the attributes of any PE instruction highlight the name in the Instruction List and then select the Edit button The attributes form for the selected instruction will then be displayed NETWORK II 5 gt Processing Element A Name OFFICE 1 Quantity fi Time Units MICROSECONDS Cycle Time Time Slice Instruction Types Interrupt Ove 1 0 Setup Tu Message List al PROCESSING READ SEND REQU NO OP SET TIMER RESET TIME lol tan La bom e mi The Instruction Types Form To delete an instruction from the PE Instruction List highlight the name in the list and select the Cut button Cut instructions can be restored to a PE Instruction List by selecting the Uncut button and then selecting names from the list of cut instructions The Cut button will be selectable if instructions have been cut from the PE in the current NETWORK session 3 5 2 1 Instruction
338. runtime warning will be issued 2 3 NETWORK SOFTWARE COMPONENTS The software components of a system are characterized in NETWORK II 5 as Modules Instruction Mixes Macro Instructions and Files The role and use of each is described below 2 3 1 Modules A Module is the specification of a task to be performed by a Processing Element The Module description consists of four parts 1 Scheduling conditions 2 Host Processing Element options 3 A list of instructions to execute 4 A list of Module s to execute when this Module completes Each of these parts maps into a stage that every Module goes through in its life The stages in a Module s life are 1 Checking preconditions 2 Requesting a host PE 3 Executing instructions 4 Choosing successors When a Module checks its preconditions it is really checking to see if the user defined scheduling criteria are met When they are the Module then queues up for a host PE e the Processing Element on which it will run After obtaining a host PE a Module begins executing by issuing instruction names from its Instruction List to its host Processing Element for execution After a Module has issued the last instruction in its Instruction 54 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 List it then chooses its successor Modules if any were specified Each of these four stages will be described in turn below 2 3 1 1 Module Preconditions There are a variety different condition
339. s Processing Elements may use five types of instructions processing message read write and semaphore The attribute forms for each type are described next 3 5 2 1 1 Message Instruction Form 125 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Length The message length may be an integer number or may be chosen from a SDF To use a SDF either enter the name of a SDF in the text box or click on the double dots button next to the text box 126 Chapter 3 NETWORK NETWORK II 5 gt Processing Element Ne Orrin 4 o gt ane mas AAA C T l l k Name SEND_MSG1 Length 2400 BITS Message Text MSGFROMGROUP1 o ES Message Count INRO Ea Destination CT E Echo PE List mooo EN E Resume Flag Allowed TD LAN y X Queue Flag l Continue Message I Inhibit Msg Delivery Inhibit Msg to Self lololalalmis lem S ul The Message Instruction Form Message Text The message text may be up to 40 characters long If the value NR is selected the message text will default to the message name in the simulation To choose from a list of current messages in the model click on the Message Text double dots button Message Count The Message Count can be an integer value or the name of a Statistical Distribution Function Select the Message Count double dots button to choose a current SDF name Destination You may enter the message destination directly or choose from the list of available destinations by clicking
340. s life The stages in a Module s life are 1 Checking preconditions 2 Requesting a host PE 3 Executing instructions 4 Choosing successors When a Module checks its preconditions it is really checking to see if the user defined scheduling criteria are met When they are the Module then queues up for a host PE 1 e the processor on which it will run After obtaining a host PE a Module begins executing by issuing instruction names from its Instruction List to its host Processing Element one at atime The PE executes the instruction it was given and then asks its host Module for another After a Module has issued the last instruction in its Instruction List it frees its host PE The Module then chooses its successor Modules if any were specified Additional information about the operation of the Module building block will be covered in the Module Details section which appears later in this chapter 2 1 6 Overview Summary This overview section covered the major NETWORK II 5 building blocks at a fairly high level It is now time to present the details A description of a computer system may be developed beginning with either the hardware or the software We will start with the hardware because it is perhaps the easier task The software description will then follow 15 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 2 2 NETWORK HARDWARE COMPONENTS Hardware components consist of Processing Elements Transfer Devices Storage Devices Route
341. s The Analysis Display Modules command will create text diagrams of the Modules in your model Four diagram options are available Display All Display by Message Display by Semaphore and Display by Name Display All will generate a diagram of all Modules currently in your model Display by Message will present a list of all current messages from which you may select a name The Module diagram created will show all Modules that may transmit the selected message and all Modules that have this message as a Message Status Requirement as well as all successors to the second group of Modules Display by Semaphore will present a list of all Semaphores in the model from which you may select a name The module diagram created will show all Modules that affect the status or count of the selected Semaphore and all Modules that have a Semaphore Status Requirement using this Semaphore as well as all successors to the second group of Modules Display by Name presents a list of all Module names from which you may pick a name to create a diagram of that Module only Each of the four choices will provide a diagram of one or more Modules The diagram includes the Module s attributes and a chaining schematic See the chart below for more 114 Chapter 3 NETWORK information on the contents of the Module diagram The Module diagram will be presented in an editor which will allow you to scroll through the diagram or save it to a file CHAIN IF REQUIREME
342. s Echo PE Lists LANs Gateways and Destination Mixes Each is described in turn below 2 2 1 Processing Element Details As mentioned in the Processing Element Overview section a Processing Element abbreviated PE is used to model a hardware device which is not merely a data source or sink A PE might be used to simulate a bus controller a display a sensor or an entire arithmetic logic unit A Processing Element is characterized by its Quantity Instruction Repertoire Message List Size I O Setup Time Basic Cycle Time Time Slice Interrupt Overhead and Input Controller This section will cover the details of these characterizations The Quantity of a PE will determine if a single PE is defined Quantity 1 or if a number of identical PEs are defined Quantity is greater than 1 If you select a number greater than 1 for a PE Quantity NETWORK II 5 will recognize that number of separate but identical PEs NETWORK will allow you to clone a PE but once clones are created they are unrelated to the parent PE If you edit a PE in NETWORK with a Quantity greater than 1 you are essentially editing the entire group at one time This cannot be done if a group of cloned PEs is created Each PE must be edited individually if all are to have the same changes The Basic Cycle Time of a PE is the basic time unit on which all of the processing instructions of a PE are built its purpose is to give the user one knob which can be turned to spee
343. s Form is shown with the desired run parameters The simulation Report File file type LIS produced by this run which contains all of the output reports is shown at the end of this chapter The Network Description file file type NET used to generate this simulation follows the Report File Defining the Simulation Run Parameters 291 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Select Analysis Browse Reports to look at the results of a simulation Also try Analysis Animation and Analysis Plot to see animation and plots of this simulation The simulation reports show that every module in the system executed the expected number of times No serious conflicts were reported This is the expected result because the system is very lightly loaded PE 2 is the busiest device but none of the devices experienced utilization greater than 35 FE 1 ae E am oS ARPA Ma a ps AA A TA alan ca RAMA OTH vo II ATTE TEE ETE ss TINE THE HOG BUFFER STRING AAN AAA seu TIME THE DATA STRING a MTI E j lite ir a SEEME i incomes of L l 1 0 Mal Econ plions A Status Plot The status plot shows when different devices were busy and how busy they were The status plot for a semaphore shows the semaphore state SET as busy and RESET as idle The semaphore count is plotted as a separate type of plot 292 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation KE TWeOHK 11 5 HEH 1 4 5 5 I from B to 1 8 LWS A Utilization Plot The
344. s PE If you specify an EPL for a message instruction a PE can tag a message with a different PE s name When an EPL is specified the selection of which PE s name to use is based on the incoming TD s name 48 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK II 5 MY GATEWAY A Sample Model of a Gateway 49 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual HARDWARE TYPE ECHO PE LIST NAME GATEWAY CLUSTER LIST ETHERNET ECHO PE G1 GATEWAY D TOKEN RING ECHO PE G2 GATEWAY D TOKEN BUS ECHO PE G3 GATEWAY HARDWARE TYPE PROCESSING NAME G1 GATI INSTRUCTION REPERTOIRE INSTRUCTION TYPE MESSAGE NAME RETRANSMIT ANYTHING Gl WAY MESSAGE DESTINATION PROCESSOR NEX ECHO PE LIST GATEWAY CLUSTER LIST NAME G2 GATEWAY INSTRUCTION REPERTOIRE INSTRUCTION TYPE MESSAGE NAME RETRANSMIT ANYTHING E ESSAGE DESTINATION PROCESSOR NEX ECHO PE LIST GATEWAY CLUSTER LIST NAME G3 GATEWAY INSTRUCTION REPERTOIRE INSTRUCTION TYPE MESSAGE NAME RETRANSMIT ANYTHING MESSAGE DESTINATION PROCESSOR N ECHO PE LIST GATEWAY CLUSTER LIST Gl
345. s in its Instruction List by name to the PE in the order in which they appear The PE is then responsible for examining its Instruction Repertoire to find an instruction definition by that name The PE s instruction definition contains all of the information describing the instruction s type and characteristics Thus a Module executing an instruction on one PE for example a general purpose processor might require a long execution time whereas another special purpose PE may execute the same instruction very quickly 17 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 supports a priority interrupt scheme Modules have a priority associated with them If a Module having a higher priority than a PE s current Module becomes available to execute a PE will interrupt its current Module to work on the higher priority Module You may disable priority based interrupts of a Module by setting its Interruptibility Flag to NO When a Module executing a Processing Instruction is interrupted the remaining execution time of the instruction is recorded When the instruction execution is resumed 1t will occupy the PE for that remaining length of time unless interrupted again Message and Read Write Instructions if interrupted are either resumed or restarted from their beginning based on a user defined attribute of the instruction called the Resume Flag If a Module is interrupted during a Semaphore Instruction the instruction will be completed and the Module
346. s is set to 999 This means that if a Module is given more than 999 messages by its predecessor a warning message will be issued and only the first 999 will be taken If you would like to catch this condition sooner you could set the Maximum Module Messages to a lower value Statistical Options Antithetic Variate Randomizer Minimize Random Seed Array These options are described in detail in Section 2 3 8 Statistical Distributions Miscellaneous Options Autosave Full Verify Batch Run Simulation NETWORK has the ability to automatically save your work at fixed time intervals If Autosave is set to N a positive non zero integer your work will be automatically saved every N minutes The default Autosave is zero which turns off the Autosave feature The Full Verify flag can provide more information when running a NETWORK Verify The standard Verify only reports errors or warnings with a high likelihood of being an error If Full Verify YES less significant warnings and notes will be included in the Verify report The additional messages may help you track down a problem but are generally not presented because they are often warnings and notes about situations that will not preclude running the simulation The default is Full Verify NO The Batch Run Simulation flag is useful for those systems on which you can build a script to execute a NETWORK II 5 simulation as a batch job If Batch Run Simulation YES interactive prompts for a s
347. s it could be inserted in a Module s Instruction List To limit infinite loops a limit of 10 levels of recursion for Instruction Mixes has been built into NETWORK II 5 A Module attempting to run an Instruction Mix that reaches the 10 level limit will stop executing and is considered completed A runtime warning will be issued when this occurs 2 3 3 Macro Instructions Macro Instructions are collections of instructions which are referenced by a single name A Macro Instruction can be thought of as an Instruction List that is not tied to any specific Module Macro Instructions allow recursion they can be made up of actual PE instructions Instruction Mixes or other Macro Instructions To prevent infinite loops if 64 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 for example a Macro Instruction directly or indirectly referenced itself a limit of 10 levels of recursion for Macro Instructions has been built into NETWORK II 5 A Module attempting to run a Macro Instruction after 10 levels will stop execution and then is marked as complete at which point a runtime warning will be issued The user is cautioned that the use of Macro Instructions can be very deceptive It is quite possible to have a Module with only a single instruction that is a Macro Instruction that expands into literally hundreds of instructions to execute Take for example a Module that has a Macro Instruction which is made up of 10 instructions which are really Macro Instru
348. s lost by the Transfer Device Transmission error lost transfers can occur on a Transfer Device with a non zero block error probability Queue Flag lost transfers result if the Queue Flag NO in a Message Instruction and a copy of the message being sent is already present at the destination PE Buffer overflow lost transfers can result when messages are sent to a PE with a full received message list and Lose Overflow Messages YES There is no distinction made between messages and blocks by this statistic Each time a message or block is lost the count is incremented Throughput Two statistics related to throughput are provided in the Transfer Device report Data Bits Per Second is the number of bits transmitted on this Transfer Device per second in the course of the simulation Although this value is related to the speed of a Transfer Device a slower TD may have a higher throughput than a faster TD if more bits are sent on the slower TD Transfers Per Second is the number of transmissions per second conducted by this Transfer Device in the course of the simulation Percent Utilization The percentage of time that the TD s status was either unsettled or busy 5 5 6 Storage Device Utilization Statistics The Storage Device Utilization Statistics Report contains the following information Storage Device Name Text up to 40 characters Number of Storage Requests Granted The number of read write requests granted by this Storage Device to Proces
349. s used for the slot time parameter the TD connection key values are used as x in an Ax B calculation To enter a key value click on the key number next to the appropriate connection and enter a new value Priority TD Connection Key Values In a priority TD the key values are used to assign the PE priority To enter a key value click on the key number next to the appropriate connection and enter a new value 142 Chapter 3 NETWORK Priority Token Ring Token Passing Time These parameters may be a real number or may be chosen from a SDF To use a SDF either enter the name of a SDF in the text box or click on the double dots button next to the text box The following attributes of a Priority Token Ring TD are found in the TD Connection Menu which is accessed by selecting a name from the TD Connection List and then selecting the Edit button Synchronous Allocation Target Token Rotation Times These parameters must be specified as real numbers Minimum Synchronous Priority Priority These parameters must be specified as integer numbers Set All Connections If this flag is selected the synchronous allocation minimum synchronous priority priority and target rotation time parameters will be used for all TD connections Block Overhe Priority List Priority Target Token Rotation Time Min Bits ose DO TTR Time CENTRAL E Transfer Device F ass Priority Token Ring T
350. s which may be used to schedule a Module Every Module must have at least one of these conditions so that NETWORK II 5 knows when to run the Module Sophisticated combinations of these preconditions for the same Module permit modeling real world scheduling criteria The different Module preconditions fall into four basic categories 1 Time based 2 Awaited 3 Checked once 4 System state Each category will be described separately Time based preconditions are the Module s Start Time Stop Time and Iteration Period Start Time Stop Time and Iteration Period may be either real numbers or the name of a statistical distribution If the specified Iteration Period is a Statistical distribution a new pick from the distribution will be made each time the Module is scheduled to activate The action that occurs at the start and iteration times is called a scheduling because the Module may not immediately begin execution due to host PE availability or to other preconditions which must still be satisfied Start Time and Iteration Period may be specified either alone or in combination for the same Module Because they interact three cases are possible 1 Only the Start Time is specified the Module will be scheduled to execute only once at the given time 2 Both the Start Time is specified and the Iteration Period is also specified the Module will be first scheduled for the given Start Time Thereafter the Module will schedule the
351. s with the Add button If you add an SDF name as an attribute of a hardware or software entity the SDF will be automatically created and presented in the list of names following Define SDF Click directly on the name of an SDF and select Edit to define the attributes of the SDFs in the SDF form In the example model only one SDF is present SEEK TIME Each SDF must be given a type within the SDF Form by clicking on the SDF TYPE button and selecting from the available SDF types SEEK TIME is defined as a uniform distribution After selecting the SDF type click on the Attributes button to display the SDF Attributes form to provide values for the SDF attributes In the case of SEEK TIME two attributes will be supplied the Lower Bound will be set to 200 and the Upper Bound will be set to 1200 289 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual KE TWeCGHEK 11 5 ACFE Defining a Statistical Distribution Function 8 3 8 Adding PE Instructions After instruction names have been included in the instruction lists of Modules they must then be defined within Processing Elements on which the Modules will execute You can either fill out the Module instruction list first as was done above or define an instruction on a PE and add it to the Module list later To complete the definition of the instructions in the example double click on a PE to get to its form Start with the PE named PE 1 From within the PE form select the Add butt
352. sage is produced by NETWORK the entry 2 0 is written to the plot file to inform the animation of the trace message time The entry 3 0 in the plot file denotes the end of the simulation A common trick to add more information on Modules to the plot file is to set a Semaphore when a Module starts and reset it as soon as the Module completes 360 Appendix A Unix Implementation Notes APPENDIX A SPECIAL NOTES ON UNIX INTRODUCTION NETWORK II 5 is available on the Sun 4 Sun SPARCstation HP 9000 700 IBM RISC 6000 and Silicon Graphics UNIX workstations Requirements vary among the platforms However to run UNIX NETWORK II 5 your workstation should have 16MB or more of primary memory and 20MB hard disk space available NETWORK IL 5 s graphical programs run under Open Windows on Sun platforms Motif on the HP 9000 700 and RISC 6000 and Xwindows on all others Do not try to invoke the graphics programs unless you are in a Open Windows Motif Xwindows session If you do not have the necessary hardware and software you can still run a simulation using TEXTWORK the text based simulation program OPERATION There are two primary differences between what is described in this manual and the UNIX environment First under UNIX all file names and types are in lower case Also to start a program switch to the directory where your model is located and type the program name You may also specify a file name on the command line For example
353. seconds milliseconds microseconds and nanoseconds Enter the time unit which you wish to use for input rt must be SECONDS MILLISECONDS OR MICROSECONDS SEC MIL MIC NAN l gt S TEXTWORK Run Parameters Run Length The Run Length tells TEXTWORK how long to run the simulation The Run Length parameter is specified in simulated time not actual time Large numbers may be entered in scientific notation e g 56 000 could be entered 5 6E4 Enter length of simulation IN SECONDS gt 1000 AAA o Default Run Parameters 201 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual If you do not wish to specify additional run parameters Reset Time Periodic Reports Final Reports Plot Data File LAN Analyzer File and Runtime Warnings before starting the simulation answer NO to the question below The default run parameters will then be used in the simulation Reset Time none Periodic Reports none Final Reports ALL Plot Data File yes Plot Interval entire simulation LAN Analyzer File none Runtime Warnings send to both Listing file and Terminal Do you want to define any additional run parameters Y N ABORT gt on Do you wish to trace the event flow Y N ABORT gt n Simulation begins TEXTWORK Run Parameters Reset Time The statistics collected by TEXTWORK may be reset at some point during the simulation by specifying a Reset Time If a Reset Time is entered the simulation ac
354. sing Elements 236 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File Number of Interrupted Storage Requests The number of times a Module with a pending request for this Storage Device was interrupted before the request was granted STORAGE D E UTILIZATION STATISTICS FROM as IO 1 SECONDS ALL TIME EPORTED IN MICROSECONDS EMORY 1 1 EV D EN STORAGE REQUESTS ILE REQUESTS GRANTED REQUESTS INTERRUPTED AVG FILE DELAY AX FILE DELAY STD DEV DELAY ACCESSES INTERRUPTE AVG INTERRUPT TIM MAX INTERRUPT TIM STD DEV TIME COMPLETED ACCE AVG USAGE TI MAX USAGE TI STD DEV TIME AVG BITS E AX BI USE STD DEV USED D ER CENT UTILIZATION Storage Device Utilization Report Average Maximum Standard Deviation Request Delay The time a PE spent waiting for a request to be fulfilled by this Storage Device The statistics include only requests that have been fulfilled The statistics do not include additional delays a PE might encounter after acquiring this storage device After a PE acquires a Transfer Device to perform a read write it requests to use the Storage Device If the Storage Device has an idle port the PE acquires a port imme
355. splay updates The default delay time is three seconds An animation is displayed either by time or by event Several events may take place at the same time The Step By Time and Step By Event radio buttons allow you to either display multiple events which occur at the same time with a single screen update or show each event updated individually By default the animation is displayed by time 249 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual PF Hoe REQUEST From module PREDIOS 132 sendira messes OFFICE T CEHTFRL FFE is corplelina easton on pa OFFICE Animation with Trace Messages During an animation in which events are displayed by time the animation clock moves forward to the next recorded event time All events which took place at that specific time will be updated together The animation will pause and the animation clock will advance to the next event time During an animation displayed by event the animation moves forward to the next recorded event The single event is then updated on your display The animation will pause momentarily and advance to the next recorded event which may also have occurred at the same time as the last event displayed The Animation start time parameter shows the current setting of the animation clock Initially the animation clock is set to zero If you only want to see a specific portion of an animation enter a new value for the start time parameter The animation clock may never be set to a value l
356. ssa ipata ap DE e vecs beeem Defining Statistical Successors The last function to be added to the model is the self test function Because this is to be modeled as a single Module that may run on several Processing Elements it should be created from the menubar using the Define Module command When the list of Modules is displayed select the Add button and then enter the name of the new Module SELF TEST Click on the name SELF TEST and then select Edit to complete the description for the Module This module will have one Message Requirement STRING COMPLETE which will start the Module on the PE that has just completed a software function Add this Message Requirement Select the Allowed Resident Processors button to add PE 1 and PE 2 as Allowed Processing Elements for this Module 288 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation l Module Hama stur TEST A Comm Tea lr ICRA Cnn ttm ITA e al E A a A q Defining an Allowed Processor List This Module will execute only one instruction SELF TEST which should be added by selecting the Add Instruction List button on the Module Form When this is finished the software functions to be included in the example model will be complete 8 3 7 Adding Statistical Distribution Functions To include Statistical Distribution Functions in a model use the Define Statistical Distribution Function command from the menubar You may then enter new names of SDF
357. ssages satisfying Message Status Requirements will be added to the inherited message set of a Module chain In both cases of a wild card Message Text if the Module has no inherited messages then the Message Status Requirements list of the Module will be used to determine the Message Text A search is made starting at the top of the list until a match with the wild card is found When a match occurs the name of the Message Requirement becomes the Message Text A Message Count can be specified in a Message Instruction as an integer value or a reference to a statistical distribution A Message Count has various uses A Message Count may be included to distinguish messages that have the same Message Text A Module can be given a Message Status Requirement that keys on a message s count as well as its text The Message Count Distribution relies on the Message Count to generate Ax B values in which the Message Count of the original message is substituted for x The length of a Message Instruction is the number of bits to send It may be an integer a reference to a statistical distribution or NR No Response The length of a message is used to compute the amount of time to transfer the message over a Transfer Device A length of NR will set the length of the message sent to the same number of bits as the original message received by the Module A Message Linear Distribution will perform an Ax B calculation for message length
358. ssor concurrent execution test Prior to scheduling a Module with predecessors NETWORK checks the number of active Module copies currently in the simulation total executing queued If the number exceeds the Module s Concurrent Limit a runtime warning is generated and the proposed Module is cancelled 10 Instruction Mix or Macro Instruction exceeded Maximum Recursion Level 321 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual WARNING At 050750090 SEC Module MOD 2 1 instruction INS 1 did not resolve to a PE instruction in 10 levels Module execution aborted If a Module searches through Instruction Mixes and or Macro Instructions 10 times before acquiring an actual instruction to execute an error will be generated It is likely that an infinite loop has been encountered NETWORK will skip the instruction and terminate the Module s execution 11 Module Priority too low to use Priority Token Ring WARNING At 12 367650 SEC pe CONTROLLER executing instruction REQUEST DATA called from module PROCESS DATA requested td BUS with priority 2 which is lower than the lowest this td can serve Request not honored In order to use a Priority Token Ring protocol Transfer Device a Module s Priority must be greater than or equal to the Minimum Synchronous Priority of the PE connection defined for the TD The Module s instruction will be cancelled Message Instruction Runtime Warnings
359. struction select its name in the list and then click on the Count button A form will appear which will allow you to set the instruction count to an integer or to the name of a Statistical Distribution Function 157 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Predecessors The Predecessors combo box is used to select a predecessor type for this Module Click on the down arrow to select either No Predecessors Anded Predecessors or Ored Predecessors If either of the latter two choices are made the Allowed Resident Processors list will be emptied 158 Chapter 3 NETWORK View Outputs Clicking on the View Outputs button at the bottom of the Module Form will display the names of any Files that will be written Messages sent or Semaphores modified as a result of the Module s execution An example is shown below In the example a semaphore named TIME THE FLIGHT STRING is SET and its count is incremented This is indicated by the text S which appears before the Semaphore name Module l Name CHECK MESSAGE BUFFER Time Units MICROSECONDS Module Controls Predecessors No Predecessors a Library Module Outputs S TIME THE FLIGHT STRING M RADAR DATA AVAILABLE SET TIME THE FLIGHT STRING 1 RADAR DATA AVAILABLE 1 Move Lon View Outputs lololalalmis limi ul LE a 2 Statistical Successors The Module Outputs Form Module Controls Select the Module Controls button to access the Module Controls
360. t types are Increment By add the Semaphore Instruction count to the count of the Semaphore Decrement By subtract the Semaphore Instruction count from the count of the Semaphore Equal To set the count of the Semaphore equal to the count of the Semaphore Instruction A Semaphore count can be used by a Module s Wait For and Chain If preconditions and Run When and Run Until conditions See Section 2 3 1 1 Module Preconditions for more information on the use of Counter Semaphore preconditions See Section 2 3 1 3 for information on Module run conditions The count of a Semaphore can never be less than zero so subtracting from the count of a Semaphore whose count is zero has no effect on the count and decrementing by a value greater than the Semaphore count will merely set the count to zero Semaphores also can be used to create responses to time operations See the Semaphore Report section in chapter 5 entitled Network Output Reports for an explanation of how to time operations using Semaphores to define a response 2 2 2 Transfer Device Details As mentioned in the Transfer Device Overview section Transfer Devices TDs are the links connecting Processing Elements and Storage Devices They are used to move data between two Processing Elements or between a Processing Element and a Storage Device Data is moved between Processing Elements over a Transfer Device as the result of a Message Instruction and between a Processing Eleme
361. ta structures that have been examined and any errors associated with each individual data structure The Verify Report will be displayed in an editor native to the platform on which you are running NETWORK Windows Notepad unix vi Verify ALL The Verify ALL command requests verification of the entire model The Verify ALL command is the only way to perform the top level verify checks Verify Destination Mix Verify Echo PE List 112 Chapter 3 NETWORK Verify Gateway Verify Instruction Mix Verify LAN Verify Macro Instruction Verify Module Verify Processing Element Verify Route Verify Storage Device Verify Statistical Distribution Function Verify Transfer Device To verify only those data structures of the same type select that type from the Verify Menu Verification will then proceed for all data structures of the given type Thus selecting the Verify Module command will perform a verification on all Modules in your model If three are no data structures of any of the given types that type will not be selectable on the Verify Menu Verify Recall The Verify Recall command redisplays the most recent verification report and is not available if verify has not been previously called 3 4 6 The Analysis Menu 113 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORK II 5 Edit Define Display Verify HEEE Display Modules Start Simulation Animation Convert Plot Browse Report The Analysis Menu Analysis Display Module
362. ted later This type of error would not be identified by pass one pass two or model verification Only by running the simulation could NETWORK determine if the file in question was created before it was requested The general philosophy in dealing with runtime errors is to keep the simulation going rather than to kill the model run when a runtime error is encountered You may have a substantial investment in computer time and useful information may still be available despite the error Also multiple runtime errors may be detected in a single simulation Runtime warnings may be sent to the simulation Report File to the display or to both places If a simulation is submitted as a batch run runtime errors and warnings will be sent to the Simulation Report File Runtime warnings may be viewed after the simulation by selection Analysis Browse Reports 317 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual When a runtime warning is sent to your display a description of the error condition and several options are presented to you These options are described in further detail in Chapter 5 laa ATINA AT a EM 6 AA SEC pda CHECA BS EARE BUFFER 7 ha 4 i A q A Runtime Warning TEXTWORK is the text based simulation program It produces the same Runtime Warnings but displayed as plain text are presented in a different manner for TEXTWORK in comparison with the graphical version SIMWORK An example of a TEXTWORK runtime warning is given
363. ted message is displayed This message includes the actual amount of real time elapsed during the simulation and the number of runtime warnings encountered 4 4 HOW LONG TO RUN A NETWORK II 5 SIMULATION One of the more difficult decisions to make when conducting a simulation is the length of time to simulate The longer the simulation is run the greater the confidence you may have in the answers and the higher the cost in computer time Therefore the length of the simulation run can be a tradeoff between confidence and cost Choosing simulation lengths is an art and this section simply presents qualitative concepts that you may find useful In many simulations there is an underlying time basis for scheduling most of the workload Modules may be iterating in terms of seconds microseconds etc If the longest iteration period for any module is T then running the simulation for 10 times T might be a good starting point As a minimum a simulation length that will allow all modules to run at least once should probably be chosen An important reason for using NETWORK II 5 is that it simulates the interaction between various hardware and software elements An ideal simulation would run until every possible combination of interactions has occurred Unfortunately in a complex 211 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual system this could take days weeks or years One approach is to use the periodic reports to help determine the run length By running t
364. tem the effects of contention are identified in NETWORKS report of total system performance 1 2 OVERVIEW OF THE NETWORK II 5 SYSTEM The NETWORK II 5 package provides three main functions system description system simulation and simulation analysis System description is handled by graphical layout of the hardware elements and the use of graphics based forms to describe the component attributes System simulation is simply a matter of invoking the simulation program for the system description that you have built NETWORK II 5 does not require any programming so there are never any programming delays You can look at any of the reports as the simulation runs and or follow an event trace that tells you exactly what is going on inside the simulation NETWORK II 5 contains a rich repertoire of simulation Chapter 1 Introduction analysis tools First and foremost is animation You can actually see your system in operation making many problems obvious by inspection You can plot device status and utilization as a function of time The plots are based on a database constructed during the simulation run You may access that database directly for custom reports Finally there 1s a comprehensive set of tabular reports written at the end of the simulation You can view this file with our built in browser or print it out as documentation NETWORK II 5 111 03 Simulation Utilization 18 paz 38 48 58 OFFICE 2 E par o a 48 58 OFFICE L
365. ternal LAN Traffic data file but not in the simulation Simulation cannot be started The entities in an External Traffic File EXT must match those in the Network Description File NET Otherwise the simulation will not run If you encounter this error Check the entities in the Network Description File and rerun TRAFLINK 40 External Traffic No TD connection to source PE WARNING At 0 0 SEC the external traffic file tried to send a message from pe PE2 over td ETHERNET This pe is not connected to this td Traffic ignored This error is generated if in the course of sending a message by external traffic the source PE is not connected to the TD to be used as the carrier When this error occurs the external traffic message is skipped and the external traffic file advances to the next event 41 External Traffic No TD connection to destination PE WARNING At 49 224880 SEC the external traffic file tried to send a message to pe PEl over td TOKEN RING This pe is not connected to this td Traffic ignored This error is generated if the destination PE of an external traffic message is not connected to the TD used as the carrier When this error occurs the external traffic message is skipped and the external traffic file advances to the next event Global Flag Runtime Warnings 42 Max Message Delivery Combinations Global Flag exceeded WARNING At 4 99221
366. the Iterate by Priority check box is selected Modules scheduled by iteration period at the same time will be scheduled in the order of highest priority If the Iterate by Priority check box is not selected a Module with a lower priority than another Module scheduled at the same time may be activated first 177 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Run Batch Simulation This check box is intended for those platforms in which a non interactive simulation can be launched If the box is marked YES SIMWORK will use the run parameters saved in the model description to control the simulation Minimize Random Seed Array If the Minimize Random Seed Array check box is selected random seed array assignments will use as few seeds as possible as close to each other as possible If the Minimize Random Seed Array check box is not selected random seed array assignments are made as they were prior to NETWORK II 5 R6 0 Maximum Message Delivery Combinations The Maximum Message Delivery Combinations control allows you to specify the number of delivery combinations a message will traverse before the simulation program generates a runtime warning The runtime warning notifies you of potential memory wasting conditions A message delivery combination is uniquely identified by the source PE message text and destination PE either interim or final The default value is 999 Maximum Module Messages The Maximum Module Messages control allows you to specify the number
367. the PE s Gateways and SD s connected to the LAN The order of the list determines the token passing order for the token LAN implementations Connections may be added deleted or moved in the list by using the Add Cut and Move buttons next to the list box 149 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 3 5 6 Storage Device Form o NETWORKS Y 154 E Storage Device Name MEM 1 IX Include in Plot File File List Size 1 Time Units MICROSECONDS A Library Capacity 1000000 BITS Number of Ports E Bits Per Word 8 Words Per Block 1024 Access Time Per Word Read 2 MIE write 2 mic Overhead Per Word Read 0 mic write fo mic Overhead Per Block Read SEEK TIME MIC LJ Write SEEK TIME MIC Ea Access Delay Read fo MIC wie fo mic Iln l lalala The Storage Device Form Capacity A Storage Device capacity must be entered as a real value Number of Ports Bits per Word Words per Block These parameters must be entered as integer values 150 Chapter 3 NETWORK _NETWORK II 5 F Storage Device al OO OOOO File List OO ll Time Unit la Capacity Bits Per Y Read E a Read o eN E Read S Access Delay Read fo MIC write fo mic The File List Form Access Time per Word Overhead per Word Overhead per Block Access Delay These parameters may be a real number or may be chosen from a SDF To use a SDF either ente
368. the PE request is queued When the requested file becomes available it is assigned on a first come first served basis to a requesting PE and the delay the PE encountered is added to these statistics If a Storage Device has only one port only one PE at a time may access the SD and there will be no file delay Number of Interrupted Accesses The number of times a Module was interrupted while using this Storage Device after being granted access to both the Storage Device and a file Average Maximum Standard Deviation Interrupt Time Statistics on the amount of Storage Device time consumed by interrupted file accesses Number of Completed Accesses The number of file accesses completed on the Storage Device 238 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File Average Maximum Standard Deviation Usage Time Statistics on the amount of time a PE used a SD port before releasing it The usage time does not include delays encountered while waiting for a port to become available but does include delays encountered while waiting for a file Average Maximum Standard Deviation Bits Used Cumulative statistics on size in bits of both files and General Storage compiled from the start of simulation or reset time to the time of the report Per Cent Utilization The percentage of time from the start of simulation or reset time until the time of this report that one or more ports of this device were allocated to a PE 5 5 7 Global Module Queue Statistics The Gl
369. the runtime warning and to prescribe how to handle future runtime warnings Each of these options is described below 196 Chapter 4 Running a Simulation EP H TIA O e LA AAA A ET bs ed Ae cm meei beet A Sample Runtime Error Runtime Warning Button Report Summary reports containing simulation statistics may be generated by clicking on the Report button of the Runtime Warnings Form Select the name of a desired report from the list that is presented or use the Cancel command to return immediately to the simulation Your choice of reports is the same as you have from the menubar Runtime Warning Button Quit The Quit button terminates the simulation run A confirmation will be requested prior to exiting The Final Reports are produced as of the time the simulation was canceled Runtime Warning Button Continue Selecting the Continue command will resume the simulation from the point at which it was interrupted The action that the simulation will take in response to the runtime warning will be included in the runtime warning message Runtime Warning Check Boxes Message to File Future Messages to Screen The Message to File and Future Messages to Screen options allow you to enable disable the notification of future runtime warning messages If the same type of runtime 197 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual warnings are being generated frequently these options allow you to speed up the simulation execution and reduce the size of t
370. then the plot time span 50 milliseconds If the plot interval 5 milliseconds the percentage utilization of a device at time 25 milliseconds time bin 50 is the percent of time the device was in use from 20 to 25 milliseconds Correspondingly if the interval were 10 milliseconds the percent of time busy would be measured from 15 seconds to 25 milliseconds If the interval specified is equal to one time bin the utilization plot approaches the device s instantaneous utilization If the maximum interval is employed the final point of the utilization plot represents the device s average utilization during the simulation 7 3 2 Select Plot Increment Utilization A Select Plot Increment Utilization plot is defined by 2 parameters a start time and an interval The end time is then computed as 100 intervals from the start time The end time must be within the run length of the simulation plotted The Select Plot Increment Utilization plot does not offer moving window averaging capability Each plotted point represents only the activity that occurred during that time bin The Select Plot Increment Utilization plot is offered so systems with unusual intervals can be easily plotted using intervals that make sense in the simulated domain 264 Chapter 7 Plotting Simulation Results NE TWeCOHRK 11 5 i Flot start 8 Flot increment 13 FILLISECOMA A teat kan toreros tna tate ta tas A Select Plot Increment Util
371. this process until you are satisfied with the TDs you want to import TRAFLINK III Import Topology Links Selected 0x56c401f5 0x56c40332 Cancer 0x56c40333 0x56c40334 0x56c40335 0x56c405f2 0x56c405f3 Remove Link 0x56c405f4 0x56c40625 New Using Filter 134 141 252 0 Remove Using Filter Preview __Add Using Filter i Set Globals 134 141 55 0 Figure 10 5 Import Topology Preview Form On selection of the Import option TRAFLINK will automatically generate a NETWORK II 5 model file based on the TDs and LANs you have chosen TRAFLINK will place your network topology on the NETWORK canvas Now you are back into the NETWORK environment and you can edit modify and perform what if scenarios by extending the model without the need of any programming The PEs and TDs represented in the network have default values and may be modified to your requirements The next step might be to import LAN Traffic into the model topology just developed 337 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 10 2 2 Importing LAN Traffic into NETWORK II 5 The basic steps in creating an External Traffic File ext are as follows 1 Capture a LAN traffic file 2 Build a model using NETWORK II 5 possibly by using Topology import 3 Invoke TRAFLINK using the Menu option Import External Traffic 4 Select Traffic File prn captured using network analyzer tools such as Network General SNIFFER HP Net
372. those of the library item when you return from the library form The Copy button allows you to copy a library element from the current list of library elements directly to a different library file After the name of an item is highlighted and the Copy button is selected NETWORK will request a library file name in which the selected item will be saved 188 Chapter 4 Running a Simulation 4 RUNNING A SIMULATION 4 1 INTRODUCTION A NETWORK II 5 simulation is normally launched directly from the menubar in NETWORK by selecting Analysis Start Simulation It also can be started by invoking the SIMWORK or TEXTWORK programs directly SIMWORK is the graphics based simulation program which is activated by NETWORK TEXTWORK not available for Windows 3 1 is the same simulation program with a text based user interface The purpose of providing a text based interface to the modeling engine is to allow batch simulation runs TEXTWORK also allows running a simulation from a remote computer which only has command line access to a host computer An example of using remote command line access would be to run a simulation over the internet using a telnet session During the simulation reports and trace messages are available In addition you will be notified of simulation warning and error conditions as they occur throughout the simulation run Output produced by the simulation program includes the simulation Report File file type LIS and the simulatio
373. time Warnings and future messages to the display listing file both or neither to enable disable the notification of future runtime warning messages If the same type of runtime warnings are being generated frequently these options allow you to speed up the simulation execution and reduce the size of the Simulation Report File LIS by having runtime warning messages directed to neither destination Would you like runtime messages directed to your Terminal the Listing file Both places or Neither place T L B N gt t Simulation Control When a runtime warning is generated you are given the option to stop the simulation A print a snapshot report S print a summary report O or continue the simulation C Do you want to Abort print Snapshot Other report or Continue A S 0 C 210 Chapter 4 Running a Simulation gt 0 Which Report do you want for choices LIST for current selections Y Choices Processing Element P Module M Storage Device TSD Transfer Device CTD Semaphore SE Instruction Execution IE Snapshot s Message ME All Which Report do you want for choices LIST for current selections 4 3 6 The Simulation Completed Message Current Time is 1000 000000 SECONDS Simulation complete No runtime warning or error messages were issued This simulation took 2 seconds to execute At the end of a TEXTWORK simulation the simulation comple
374. tion List is a list of the names of the Processing Elements Storage Devices and Gateways which connect to this Transfer Device Using the reserved word in this list will connect this Transfer Device to every Processing Element Storage Device and Gateway in the simulation Some of the TD protocols also require a key value to be associated with some or all of the Connections Generally this list will be created graphically in NETWORK by drawing the connections from a TD to PEs and SDs 2 2 2 2 1 Transfer Device Error Attributes A Block Error Probability may be specified to model data transfers lost due to noise on a TD The probability is a percentage between O and 100 percent The default is zero percent which means no blocks are lost A probability of 100 percent is allowed meaning that no blocks are ever delivered The Scale Error flag is used if you set a non zero Block Error Probability Blocks have a maximum size If you send less than a full block and set the Scale Error flag YES the probability of error will be scaled down since fewer bits are being sent In effect setting the Block Error Probability to YES turns it from a block error probability to a bit error probability As an example take the case of sending 512 bits over a TD with an Error Probability of 02 percent and a 1024 bit block size If Scale Error YES the Error Probability used will be multiplied a factor of 1 2 resulting in a probability of 01 33 NETWORK II
375. tion PE If there is no Transfer Device connection to the destination PE the Message Instruction will be cancelled Message and Read Write Instruction Runtime Warnings 23 Crossbar TD listed with other TDs WARNING At 12 003420 pe WS 1 called instruction SEND MSG 4 which has multiple allowed tds one of which uses the CROSSBAR protocol Multiple allowed tds not permitted for CROSSBAR Allowed td CENTRAL SWITCH ignored If a Message Instruction or a Read Write Instruction has more than 1 TD in the Allowed TD list none of the Allowed TDs should have the Crossbar protocol Read Write Instruction Runtime Warnings 24 Non Existent File Referenced WARNING At 000500000 SEC instruction INS 1 on pe PE 1 tried to access file FILE 1 from MEMORY 1 but the file is not there A Read Instruction has attempted to access a file that does not exist on the referenced Storage Device Possibly the file has not been created by a Write Instruction the file was not created in the model or a destructive Read Instruction has been performed unexpectedly 325 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual In response to this error condition the NETWORK will create the referenced file with size equal to zero bits and proceed as if the file were available 25 Storage Device Full WARNING At 000723056 SEC No room in MEMORY1 to enlarge file FILE1 NETWORK continuously monitors the available spac
376. tion and the object will remain in its new position 89 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETYORK II 5 vi File Edit Define Display Verify Analysis Help PE 1 PE 2 HA gt MSG FILE GW 1 TD2 A JA 2 ha P va The Display Prior to a TD LAN Move If you position a TD or LAN icon the manner in which the TD LAN icon and the icons of connected PEs SDs move depends on NETWORK TD LAN Move Mode four are available in the Controls Form If the mode is TD LAN only the TD LAN icon moves independent of all connected devices If the mode is TD LAN and Local PEs SDs all Pes and SDs that are connected solely to this TD LAN will move relative to the TD LAN icon If the mode is TD LAN and All Connected PEs SDs all Pes and SDs connected to this TD LAN will move relative to the TD LAN icon The fourth move mode TD LAN and All Connected PEs SDs and Gateways will also move any connected Gateways relative to the TD LAN icon Multiple objects may be positioned as a group To do so click once on several icons PE TD SD LAN Gateway label on the display to highlight them Then click and drag a single icon PE SD Gateway or label but not a TD or LAN and reposition it Each highlighted icon will move relative to the repositioned icon 90 Chapter 3 NETWORK NETWORK II 5 hd E File Edit Define Display Verify Analysis Help FEI PE2 TD1 MSG FILE sh GW TD2 MSG FILE A BA 5D 1 PE
377. tion of NETWORK that is available for several NETWORK II 5 data types 3 2 BASICS OF CREATING A MODEL The basics in building a model system description are as follows 1 Establish the network topology by creating PEs SDs Gateways TDs and LANs Connect the PEs SDs and Gateways to the TDs and LANs as desired 2 Define the network operation by creating Modules instructions statistical distribution functions Semaphores Routes Echo PE Lists Destination Mixes Instruction Mixes and Macro Instructions and by setting the attributes of the PEs SDs Gateways TDs and LANs 3 Set global model attributes via the Define Controls commands 4 Verify the model by selecting Verify from the menubar 5 Set up the run parameters with the Analysis Start Simulation command 6 Save the model by clicking on the File Save command 3 2 1 Defining the Network Topology The NETWORK toolbar on the left side of the display contains buttons for creating and manipulating the network topology and display The toolbar buttons used in creating the network topology include the Connect Button Processing Element Button Transfer Device Button LAN Button Storage Device Button and the Gateway Button The Select Button is used to select building blocks for editing and by default is the active button The Label Button allows you to position text labels throughout the display The Scale Button is used to change the magnification of the display 82 Ch
378. tions 4 Semaphore Instructions The Instruction Repertoire of a Processing Element in NETWORK II 5 is not meant to be the literal instruction set of the machine being simulated although it may be Instead it 1s more likely to consist of very high level pseudo instructions A database query might thus be listed as a single instruction even though it consists of hundreds of machine level instructions This level of description may be used because the actual code of the algorithm is undecided or because timing considerations for an entire system are being studied and simulation at the machine instruction level would be unnecessarily detailed NETWORK II 5 is designed to simulate the effect of an instruction on the system being simulated as opposed to computing a numerical result Therefore macro instructions such as database query can be mixed with assembler instructions in a Processing Element s Instruction Repertoire This allows a simulation with items of special interest 12 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 modelled down to the machine instruction level while the remainder of the system is modelled at a coarser level Gateways are a special case of the PE building block A Gateway is a modeling convenience which allows you to easily model a device whose function is to transfer data from one Transfer Device to another The name Gateway is used in a generic sense The devices a NETWORK II 5 Gateway connects may be of the same pr
379. tivity which occurs before the Reset Time will be ignored in the simulation Report File s summary reports This feature allows you to warm up a simulation whose start up activities may be different from its steady state activities Do you want the statistics reset during the run Y N ABORT gt y Enter the time to reset statistics IN SECONDS gt 10 TEXTWORK Run Parameters Periodic Reports The periodic summary reports provide simulation statistics for the selected items in the Periodic Report List PE instruction TD SD module semaphore message snapshot The reports are written to the Simulation Report File Do you wish to have periodic reporting Y N ABORT gt y OO 202 Chapter 4 Running a Simulation Report Scheduling If evenly spaced reports are requested TEXTWORK asks for the number of reports to be produced during the simulation For example if the simulation run length is one second and reports are desired every quarter second three periodic reports should be requested Do you want evenly spaced periodic reports Y N ABORT How many periodic reports do you want gt 4 l Otherwise TEXTWORK asks when the reports should first be printed the time interval for succeeding sets of reports and the time for the last set of reports to be printed Do you want evenly spaced periodic reports Y N ABORT Isai When do you want the first report IN SECO
380. to the number of bits written In case you write more bits as an update than the file contains 1t will grow in size to be the number of bits written by the update instruction The Resume Flag applies to both Read and Write instructions in instances where an interruption of the instruction occurs If the Resume Flag NO this instruction will restart from the beginning if interrupted If the Resume Flag YES this instruction will only read or write the number of bits not yet transmitted when resumed The Storage Device To Access is the name of the Storage Device that contains the File Accessed Wild cards are allowed for the Storage Device To Access see Section Wild Cards for a description of wild cards For a Read Instruction a wild card in the Storage Device To Access specification will cause a search for a Storage Device whose name matches the wild card and contains the File Accessed The order of search is the order of appearance in the Connection List of the Transfer Device chosen Failure to find a matching Storage Device name results in a runtime error and the instruction is aborted For a Write Instruction a wild card in the Storage Device To Access specification will cause the file to be written to a Storage Device whose name matches the wild card and has enough room to store the entire file written The order of search is the order of appearance in the Connection List of the Transfer Device chosen If none of the Storage 22 Ch
381. to use wild card options for adding removing TDs to from the list The wild card filtering may also be used on existing list by using the Add Using Filter and Remove Using Filter option TRAFLINK III Filters Remove from Current List Remove All Links that Match _ Add Link Remave Wild Card 0x5 Figure 10 3 Remove link s Using Filter Form c Global Filtering Select the Set Globals option at the bottom of the Import Form This acts as a global filter it allows you to set the number of PE connections a particular TD LAN Segment should have before it is selected for import You can also specify to import all the PEs and or import all the unmanaged links Please consult your network management tool s user manual for further information on managed and unmanaged links By default only PEs connected to a link are included in the topology import Set Min Connect Link to zero to import all nodes 15 Global Filters Min connect Link ih Apply Include ALL Nodes x Include Unmanaged Links Cancel _ Preview 336 Chapter 10 TRAFLINK III Figure 10 4 Global Filter Form 10 2 1 4 Importing LAN Traffic Traflink imports only those PEs which are connected to the TDs LAN Segments selected TRAFLINK allows you to examine this using the Preview option This shows you what you would get if you were to Import displaying all the TDs and PEs which have been selected filtered for import You can repeat
382. tream for use by this mechanism As an alternative to statistical selection a Module may have Anded Successors The Anded Successor list is a list of Modules all of which are to be selected for activation when this Module completes Each selection may be subject to a further condition This condition is a chain count of two possible types Iterate Then Skip Count and Iterate Then Chain Count If the Iterate Then Skip Count for a Module is n a successor Module will be scheduled after the execution of the current Module on the same PE n times At the n 1 execution the chaining attempt to the successor Module will be skipped This sequence repeats indefinitely Separate counts are kept for each of a Module s host PEs to maintain the independence of the individual PE s If the Iterate Then Chain Count for a Module is n a chaining attempt to a successor Module will be skipped n times and then activated after the n 1 execution of the current Module on the same PE This sequence will then repeat indefinitely Separate counts are kept for each of the Module s host PEs Skip and chain counts are used to control looping through a Module chain they can cut iteration rates in half for example To have a Module always chain to its Anded Successors select the Always Chain option 63 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual 2 3 2 Instruction Mixes Instruction Mixes are pseudo instructions included in the Instruction List of a Module
383. tructions above 10 5 Tips and Troubleshooting Error Messages 10 5 1 File Related Errors e ERROR File FORM NAME not found Please reinstall this software 350 Chapter 10 TRAFLINK III TRAFLINK looks for its forms in a file called traflink sg2 This file must be located in the same directory as TRAFLINK Check to see that this file is present If it is present possibly it is an older version of the file If the problem persists delete the current program directory and re install the software e ERROR File not found Tried to find FILE_NAME The input file FILE_NAME you are trying to load does not exist Check to see that the spelling extension and path of the file you are trying to load is correct e ERROR Do not save a file using a name longer than 8 characters Number of characters in DOS and Windows 3 x operating systems is limited to 8 This is should not be a problem in any other operating systems e ERROR You cannot save a file using a name that contains blanks Blanks within a file name is not permitted in TRAFLINK e ERROR FILE_NAME is reserved for use by PROGRAM_NAME and cannot be used by the user file The following file names are invalid since they are used internally by the program AUTOSAVE NET SIMUDUMP NET 10 5 2 Traffic File Related Error Messages e ERROR NODE not defined for ARC LV_ARC in file FILE NAME e ERROR LINK not defined for
384. ture has when created with the toolbar shown as lt default icon gt in the name list and a group of basic shape icons The basic shape icons are listed as lt rectangle icon gt available only for PEs lt hexagon icon gt available only for SDs and 180 Chapter 3 NETWORK lt octagon icon gt available only for Gateways The special basic shape icons cannot be scaled or rotated Color The Color combo box is available on the PE and Gateway graphics forms only To change the color of an icon select the down arrow of the Color combo box and choose a new color from the list Scale The icon scale controls the size of a hardware data structure s icon on the display The scale value ranges from 0 01 to 10 The default scale of 1 presents a file icon at the size it was created Increasing the scale above 1 increases the size of the icon Decreasing the scale below 1 decreases the file icon size The special basic shape icons rectangle PE octagon Gateway and hexagon SD cannot be scaled Because a TD LAN is drawn using line segments 1t has Horizontal and Vertical Scale parameters Rotate The icon rotation controls the angle at which a hardware data structure s icon is displayed The rotation value may range from 359 9 degrees to 359 9 degrees The default rotation is 0 degrees Only a file icon may be rotated Attempting to rotate an internal icon will have no effect on the icon Name Offset The PE Gateway and SD graphics
385. u may continue adding hardware components to your model or you may fill in the details of the newly created SD To define the attributes of a new SD double click on the SD icon Or you may click on the SD to highlight its image and then select Edit Detail from the menubar Once you have done this the Storage Device form will be displayed in which you may completely define the SD by changing its attributes and adding files KE TYSOHK 114 xja E pa rr a Fie Lint Sire a Y elector MICROSECOMDS El i Tasir maana BITS a 1 Ho g rewa ooo eee _ A 1 Accom Dima Por ef A A a C H o Per Weed Mud o ar EJ waa fa mit al L f feed i lar wate i e C Sor Neda Reed 0 ef E Defining Storage Device Attributes The first Storage Device in the example model is named MEM 1 To change the name of the new SD default name SD 1 click directly on the text box labeled Name and enter 280 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation MEM 1 Once you OK the form the SD will have its name changed and any other references to the name SD 1 in the model will also be changed Change the name of the second SD to RADAR DISH in the same way MEM 1 will have a sector size of 1024 bytes This is modeled by setting the Bits per Word to 8 bits and the Words per Block to 1024 The access time is added by setting the Read and Write Access Time per Word to 2 microseconds The seek time will be modeled with a Statistical Distrib
386. u specify a Route as a destination A Route is defined at the top level by giving it a name and a list of PE Gateway and Destination Mix names each of which may have an allowed TD LAN list If a message instruction uses a Route the message sent will visit each PE or Gateway along the Route in the order they appear until it reaches the end of the Route The last entry in a Route must be a PE or a Destination Mix that will produce a PE name A Gateway is not a valid final destination for a message 45 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Gateways automatically include the ability to forward messages along a route However each PE found in a Route must have a user defined Module to pass along the message This user defined Module must use the message as a Wait For type Message Status Requirement or a wild card Message Status Requirement that matches the message and then call a Message Instruction whose Message Text is and whose destination is the reserved word NEXT The message instruction will then use the destinations and allowed TD lists found in the Route If no forwarding Module exists at the destination no error is generated and the message is not forwarded For example consider the case of a system of 3 TDs connecting 4 PEs as shown in the following diagram MSG F ILE TD 2 MSG F ILE MSG F ILE A Sample Simulation Using a Route The easiest way to send a message from PE 1 to PE 4 is to define a route that consists of PE 2 PE 3
387. ues In many cases the initial text or value displayed is NR No Response to indicate that the default value is to be used and no user selected text or value has been entered A new value can be entered directly by clicking within the box and changing the text number displayed there Combo Boxes A combo box is used to make a selection from a fixed list of choices such as setting time units Selecting the down arrow on the right side of the combo box displays the list of choices and selecting a list item will remove the list and put the selected list item in the combo box Check Boxes Check boxes represent a YES NO value A check mark in the box is equivalent to a YES value while no check mark is equivalent to a NO value Radio Buttons Radio buttons are used in situations where only one option from a series of options is valid at a given time Selecting a radio button from a radio button group will deselect all of the other radio buttons in the group The selected radio button is represented as a filled circle while deselected radio buttons are shown as empty circles 3 1 4 Chapter Organization Section 3 2 explains the basics of creating a model using NETWORK s menubar toolbar and forms Section 3 3 describes how to manipulate the graphical display Section 3 4 provides a reference for the menubar pulldown items Section 3 5 describes 81 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual NETWORKS attribute forms Section 3 6 describes the Library func
388. upt Time Statistics on the time spent by interrupted Modules waiting for the PE to complete a higher priority Module The statistics do not include Modules which were interrupted and have not been restarted Maximum A verage Standard Deviation Interrupt Queue Size Each PE has its own Interrupt Queue The Interrupt Queue contains Modules that are interrupted These time weighted queue statistics refer to the number of interrupted Modules in the queue from the start of simulation or reset time to the current time including those times the queue was empty Maximum A verage Standard Deviation Message Bits Time weighted statistics on the size of a PE s received message list When a PE receives a message it is stored in the PE s received message list until it is removed by a Module If every message that is placed in the PE s received message list is removed instantaneously by a Module then the Maximum will have a value greater than zero while the Average and Standard Deviation remain zero Maximum A verage Standard Deviation Module Queue Size Statistics on the size of the PE Module Queue Modules enter the PE Module Queue when 1 A Module with no predecessors has met all of its preconditions and this PE is an Allowed or Resident PE of the Module 2 A predecessor Module on this PE chains to the Module 3 A Module with multiple Allowed or Resident PEs takes a message from the Received Message List of this PE and then queues for this PE
389. urn the name display on or off set the check box next to the desired item The Scale Text and Scale Labels check boxes are used to scale text equal to the display scale The Set Font and Default Font buttons are used to change the display text font or restore it to the default Click on the OK button to accept changes and redraw the display NETWORK II 5 bd Ed M w Ea al Fi B PE Name PE Gateway Nane s Ral a X TD LAN Name X SD Name X MSG File X Scale Text X Scale Labels Default Font The Text Font Form Display Title Setup The Display Title Setup command allows you to select a title to be displayed Available selections include the Product Name the File Title the File Name or No Title The File Title is the first line of the top model comment of a Network Description File The top 108 Chapter 3 NETWORK model comment may be entered by clicking on the File Title button The Position button will let you change the position of a title on the display Use the Set Font and Default Font buttons to change the title s text font or restore it to the original default font NETWORK II 5 hd E Title Menu Display as Title w En al ah E rad e E Aa al File Title C File Name lt new file gt a No Title Default Font The Title Setup Form Display Refresh Screen The Display Refresh Screen command redraws the entire display with the current model drawing information This comm
390. urse of action If you wish to run a simulation unattended send Runtime Warnings only to the simulation Report File or to neither the listing file nor your display A complete description of the Runtime Warnings which may be encountered during a simulation is given in Chapter 9 of this manual TEXTWORK Run Parameters Trace If a narrative trace is requested TEXTWORK writes a brief description of simulation events to your display and or to the simulation Report File Do you wish to trace the event flow Y N ABORT Y If you choose to trace simulation events you must specify the names of model components to be traced the Trace Start Time and the Trace Stop Time Everything in your model can be traced by selecting ALL and entire entity classes may be selected by clicking on ALL PES ALL TDS ALL SDS ALL INSTRUCTIONS and ALL MODULES External traffic which was captured with a LAN Analyzer may be traced by selecting lt External Traffic gt Enter the name of a PE Instruction Transfer Device Storage Device or odule to trace Type LIST to display all traceable names ALL ALL PES ALL INSTRUCTIONS ALL MODULES ALL TDS ALL SDS and lt EXTERNAL RAFFIC gt may be specified gt all Do you want the trace to be printed on your SCREEN on the LISTING FILE or BOTH T L B gt t The Trace Start Time and Trace Stop Time determine the trace interval which is the period during t
391. usive of the actual instruction execution times This is because NETWORK II 5 spends a considerable portion of the CPU time required to set up a module checking the module preconditions Level of Detail Make sure that your model provides the proper level of detail If a function is of no real importance to a simulation leave it out Don t model every PE at the micro instruction level if you only need that much detail on one PE Dont add more preconditions than are absolutely necessary Sometimes once a function is modeled in very fine detail conclusions can be drawn based on simulation results that allow remodeling that function at a much higher level in future simulation runs at a significant saving in CPU time 4 6 Summary The techniques most likely to produce a payoff in reduced execution time are reducing the simulation run length and aggregating instructions and modules Cutting the NETWORK II 5 simulation time in half by going through an existing simulation and combining instructions and modules is sometimes possible 214 Chapter 5 Simulation Report File CHAPTER 5 THE SIMULATION REPORT FILE 5 1 INTRODUCTION The simulation Report File file type LIS is a text file which contains the results generated by either SIMWORK or TEXTWORK during a simulation Three categories of reports are available in the simulation Report File These are the Playback Reports the Runtime Trace Reports and the Summary Reports The Playback
392. utilization plot for MEM 1 shows a fairly stable average usage of just under 40 KE TYE 11 5 ca TIPE THE FLIGHT STRING Fiil ka lija 31 1 Mens Does Pmi Dons A Response Time Plot The response time plot shows response times for the semaphore TIME THE FLIGHT STRING between 17 000 and 21 000 microseconds approximately You could select the Data button to save the exact data points into a file 293 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual The following pages contain a copy of the report file created by running this file type LIS and the Network Description file type NET that NETWORK II 5 created The Network Description file is provided for reference Normally you would only work with the model graphically 294 Chapter 8 A Complete Simulation CACI NETWORK II 5 RELEASE 11 09 04 01 1996 14 35 41 PAGE 1 A SAMPLE PROBLEM FOR NETWORK II 5 PROCESSING ELEMENT UTILIZATION STATISTICS FROM Ox TO 1 SECONDS ALL TIMES REPORTED IN MICROSECONDS e
393. ution Function by selecting the Read Overhead per Block double dots button and entering the name of a new SDF SEEK TIME The capacity of MEM 1 is also defined in the SD Form by clicking on the value box labeled Capacity and entering a value 1000000 RADAR DISH will have a sector size of 256 bytes This is modeled by setting the Bits per Word to 8 bits and the Words per Block to 256 The access time is added by setting the Read and Write Access Time per Word to 4 microseconds No additional attributes are changed for RADAR DISH 8 3 4 Connecting a TD to a PE or SD After you have added PEs SDs and TDs to the display you need to connect the hardware devices The Connect Icon on the palette second from the top provides this function Click once on the Connect icon and then position your cursor on a TD Click on the TD to start the connection and then click on the PE or SD to be connected and click again The devices connected should now be joined by a line and the name of the device connected will appear in the connection list of the TD You can continue adding connections at this point or click anywhere on the background to end the creation of connections If you redraw a connection between two connected items the previously displayed connection is removed To create the connections found in the example click on the Connect Icon from the palette Next previously described steps to connect Bus 1 to PE 1 MEM 1 and PE 2 Connect BUS 2 to ME
394. utomatically defined seeds try to use the seeds not specified by the user starting with seed 2 The most significant difference you will notice occurs when you add a SDF If Minimize Random Seed Array 1s NO the seed used to generate random start time changes so the start times change If YES seed 1 is still used and all start times remain the same The default for Minimize 73 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual Random Seed Array is YES This option is provided for compatibility with older releases where Minimize Random Seed Array was always NO 2 3 9 Global Controls There are three categories of Global Controls Run Logic Options Statistical Options and Miscellaneous Options All global flags are defined at the top level of NETWORK with the Define Controls command Run Logic Options Iterate By Priority Maximum Message Delivery Combinations Maximum Module Messages The Iterate By Priority Flag is used to control the situation in which copies of one or more Modules scheduled by an Iteration Period are scheduled to execute at the same time If Iterate By Priority NO the Module with the longest Iteration Period will run next No consideration of the priority of the Modules is made Sometimes a lower priority Module will run in preference one with a higher priority because it was scheduled first If Iterate By Priority YES all copies of Modules scheduled by an iteration period for execution at the same time will execute in priority order
395. value serves as a graphical aid to identify when a device s utilization passes above a certain value You specify the threshold in the Plot Menu form A horizontal line will be drawn through each graph at the specified threshold value The default value for the threshold is 100 The threshold must be greater than zero percent and less than or equal to 100 percent 7 3 Utilization Plots The Utilization Plot is a histogram which measures a device s percentage utilization during a completed simulation There are two kinds of Utilization plots differing by how you specify the size of the bin that the plot uses The Select Plot Interval type of plot is specified by giving a Start Time and a Stop Time NETWORK then computes 262 Chapter 7 Plotting Simulation Results the size of the bin by dividing the time between Stop and Start by 100 The Select Plot Increment type of plot is specified by giving a Start Time and an increment size The stop time will then be the Start Time plus 100 of the specified increments Each plot type be discussed in its own section 7 3 1 Select Plot Interval Utilization A Select Plot Interval Utilization plot is defined by 3 parameters a start time an averaging window size called the interval and an end time The interval is used to adjust the time bins so that they may cover more than just the distance between two marks on the graph So one plotted point could represent the average of the previous 10 time
396. where x is the length of the original message and A and B are user defined coefficients A File Linear Distribution will also perform an Ax B calculation where x is the length of the original file Thus to turn a file into a message use a File Linear Distribution for message length The Queue Flag describes the course of action should another Received Message with the same Message Text appear in the Received Message List of a Destination If the Queue Flag NO and a copy of this Message Text already appears in the Destination s Received Message List the new copy of the Message Text is not added to the list The check of the list is made after the message has been completely transmitted This means all devices will be utilized as if there were a message transfer but no new copy of the message token will appear in the Received Message List The message will be considered lost and recorded as such in the Received Message Report This feature can be used to prevent multiple schedulings of a Module when the system loading causes a PE to fall behind It also prevents cluttering the Received Message List if you send a PE messages which are not used by a Module 26 Chapter 2 Modeling with NETWORK IL5 If the Queue Flag NO and no copy of this Message Text appears in the Received Message List the newly transmitted message will be added to the Destination s Received Message List If the Queue Flag YES the new copy of the message wil
397. xis represents the plotted time 7 6 PLOT SCAN OPTIONS First The First button jumps you to the first plot requested This button is deactivated if you are already viewing the first plot Last The Last command jumps you to the last utilization plot or group of timeline status plots This button is deactivated if you are already viewing the last plot Previous The Previous button redisplays the previous plot display This button is deactivated if you are viewing the first plot Next The Next command erases the current plot display and displays the next utilization count or response time plot or group of timeline status plots This button is deactivated if you are viewing the last plot Data The Data button invokes the routine that saves the data used to generate plots in a Graph Data File file type PDT You will be prompted for a file name before the save begins The data for each plot in the plot list will be saved The data is saved in a fixed column format A sample data file follows 267 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual oO0O0RROPOOOOOO Oo O Y O 10 10 O O NN SS NNANO0OO0ODOMNAONANSSSN eal IN O0OKRF0N NO O O my 9OOCOC COO FAA nA eG H H OS O 10 O O 0 O 0 0 O 0 0 SO OO OOOO OVO OO O20 O 0 0 O O O 4 o0OO00O0O0O0O0O0O0O0O0OOOO0OOoOo Oo 20 00 OOS OO OO OOo Oo Oo O FOO OOO OCO OO OO 0 00 0 O BO
398. y be reasonable to upgrade the basic instructions to larger units For example if Module descriptions include executions of 100 ADDs followed by 100 MULTs it might be more reasonable and equally accurate to define a LARGE ADD instruction which represents the time of 100 ADD instructions but executes as a single instruction Since the only effect of a processing instruction is to keep the processor busy for a period of time the effect is the same but the simulator will complete the simulation an order of magnitude faster Further information on how long to run a NETWORK II 5 simulation and efficiency considerations are included in Chapter 4 A sample problem is presented in Chapter 8 76 Chapter 3 NETWORK 3 THE NETWORK II 5 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE 3 1 INTRODUCTION NETWORK is the graphical user interface to NETWORK II 5 that is used to create modify and analyze a model The Network Description File NET that NETWORK produces serves as an input to the simulation program NETWORK II 5 oka File Edit Define Display Verify Analysis Help The NETWORK II 5 User Interface 3 1 1 OVERVIEW The primary focus of this chapter is to describe how to create edit and manipulate a model A detailed description is given on how to use the menubar toolbar and associated forms to create model components and edit their attributes This chapter does not focus 77 NETWORK II 5 User s Manual on the underlying modeling purposes o
399. y the simulation program The stream is used to control the random sequence in which numbers are chosen The stream value is not displayed for all distribution types Non Table Distribution Parameters In general the parameters for non table distributions may be edited directly on the SDF Form In most cases the parameters will be entered in the form of real values The number of parameters varies based on the distribution type Non table SDF types include beta constant erlang exponential file count file linear gamma IEEE backoff key linear log normal message count message linear normal pattern from file semaphore linear triangle and uniform 172 Chapter 3 NETWORK Table Distribution Parameters The table distribution types include pattern random linear and random step The pattern distribution has a simple table of values which is controlled by Add Cut and Move buttons The random linear and random step distributions also have a percent probability associated with each value entry so their tables consist of rows of value and percent boxes To enter a new value probability percent row to the bottom of the table enter a value and percent in the Value and Percent boxes to the right of the table and then click on the Add to Table button To change either the value or percent of a row in the table click directly on the value or percent box of the row in the table The Value and Percent boxes to the right of the table will th
400. ype of the Semaphore Status Requirement this check box will be selectable and can be set to YES NO If set to YES a Module cancelled by the Run Until condition is considered to have completed its execution and this will be included in the completed Module statistics otherwise the Module cancellation statistics will be updated Required Status or Count The group of radio buttons appearing below the Semaphore Status Requirement Type radio buttons is used to determine if the status of the selected Semaphore is to be monitored select either Set or Reset or if the Semaphore s count is to be monitored select the Count radio button If Count is selected as the Semaphore attribute to be monitored the Semaphore Count fields will be selectable Semaphore Count Enter an integer value in the Semaphore Count text box and then select one of the count checks from the group of radio buttons to the right of the Count box You may set up a Semaphore Status Requirement to be true if the Semaphore s count is greater than less than equal to or not equal to the count entered in the Semaphore Count box 3 5 11 4 Set Host Processing Elements The Set Host Processing Elements button will display the Module Host Processors Form to select a list of host Pes for a Module and to select their type Allowed or Resident If any Allowed Resident are added to a Module the number and type of host Pes will be displayed on the Module form next to the Set Host Process

Network II.5 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents